Canon G4100 User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for G4100 by Canon which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
G4000 series
Online Manual
Overview
Printing
Copying
Scanning
Faxing
Frequently Asked Questions
English
Contents
Using This Online Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Trademarks and Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Basic Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Printing Photos from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Faxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Handling Paper, Originals, Ink Tanks, etc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Loading Plain Paper / Photo Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Loading Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Loading Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Where to Load Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Loading Originals on the Platen Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Loading Documents in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Loading Based on Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Supported Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Refilling Ink Tanks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Refilling Ink Tanks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Checking Ink Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
If Printing Is Faint or Uneven. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Maintenance Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Cleaning the Print Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Deep Print Head Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Aligning the Print Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cleaning Paper Feed Rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Cleaning Inside the Printer (Bottom Plate Cleaning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Regulatory Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
WEEE (EU&EEA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Main Components and Their Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Main Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Rear View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Inside View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Confirming that the Power Is On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Turning the Printer On and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Checking the Power Plug/Power Cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Unplugging the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
LCD and Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Changing Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Changing the Print Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Managing the Printer Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Changing the Printer Operation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Changing Settings from Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Changing Settings from Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Setting Items on Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fax settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Print settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
LAN settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Dev. user settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Firmware update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Feed settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Reset setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Ink notification set.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
System information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
ECO settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Network Connection Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Default Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Another Printer Found with Same Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Connecting to Another Computer via LAN/Changing from USB to LAN Connection. . . . . . . . . . 149
Printing Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Changing Wireless LAN Connection Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Ensuring Optimal Printing Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Transporting Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Legal Restrictions on Scanning/Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Information about Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Supported Media Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Paper Load Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Unsupported Media Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Handling Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Printing from Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Printing from Application Software (Windows Printer Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Basic Printing Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Various Printing Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Setting a Page Size and Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Execute Borderless Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Scaled Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Page Layout Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Tiling/Poster Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Duplex Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Setting Up Envelope Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Printing on Postcards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Overview of the Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Canon IJ Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Printer Driver Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Quick Setup tab Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Main tab Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Page Setup tab Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Maintenance tab Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Canon IJ Status Monitor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Installing the MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Printing Directly from Smartphone/Tablet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Using Printer with Wireless Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Paper Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Making Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Setting Items for Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Scanning from Computer (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Using IJ Scan Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
What Is IJ Scan Utility (Scanner Software)?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Starting IJ Scan Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Using Auto Scan Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). . . . . . . . . . 264
IJ Scan Utility Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
IJ Scan Utility Main Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Settings Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Scanning Using Application Software (ScanGear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Scanning in Basic Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Basic Mode Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Advanced Mode Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
General Notes (Scanner Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Network Scan Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Scanning from Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Forwarding Scanned Data to Computer Using Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Setting Items for Scanning Using Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Preparing for Faxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Connecting Telephone Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Setting Telephone Line Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Setting Receive Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Setting Sender Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Sending Faxes Using Operation Panel of Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Resending Faxes (Redialing Busy Number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Setting Items for Sending Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Registering Recipients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Registering Recipients Using Operation Panel of Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Registering Fax/Telephone Number of Recipients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Registering Recipients in Group Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Changing Registered Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Deleting Registered Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Printing List of Registered Destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility2 (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Starting Up Speed Dial Utility2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Speed Dial Utility2 Dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Saving Registered Telephone Directory on Printer to Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Registering a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Changing a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Deleting a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Changing Sender Information Using Speed Dial Utility2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Registering/Changing Rejected Number Using Speed Dial Utility2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Registering Telephone Directory Has been Saved on Your Computer to Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Receiving Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Receiving Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Changing Paper Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Substitute Reception in Printer's Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Sending Faxes from Computer (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Sending a FAX (Fax Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Cannot Send Faxes from Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
General Notes (Fax Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Frequently Asked Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Network Settings and Common Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Connecting the Printer to a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Network Communication Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Cannot Find Printer on Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Setup (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Power Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking PC Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Printer's Wireless LAN Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Wireless LAN Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Printer's IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Security Software Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Wireless Router Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Cannot Proceed beyond Printer Connection Screen/Connect Cable Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Cannot Find Printer while Using Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Network Connection Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Printer Suddenly Cannot Be Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Network Key Unknown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Printer Cannot Be Used After Replacing Wireless Router or Changing Its Settings. . . . . . . . . . . 436
Other Network Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Checking Network Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Restoring to Factory Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Printing Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Printing Does Not Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
No Ink Comes Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Ink Runs Out Fast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Print Results Are Unsatisfactory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Paper Is Blank/Printing Is Blurry/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Appear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Colors Are Unclear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Lines Are Misaligned. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Paper Is Smudged / Printed Surface Is Scratched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Vertical Line Next to Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Scanning Problems (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Scanning Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Scanner Does Not Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Faxing Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Problems Sending Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Cannot Send a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Problems Receiving Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Quality of Received Fax is Poor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Telephone Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Cannot Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Telephone Disconnects During a Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Mechanical Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Power Does Not Come On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Power Shuts Off By Itself. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
USB Connection Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Cannot Communicate with Printer via USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Installation and Download Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Cannot Install MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Updating MP Drivers in Network Environment (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Errors and Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
An Error Occurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Message Appears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
List of Support Code for Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
List of Support Code for Error (Paper Jams). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
1300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Paper Is Jammed inside Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
1000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
1200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
1640. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
1700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
1890. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
2900. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
2901. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
4103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
5011. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
5012. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
5100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
5200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
5B00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
6000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Using This Online Manual
Symbols Used in This Document
Touch-enabled Device Users (Windows)
Symbols Used in This Document
Warning
Instructions that, if ignored, could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect
operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation.
Caution
Instructions that, if ignored, could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect
operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation.
Important
Instructions including important information. To avoid damage and injury or improper use of the
product, be sure to read these indications.
Note
Instructions including notes for operation and additional explanations.
Basics
Instructions explaining basic operations of your product.
Note
• Icons may vary depending on your product.
Touch-enabled Device Users (Windows)
For touch actions, you need to replace "right-click" in this document with the action set on the operating
system. For example, if the action is set to "press and hold" on your operating system, replace "right-click"
with "press and hold."
10
Trademarks and Licenses
• Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
• Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
• Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
• Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or
other countries.
• Mac, Mac OS, AirPort, Safari, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store, AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of
Apple Inc.
• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under
license.
• Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome, Chrome OS, Chromebook, Android, Google Play, Google Drive,
Google Apps and Google Analytics are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
• Adobe, Flash, Photoshop, Photoshop Elements, Lightroom, Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB (1998) are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
• Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to Canon Inc.
• Autodesk and AutoCAD are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its
subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and/or other countries.
Note
• The formal name of Windows Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista operating system.
Copyright (c) 2003-2004, Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Computer, Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
11
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting
the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled
by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means
(i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by
contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii)
beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this
License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to
software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source
form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to
other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under
the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example
is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or
derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other
modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License,
Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name)
to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to
Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity
authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted"
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its
representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code
control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the
purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously
marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution
has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor
hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
12
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform,
sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as
stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise
transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such
Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent
litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the
Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent
infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in
any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the
following conditions:
1. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
2. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files;
and
3. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright,
patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those
notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
4. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that
You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such
NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at
least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative
Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not
modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You
distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such
additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or
different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications,
or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of
the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally
submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein
shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with
Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service
marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in
describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides
the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without
13
limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your
exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence),
contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent
acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this
License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of
goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages
or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof,
You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other
liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations,
You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other
Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any
liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any
such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both
that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of
CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to
distribution of the software without specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
14
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright c 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All
rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
15
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2009, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
16
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of
their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003 oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product names
may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
17
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
LEADTOOLS
Copyright (C) 1991-2009 LEAD Technologies, Inc.
CMap Resources
-----------------------------------------------------------
Copyright 1990-2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All rights reserved.
Copyright 1990-2010 Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of Adobe Systems Incorporated nor the names
of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-----------------------------------------------------------
MIT License
18
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
The following applies only to products supporting Wi-Fi.
(c) 2009-2013 by Jeff Mott. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the
following disclaimer in the documentation or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name CryptoJS nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS,"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
19
Printing Photos from a Computer
This section describes how to print photos with My Image Garden.
1. Open the paper support (A) and paper support extension (B).
2. Pull out the paper output tray (C) and open the output tray extension (D).
3. Load paper vertically WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING UP.
4. Align the paper guides (E) with the paper width.
21
After loading paper on the rear tray, the paper information registration screen for the rear tray is
displayed on the LCD.
5. Press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select the size of the loaded paper on the rear tray, then press the
OK button.
Note
•The asterisk " " will appear with the current page size and media type settings.
7. Use the button to select the type of the loaded paper on the rear tray, then press the
OK button.
8. Click the My Image Garden icon (F) in Quick Menu.
The Guide Menu screen is displayed.
Note
•The number and types of icons displayed vary depending on your region, the registered printer/
scanner and the installed applications.
9. Click the Photo Print icon (G).
22
10. Click the folder (H) with photos you want to print.
11. Click the photos (I) you want to print.
For Windows:
To select two or more photos at a time, click photos while pressing the Ctrl key.
For Mac OS:
To select two or more photos at a time, click photos while pressing the command key.
12. Click Print (J).
13. Specify the number of copies, your printer name, media type, etc. (K).
14. Click Print (L).
23
For Mac OS:
Click OK when the confirmation message appears, then click Print.
Note
• My Image Garden lets you use images on your computer, such as photos taken with a digital camera, in
a number of ways.
• For Windows:
My Image Garden Guide
• For Mac OS:
My Image Garden Guide
24
Copying
This section describes how to load originals and copy them to plain paper.
1. Open the paper support (A) and paper support extension (B).
2. Pull out the paper output tray (C) and open the output tray extension (D).
3. Load paper vertically WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING UP.
4. Align the paper guides (E) with the paper width.
25
After loading paper on the rear tray, the paper information registration screen for the rear tray is
displayed on the LCD.
5. Press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select the size of the loaded paper on the rear tray, then press the
OK button.
Note
•The asterisk " " will appear with the current page size and media type settings.
7. Use the button to select the type of the loaded paper on the rear tray, then press the
OK button.
8. Press the COPY button (F).
9. Open the document cover (G).
10. Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO COPY FACING DOWN and align it with the
alignment mark (H).
26
Important
• Do not open the document cover until copying is complete.
Note
• Your printer is equipped with many other convenient copy features.
Copying
28
Faxing
Fax multiple documents in black and white as follows.
1. Open the document tray (A).
2. Insert the document WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING UP.
3. Adjust the document guide (B).
4. Press the FAX button (C).
29
5. Use the Numeric buttons (D) to enter the fax number.
6. Press the Black button (E).
Note
• Many other convenient faxing features are available.
Faxing
30
Loading Plain Paper / Photo Paper
You can load plain paper or photo paper.
Important
• If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm), 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm), Square 5" x 5"
(13 x 13 cm), or Card 2.17" x 3.58" (55 x 91 mm) to perform trial print, it can cause paper jams.
Note
• We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos.
For details on the Canon genuine paper, see Supported Media Types.
• You can use general copy paper or Canon Red Label Superior WOP111/Canon Océ Office Colour
Paper SAT213.
For the page size and paper weight you can use for this printer, see Supported Media Types.
1. Prepare paper.
Align the edges of paper. If paper is curled, flatten it.
Note
• Align the edges of paper neatly before loading. Loading paper without aligning the edges may
cause paper jams.
• If paper is curled, hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until the
paper becomes completely flat.
For details on how to flatten curled paper, see Is the paper curled?.
2. Loading Paper
1. Open the paper support (A) and paper support extension (B).
2. Pull out the paper output tray (C) and open the output tray extension (D).
33
3. Slide the paper guides (E) to open them, and load the paper in the center of the rear tray
WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING UP.
4. Slide the paper guides (E) to align them with both sides of the paper stack.
Do not slide the paper guides too hard against the paper. The paper may not be fed properly.
Important
•Always load paper in the portrait orientation (F). Loading paper in the landscape orientation (G) can
cause paper jams.
34
Note
•Do not load sheets of paper higher than the load limit mark (H).
After loading paper on the rear tray, the paper information registration screen for the rear tray is displayed
on the LCD.
5. Press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select the size of the loaded paper on the rear tray, then press the
OK button.
Note
•The asterisk " " will appear with the current page size and media type settings.
7. Use the button to select the type of the loaded paper on the rear tray, then press the
OK button.
Note
• When printing, select the size and type of the loaded paper on the print settings screen of the operation
panel or printer driver.
35
Loading Envelopes
You can load Envelope DL and Envelope Com 10.
The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope's direction by specifying with the
printer driver properly.
Important
• Printing of envelopes from the operation panel is not supported.
• Do not use the following envelopes. They could jam in the printer or cause the printer to malfunction.
• Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface
• Envelopes with a double flap
• Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive
1. Prepare envelopes.
•Press down on all four corners and edges of the envelopes to flatten them.
•If the envelopes are curled, hold the opposite corners and gently twist them in the opposite
direction.
• If the corner of the envelope flap is folded, flatten it.
• Use a pen to press the leading edge in the inserting direction flat and sharpen the crease.
The figures above show a side view of the leading edge of the envelope.
Important
•The envelopes may jam in the printer if they are not flat or the edges are not aligned. Make sure
that no curl or puff exceeds 0.1 inch (3 mm).
2. Loading Envelopes
1. Open the paper support (A) and paper support extension (B).
2. Pull out the paper output tray (C) and open the output tray extension (D).
36
3. Slide the paper guides (E) to open them, and load the envelopes in the center of the rear tray
WITH THE ADDRESS SIDE FACING UP.
The folded flap of the envelope will be faced down on the left side.
Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at a time.
4. Slide the paper guides (E) to align them with both sides of envelopes.
Do not slide the paper guides too hard against the envelopes. The envelopes may not be fed properly.
Note
•Do not load envelopes higher than the load limit mark (F).
37
After loading paper on the rear tray, the paper information registration screen for the rear tray is displayed
on the LCD.
5. Press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select the size of the loaded envelopes on the rear tray, then press
the OK button.
Note
•The asterisk " " will appear with the current page size and media type settings.
7. Use the button to select Envelope, then press the OK button.
Note
• When printing, select the size and type of the loaded envelopes on the print settings screen of the
printer driver.
38
Where to Load Originals
The printer has two positions to load originals: platen glass and ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Select the position to load the original according to the size, type, or usage.
Note
• For details on the supported originals, see below.
Supported Originals
Loading Documents, Photos, or Book on the platen glass
Loading Two or More Sheets of Document of the Same Size and Thickness
in the ADF
You can also load a sheet of document in the ADF.
Note
• To scan the original at optimum quality, load it on the platen glass.
40
Loading Originals on the Platen Glass
1. Open the document cover.
2. Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the platen glass.
Important
• Be sure to observe the following when loading the original on the platen glass.
•Do not place any objects weighing 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass.
• Do not put any pressure of 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass, such as pressing down
the original.
Failure to observe the above may cause the scanner to malfunction or the platen glass to break.
3. Close the document cover gently.
Important
• After loading the original on the platen glass, be sure to close the document cover before starting to
copy, fax, or scan.
41
Loading Documents in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
Note
• To scan a document at optimum quality, load it on the platen glass.
1. Make sure that any original has been removed from the platen glass.
2. Open the document tray.
3. Insert the document in the document tray until you hear a beep sound.
Load the document WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING UP in the document tray.
Note
• For details on the supported originals, see below.
Supported Originals
• When you set the alarm to be silent in Sound control of Dev. user settings, the alarm will not
beep even if the document is inserted in the document tray.
Sound control
4. Adjust the document guide (A) at the front of the printer to match the width of the document.
Do not slide the document guide too hard against the document. The document may not be fed properly.
42
Loading Based on Use
Load the original in the correct position on the platen glass according to the function to use. If you do not
load the original correctly, it may not be scanned properly.
Originals Function How to Load
Magazines, Newspapers, and
Documents
Copy or fax
Loading the Original to Be
Aligned with the Alignment Mark
Scanning by detecting the type and
size of the original automatically
If you scan using the operation panel, se-
lect Auto scan for Document type in the
scan mode.
Scanning by specifying a standard
size (A4, Letter, etc.)
If you scan using the operation panel, se-
lect Document or Photo for Document
type in the scan mode and specify a
standard size (A4, Letter, etc.) for Scan
size.
Photos, Postcards, Business
Cards, and Disc (BD/DVD/CD)
Scanning only one original
If you scan using the operation panel, fol-
low the operation below.
• Select Auto scan for Document
type in the scan mode.
• Select Photo for Document type in
the scan mode and specify Auto
scan(A) -Singl for Scan size.
Loading in the Center of the
Platen Glass
Scanning two or more originals
If you scan using the operation panel, fol-
low the operation below.
• Select Auto scan for Document
type in the scan mode.
• Select Photo for Document type in
the scan mode and specify Auto
scan(A) -Multi for Scan size.
Loading Two or More Originals
Note
• For details on how to scan from the computer and how to load originals, see below.
• For Windows:
Scanning from Computer (Windows)
• For Mac OS:
43
Scanning from Computer (Mac OS)
Loading the Original to Be Aligned with the Alignment Mark ( )
Place the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the platen glass and align it with the
alignment mark ( ). Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Important
•The printer cannot scan the striped area (A) (0.04 inch (1 mm) from the edges of the platen glass).
Loading in the Center of the Platen Glass
Place the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN, with 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space
between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen glass. Portions placed on the diagonally striped
area cannot be scanned.
44
Loading Two or More Originals
Place the originals WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN. Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space
between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen glass and the originals, and between the
originals. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
You can place up to 12 items.
A: More than 0.4 inch (1 cm)
Note
• The Skew Correction function automatically compensates for the originals placed at an angle of up to
approximately 10 degrees. Slanted photos with a long edge of 7.1 inches (180 mm) or more cannot
be corrected.
• Non-rectangular or irregular shaped photos (such as cut out photos) may not be scanned properly.
45
Supported Originals
platen glass
Item Details
Types of originals - Text document, magazine, or newspaper
- Printed photo, postcard, business card, or disc (BD/DVD/CD, etc.)
- Documents that are not suitable for the ADF
Size (width x height) Max. 8.5 x 11.7 inches (216 x 297 mm)
Quantity 1 sheet or multiple sheets*
Thickness Max. 0.20 inch (5 mm)
* Two or more originals can be loaded on the platen glass depending on the selected function.
Loading Based on Use
ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
Item Details
Types of originals Multipage plain-paper documents of the same size, thickness, and weight
Size A4/Letter/Legal
Only A4 or Letter-sized documents for 2-on-1 copy and 4-on-1 copy
Quantity - A4 or Letter size: Max. 20 sheets (20 lb (75 g /m2) paper), up to 0.08
inch (2 mm) in height
- Legal size: Max. 5 sheets (20 lb (75 g /m2) paper), up to 0.02 inch (0.5
mm) in height
Thickness 0.003 to 0.005 inch (0.07 to 0.13 mm)
Weight 16.0 to 25.3 lb (60 to 95 g /m2)
Note
•Make sure any glue, ink, correction fluid, or the like on the document is completely dry before loading
it on the platen glass or in the ADF.
However, do not load glued documents in the ADF even if the glue is dry, as this may cause paper
jams.
•Remove all staples, paper clips, and the like before feeding the document.
•Load Legal-sized documents in the ADF.
•Do not load the following types of documents in the ADF. They will jam.
•Wrinkled or creased paper
•Curled paper
•Torn paper
•Paper with holes
•Glued paper
•Paper with sticky notes
46
• Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
• Surface treated paper
• Onion skin or thin paper
• Photo or thick paper
47
Refilling Ink Tanks
Check the remaining ink level with the ink tank indicator on the front of the printer. If the ink level is near the
lower limit line (A), refill the ink tank.
Note
• If the function for notifying the remaining ink level (remaining ink level notification function) is enabled,
resetting the remaining ink level count is required before refilling ink tank.
There are two ways to reset the remaining ink level count.
• Resetting the remaining ink level count when a remaining ink error occurs
• Resetting the remaining ink level count when a remaining ink error has not occurred
The error message appears on the LCD when a remaining ink error occurs.
If remaining ink level notification function is enabled
• If print results become faint or white streaks appear despite sufficient ink levels, see Maintenance
Procedure.
• For precautionary notes on handling ink bottles, see Notes on ink bottles.
Refilling Procedure
When you need to refill an ink tank, follow the steps below.
Important
• Please ensure the printer remains flat after initial setup and is NOT turned upside down or on its side,
as ink in the printer may leak.
• If the remaining ink level notification function is enabled, refill the ink tank until full when refilling. If the
remaining ink level count is reset when the ink tank is not full, the printer cannot detect the ink level
correctly.
If remaining ink level notification function is enabled
1. Make sure the printer is on.
2. Open the scanning unit / cover (B).
49
Important
•Do not touch tubes or other parts inside the printer.
3. Open ink tank cover.
To refill the black ink tank, open the left ink tank cover (C).
To refill color ink tanks, open the right ink tank cover (D).
4. Grab and remove the tank cap (E) of the ink tank to be refilled.
Place the removed tank cap on the upper tank cap holder (F).
50
Important
•Carefully remove the tank cap of the ink tank. Ink on the inside of the tank cap may spatter
when removing it.
5. Take a new ink bottle out of its package.
6. Hold the ink bottle upright and twist the bottle cap (G) to remove.
51
Important
• When removing the bottle cap, avoid squeezing the sides of the ink bottle. Hold the ink bottle as
shown in the figure above. If you push the sides of the ink bottle, ink will spatter.
• Do not shake the ink bottle. Ink may spatter when opening the cap.
• Even if the ink bottle is dented, the ink contained in the bottle can still be used without problem.
7. Refill the ink tank.
Aligning the nozzle of the ink bottle with the bottle guide (H) on the printer, insert the nozzle into the
inlet (I).
Next stand the ink bottle upside down and squeeze the sides of the ink bottle to refill the ink tank.
Important
• Make sure that each color of ink tanks is filled with corresponding color of ink bottles.
• When refilling ink tanks, do not squeeze the bottle sides too hard. Ink may spatter.
• Do not fill the ink tank above the ink tank's upper limit line (J). Ink above this line may spill over,
causing malfunction or damage to the printer, and preventing the printing operation.
•After refilling ink tanks, close the bottle cap of the ink bottle securely.
•Discard empty ink bottles in compliance with local laws and regulations regarding disposal of
consumables.
8. Recap the inlet with the tank cap (E) of the ink tank.
Make sure the tank cap is completely inserted.
52
Note
•When inserting the tank cap, be careful not to twist the tank cap rubber.
9. Close the ink tank cover.
Important
• If you cannot properly close the ink tank cover, check if you forgot to insert any tank caps of the
ink tanks. If the tank cap is left on the tank cap holder, the ink tank cover cannot be closed.
10. Close the scanning unit / cover gently.
Note
•If the error message appears on the LCD, take appropriate action.
An Error Occurs
•The printer may make noise during operation.
53
If remaining ink level notification function is enabled
Resetting the remaining ink level count when a remaining ink error occurs
If the remaining ink level notification function is enabled, Check the ink tanks and the color indicator
(BK/C/M/Y) of ink that runs out appear on the LCD when ink runs out. This setting is enabled by default.
Important
• The color of ink that is seen as fewest remaining amount when you visually inspect the remaining
ink may not match with the color indicator appears on the LCD.
After pressing the OK button, Do you want to refill the ink tanks? appears.
• To continue enabling the remaining ink level notification function
◦ If you refill the ink tanks of all colors:
1. Use the button to select Yes and then press the OK button.
2. Refill the ink tanks of all colors to the upper limit line and then press the OK button.
Are all the ink tanks refilled to the upper limit line? appears.
3. Use the button to select Yes and then press the OK button.
The remaining ink level count of all colors are reset.
◦ If you refill some ink tanks:
Important
• To continue enabling the remaining ink level notification function, refill the ink tank which
ink runs out.
Note
• The ink tank of color other than the color of ink that runs out can be refilled at the same
time.
1. Use the button to select Yes and then press the OK button.
2. Refill the ink tank that you want to refill to the upper limit line and then press the OK button.
Are all the ink tanks refilled to the upper limit line? appears.
3. Use the button to select No and then press the OK button.
Is the BK ink refilled to the upper limit line? appears.
54
4. Use the button to select Yes or No and then press the OK button.
5. For C ink, M ink, and Y ink, perform the same operation as BK ink.
The remaining ink level count of color that you selected Yes is reset.
If you selected No for any colors, If you continue, the remaining ink level notification
function will be disabled appears. Go to step 2 in To disable the remaining ink level
notification function.
• To disable the remaining ink level notification function
1. Use the button to select No and then press the OK button.
If you continue, the remaining ink level notification function will be disabled appears.
This message appears if you select No when Are all the ink tanks refilled to the upper limit
line? appears.
2. Press the OK button.
To check the remaining ink level, visually inspect the remaining ink in the ink tank
appears.
3. Press the OK button.
Do you want to disable the remaining ink level notification function? appears.
4. Use the button to select Yes and then press the OK button.
The remaining ink level notification function is disabled.
If you select No and press the OK button, For correct operation of the function, you must
refill all ink tanks to the upper limit line appears. After pressing the OK button once more,
Do you want to refill the ink tanks? appears again.
Important
• If the remaining ink level notification function is disabled, visually inspect the remaining ink and
refill the ink tanks as necessary. Continuing printing with ink below the lower limit line of an ink
tank may prevent satisfactory print quality or may cause malfunction or damage to the printer.
Resetting the remaining ink level count when a remaining ink error has not
occurred
If you refill the ink tank when remaining ink level notification function is enabled and when the remaining
ink error has not occurred, resets the remaining ink level count after refilling the ink tank to the upper
limit line.
55
• If you reset the remaining ink level count for all colors:
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button.
3. Select Ink notification set. and then press the OK button.
4. Select Reset ink lev. count and then press the OK button.
The remaining ink level count will be reset for all colors; OK? appears.
5. Use the button to select Yes and then press the OK button.
Are all the ink tanks refilled to the upper limit line? appears.
6. Refill the ink tanks of all colors to the upper limit line, use the button to select Yes, and
press the OK button.
The remaining ink level count of all colors are reset.
• If you reset the remaining ink level count for some colors:
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button.
3. Select Ink notification set. and then press the OK button.
4. Select Reset ink lev. count and then press the OK button.
The remaining ink level count will be reset for all colors; OK? appears.
5. Use the button to select No and then press the OK button.
Do you want to reset the BK ink's remaining ink level count? appears.
6. If you reset the remaining ink level count of BK ink, refill the BK ink tank to the upper limit line,
use the button to select Yes, and press the OK button.
If you do not reset the remaining ink level count of BK ink, select No, and press the OK button.
7. For C ink, M ink, and Y ink, perform the same operation as BK ink.
The remaining ink level count of color that you selected Yes is reset.
Important
• If you reset the remaining ink level count without refilling the ink tanks to the upper limit line, the
remaining ink level cannot be detected correctly.
Note
• You can also set the remaining ink level notification function or reset the remaining ink level count
from your computer.
56
• For Windows:
Changing the remaining ink level notification setting
• For Mac OS:
Changing the remaining ink level notification setting
Notes on ink bottles
Important
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Do not drink ink.
• Be careful not to get any ink in your eyes or in your mouth. (In case of eye contact or swallowing,
rinse with water and contact a doctor immediately).
• When you store ink bottles, close bottle caps completely and place bottles in standing position. If the
ink bottles are laid down, ink may leak.
• When refilling ink tanks, take sufficient care to prevent ink from spattering onto surroundings.
• Ink may stain clothes or other belongings permanently. Washing may not remove ink stains.
• Do not use ink bottles and ink contained therein except to refill tanks of printers specified by Canon.
• Do not leave ink bottles in areas exposed to high temperature, such as near fire or a heater or in a
car. Bottles may warp and cause ink leakage or ink may become poor quality.
• Do not subject ink bottles to impacts. Ink bottles may be damaged or bottle caps may come off by
such impact, and ink may leak.
• Do not transfer ink to other containers. This may result in accidental ingestion, inappropriate use, or
poor ink quality.
• Do not mix ink with water or other ink. This may damage the printer.
• Refill ink tanks quickly. Do not leave ink tanks with cap off.
• Once an ink bottle has been opened, do not leave it with bottle cap off. Ink will dry out, possibly
preventing proper operation of the machine when an ink tank is refilled using this bottle.
Note
• Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black-and-white document or when black-and-
white printing is specified. Every ink is also consumed in the standard cleaning and deep cleaning of
the print head, which may be necessary to maintain the performance of the printer.
When an ink tank is out of ink, promptly refill it.
Ink Tips
57
Checking Ink Status
Check ink status with the ink tank indicator on the front of the printer.
When ink reaches the upper limit line (A), ink is full.
When ink is near the lower limit line (B), ink is running low. Refill the ink tank.
Note
• To check the remaining ink level, visually inspect the remaining ink in the ink tank.
Important
• If printing is continued when the remaining ink level is below the lower limit line, the printer may
consume a certain amount of ink to return to printable status and may also become damaged.
Note
• This printer has a function for notifying the remaining ink level, called the remaining ink level notification
function. If you refill the ink tank when the remaining ink level notification function is enabled or when a
remaining ink error occurs, refill the ink tank until ink reaches the upper limit line (A). If ink does not
reach the upper limit line, the remaining ink level is not detected correctly.
For details on the remaining ink level notification function, see below.
Ink notification set.
• If a remaining ink error occurs, the error message appears on the LCD.
An Error Occurs
• The remaining ink level notification function works from initial printing to the time when one of the inks
reaches the lower limit line shown on the ink tank. For the remaining ink level notification function to
work appropriately, each ink tank must be filled with entire contents of the corresponding color ink bottle
bundled with the printer before printing. After the initial filling, if either of the ink tanks is refilled before
the remaining ink level reaches the lower limit line, a significant error may occur in the accuracy of the
remaining ink level notification function. If you want to refill an ink tank before the remaining ink level
reaches the lower limit line, be sure to follow the procedure in the manual.
• To ensure you receive premium print quality and to help protect your print head, a certain amount of ink
remains in the ink tank when the printer indicates to refill the ink tank. The estimated page yields of the
ink bottle do not include this amount.
• Ink flows from the ink tanks to the inside of the printer. Ink may seem to run out fast due to this
procedure when you start using the printer or after transporting it.
58
Maintenance Procedure
If print results are blurred, colors are not printed correctly, or print results are unsatisfactory (e.g. misaligned
printed ruled lines), perform the maintenance procedure below.
Important
• Do not rinse or wipe the print head. This can cause cartridge problems.
Note
• Check the remaining ink level.
If the ink level is low, take appropriate action.
Checking Ink Status
• If an error message is displayed on the LCD, see An Error Occurs.
• Increasing the print quality setting in the printer driver may improve the print result.
• For Windows:
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
• For Mac OS:
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
When the Print Results Are Blurred or Uneven:
Step1 Print the nozzle check pattern.
From the printer
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
From the computer
•For Windows:
Printing a Nozzle Check Pattern
•For Mac OS:
Printing a Nozzle Check Pattern
Step2 Examine the nozzle check pattern.
If there are missing lines or horizontal white streaks in the pattern:
Step3 Clean the print head.
From the printer
Cleaning the Print Head
From the computer
• For Windows:
61
Cleaning the Print Heads
• For Mac OS:
Cleaning the Print Heads
After cleaning the print head, print and examine the nozzle check pattern: Step1
If the problem is not resolved after performing from step 1 to step 3 twice:
Step4 Clean the print head deeply.
From the printer
Deep Print Head Cleaning
From the computer
•For Windows:
Cleaning the Print Heads
•For Mac OS:
Cleaning the Print Heads
Note
• If problem is not resolved after performing print head deep cleaning, perform system cleaning.
From the printer
Performing System Cleaning
From computer
• For Windows:
Cleaning the Print Heads
• For Mac OS:
Cleaning the Print Heads
If the problem is still not resolved, the print head may be damaged. Contact the service center.
When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are
Misaligned:
Step Align the print head.
From the printer
Aligning the Print Head
From the computer
• For Windows:
Adjusting Print Head Position
•For Mac OS:
62
Adjusting Print Head Position
63
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzle.
Note
• If the remaining ink level is low, the nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly. Refill any ink tanks
that are low.
You need to prepare: a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1. Make sure that the power is turned on.
2. Load a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the rear tray.
After loading paper on the rear tray, the paper information registration screen appears on the LCD.
Select A4 or Letter for Size: and Plain paper for Type: and then press the OK button.
3. Pull out the paper output tray, then open the output tray extension.
4. Press the Setup button, use the button to select Maintenance, and press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
5. Use the button to select Nozzle check and then press the OK button.
The nozzle check pattern will be printed.
6. Examine the nozzle check pattern.
64
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern
Examine the nozzle check pattern, and clean the print head if necessary.
1. Check if there are missing lines in pattern A or horizontal white streaks in pattern B.
If there are missing lines in pattern A:
Cleaning the print head is required.
C: Good
D: Bad (lines are missing)
If there are horizontal white streaks in pattern B:
Cleaning the print head is required.
E: Good
F: Bad (horizontal white streaks are present)
If any color in the pattern A or the pattern B is not printed:
Cleaning the print head is required.
(Example: Magenta pattern is not printed)
65
Cleaning the Print Head
Clean the print head if lines are missing or if horizontal white streaks are present in the printed nozzle check
pattern. Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition. Cleaning the print head
consumes ink, so clean the print head only when necessary.
1. Make sure that the power is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button, use the button to select Maintenance, and press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
3. Use the button to select Cleaning and then press the OK button.
The printer starts cleaning the print head.
Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the print head. This takes
about 1 minute.
4. Check the print head condition.
To check the print head condition, print the nozzle check pattern.
Note
• If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the print head twice, clean the print head deeply.
66
Deep Print Head Cleaning
If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the print head, clean the print head deeply.
Cleaning the print head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the print head, so clean
the print head deeply only when necessary.
1. Make sure that the power is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button, use the button to select Maintenance, and press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
3. Use the button to select Deep cleaning and then press the OK button.
The printer starts cleaning the print head deeply.
Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the deep cleaning of the print head. This
takes about 3 minutes.
4. Check the print head condition.
To check the print head condition, print the nozzle check pattern.
67
Aligning the Print Head
If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head
position.
Note
• If the remaining ink level is low, the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly.
Refill any ink tanks that are low.
You need to prepare: a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper (including recycled paper)*
* Be sure to use paper that is white and clean on both sides.
1. Make sure that the power is turned on.
2. Load a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the rear tray.
After loading paper on the rear tray, the paper information registration screen appears on the LCD.
Select A4 or Letter for Size: and Plain paper for Type: and then press the OK button.
3. Pull out the paper output tray, then open the output tray extension.
4. Press the Setup button, use the button to select Maintenance, and press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
5. Use the button to select Head alignment and then press the OK button.
The print head alignment sheet will be printed.
68
Important
• Do not touch any printed part on the print head alignment sheet. If the sheet is stained or wrinkled,
it may not be scanned properly.
•If the print head alignment sheet was not printed correctly, press the Stop button, then redo this
procedure from the beginning.
6. Confirm the message, then load the print head alignment sheet on the platen glass.
Load the print head alignment sheet WITH THE PRINTED SIDE FACING DOWN and align the mark
on the bottom right corner of the sheet with the alignment mark .
69
7. Close the document cover gently, then press the Black or Color button.
The printer starts scanning the print head alignment sheet, and the print head position will be adjusted
automatically.
When adjusting the print head position is complete, remove the print head alignment sheet on the platen
glass.
Important
•Do not open the document cover or move the print head alignment sheet on the platen glass until
adjusting the print head position is complete.
•If the error message appears on the LCD, press the OK button to release the error, then take
appropriate action.
An Error Occurs
Note
• If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above,
adjust the print head position manually from the computer.
• For Windows:
Adjusting Print Head Position
• For Mac OS:
Adjusting Print Head Position
• To print and check the current head position adjustment values, select Print align value from the
Maintenance menu.
70
Cleaning Paper Feed Rollers
If the paper feed roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it, paper may not be fed properly.
In this case, clean the paper feed roller. Cleaning will wear out the paper feed roller, so perform this only
when necessary.
You need to prepare: three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1. Make sure that the power is turned on.
2. Remove any paper from the rear tray.
3. Press the Setup button, use the button to select Maintenance, and press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
4. Use the button to select Roller cleaning and then press the OK button.
The paper feed roller will rotate as it is cleaned.
5. Make sure that the paper feed roller has stopped rotating, then load three sheets of A4 or
Letter-sized plain paper in the rear tray.
After loading paper on the rear tray, the paper information registration screen appears on the LCD.
Select A4 or Letter for Size: and Plain paper for Type: and then press the OK button.
6. Pull out the paper output tray, then open the output tray extension.
7. Make sure that Roller cleaning is selected and press the OK button.
The printer starts cleaning. The cleaning will be complete when the paper is ejected.
If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the paper feed roller, contact the service center.
72
Cleaning Inside the Printer (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Remove stains from the inside of the printer. If the inside of the printer becomes dirty, printed paper may get
dirty, so we recommend performing cleaning regularly.
You need to prepare: a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper*
* Be sure to use a new piece of paper.
1. Make sure that the power is turned on.
2. Remove any paper from the rear tray.
3. Fold a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in half widthwise, then unfold the
paper.
4. Load only this sheet of paper in the rear tray with the open side facing you.
After loading paper on the rear tray, the paper information registration screen appears on the LCD.
Select A4 or Letter for Size: and Plain paper for Type: and then press the OK button.
5. Pull out the paper output tray, then open the output tray extension.
6. Press the Setup button, use the button to select Maintenance, and press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
7. Use the button to select Bottom cleaning and then press the OK button.
73
The paper cleans the inside of the printer as it feeds through the printer.
Check the folded parts of the ejected paper. If they are smudged with ink, perform Bottom Plate Cleaning
again.
Note
•When performing Bottom Plate Cleaning again, be sure to use a new piece of paper.
If the problem is not resolved after performing cleaning again, the protrusions inside the printer may be
stained. Wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like.
Important
• Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord before cleaning the printer.
74
Overview
Safety
Safety Precautions
Regulatory Information
WEEE (EU & EEA)
Main Components and Their Use
Main Components
Power Supply
LCD and Operation Panel
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
Changing Settings
Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer (Windows)
Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer (Mac OS)
Changing Settings from Operation Panel
Changing Printer's Setting Using Web Browser
Network Connection
Network Connection Tips
Network Settings (IJ Network Device Setup Utility) (Windows)
IJ Network Device Setup Utility
Starting Up IJ Network Device Setup Utility
Ensuring Optimal Printing Results
Ink Tips
Printing Tips
Check Paper Settings Before Printing
Set Rear Tray Paper Information After Loading Paper
Canceling Print Jobs
Keeping Print Quality High
75
Safety Precautions
Choosing a location
• Do not install the printer in a location that is unstable or subject to excessive vibration.
• Do not install the printer in locations that are very humid or dusty, in direct sunlight, outdoors, or close
to a heating source.
To avoid the risk of fire or electric shocks, use the printer under the operating environment specified in
the Specifications.
• Do not place the printer on a thick rug or carpet.
• Do not place the printer with its back attached to the wall.
Power Supply
• Ensure that the area around the power outlet is kept clear at all times so you can easily unplug the
power cord if necessary.
• Never remove the plug by pulling on the cord.
Pulling the cord may damage the power cord, leading to possible fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use an extension lead/cord.
Working Around the Printer
• Never put your hands or fingers in the printer while it is printing.
• When moving the printer, carry the printer at both ends. In case the printer weighs more than 14 kg, it
is recommended to have two people lifting the printer. Accidental dropping of the printer causes injury.
For the printer's weight, refer to the Specifications.
• Do not place any object on the printer. Especially do not place metal objects (paper clips, staples,
etc.) or containers of flammable solvents (alcohol, thinners, etc.) on top of the printer.
• Do not transport or use the printer on a slant, vertically or upside-down, as the ink may leak and
damage the printer.
• When loading a thick book on the platen glass, do not press hard on the Document Cover. The platen
glass may break and cause injury.
Print Heads/Ink Tanks/FINE Cartridges
• Keep ink tanks out of the reach of children. In case ink is accidentally licked or swallowed, rinse out
mouth or give one or two glasses of water to drink. If irritation or discomfort occurs, obtain medical
advice immediately.
• In case ink gets in contact with eyes, rinse with water immediately. In case ink gets in contact with
skin, wash with soap and water immediately. If irritation to eyes or skin persists, obtain medical advice
immediately.
• Never touch the electrical contacts on a print head or FINE cartridges after printing.
The metal parts may be very hot and could cause burns.
• Do not throw ink tanks and FINE cartridges into fire.
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the print head, ink tanks, and FINE cartridges.
78
Regulatory Information
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the
risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry
tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
2. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
3. Do not use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
"CAUTION - To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord."
IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ
CONSERVER CES INSTRUCTIONS
Certaines mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l'utilisation de matérial téléphonique afin de
réduire les risques d'incendie, de choc électrique et de blessures.
En voice quelquesunes :
1. Ne pas utiliser l'appareil près de l'eau, p.ex., près d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier de cuisine,
d'un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d'une piscine.
2. Éviter d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage électrique. Ceci peut présenter un risque de choc
électrique causé par la foudre.
3. Ne pas utiliser l'appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de la fuite.
"ATTENTION - Pour réduire les risques d'incendie, utiliser uniquement des conducteurs de
télécommunications 26 AWG au de section supérleure."
Users in the U.S.A.
FCC Notice (U.S.A. Only)
For 120V, 60Hz model
Model Number: K10454 (Contains FCC Approved WLAN Module K30365)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
79
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of a shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If
such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
FCC ID:AZDK30365
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
The equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits for at uncontrolled equipment. This
equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance at least 20cm between the radiator
and persons body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles) and must not be colocated or
operated with any other antenna or transmitter.
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Park
Melville, New York 11747
1-800-652-2666
Pre-Installation Requirements
Order Information
When ordering service from the telephone company for this equipment, the following may be required.
Universal Service Order Code (USOC): RJ11C
The Facility Interface Code (FIC): 02LS2
Service Order Code (SOC): 9.0F
Connection of the Equipment
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA.
A label on this equipment contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call.
In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of
devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone
company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a
REN of 0.3).
80
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must
comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant
telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a
compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.
Connection to party lines is subjected to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public
service commission or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation
of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable
alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
In Case of Equipment Malfunction
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described in the Online
Manual, disconnect the equipment from the telephone line cable, turn off the power and disconnect the
power cord. The telephone line cable should not be reconnected or the main power switch turned ON until
the problem is completely resolved. Users should contact their local authorized Canon Facsimile Service
Dealer for the servicing of equipment.
Information regarding Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling the Canon
Customer Center.
Rights of the Telephone Company
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may temporarily
disconnect service. The telephone company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and
services that may affect the operation of this equipment. When such changes are necessary, the
telephone company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user. However, if advance notice is not
possible, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, the customer will be
advised of his/her right to file a compliant with the FCC if he/she believes it is necessary.
Warning
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or
other electronic device to send any message via a telephone FAX machine unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other
individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,
other entity, or individual.
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the procedure to register
your name, unit's telephone number, time, and date. Refer to the Online Manual.
Users in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
81
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and
meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Pre-Installation Requirements
Notice
This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical
specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
Pour les usagers résidant au Canada
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un
environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus
entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
Conditions de pré-installation
Avis
Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent
être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d'indices d'équivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5.
Users in New Zealand
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Spark has accepted that
the item complies with the minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement
of the product by Spark, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that
any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different
make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Spark's network services.
This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for
which it is designed. Spark will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances.
This condition typically applies to 56 kbit/s modems and V34 facsimile machines.
82
Please note when you connect an extension phone to this device, if you use an extension phone which
has features such as "last number redial", redial memory numbers may be lost.
Telepermitted equipment only may be connected to the telephone port. The telephone port is not
specifically designed for 3-wire-connected equipment. 3-wire-connected equipment might not respond to
incoming ringing when attached to this port.
The automatic calling functions of this equipment must not be used to cause a nuisance to other Spark
customers.
Environmental Information
Reducing your environmental impact
Power Consumption and Operational Modes
The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is
designed and set in a way to allow you to reduce the power consumption. After the last print it switches
to Ready Mode. In this mode it can print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a
time, the device switches to its Sleep Mode. The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.
Energy Star®
The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of
energy efficient models, which help to minimise environmental impact.
Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental
benefits and the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.
Paper types
This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certified to an environmental
stewardship scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can
support printing on media down to a weight of 64g/m2, lighter paper means less resources used and a
lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.
83
WEEE (EU&EEA)
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU) and national legislation. This product should be handed over to a
designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product
or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper
handling of this type of waste could have a possible negative impact on the environment and human
health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. At the same time,
your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural
resources. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please
contact your local city office, waste authority, approved WEEE scheme or your household waste disposal
service. For more information regarding return and recycling of WEEE products, please visit www.canon-
europe.com/weee.
Nur für Europäische Union und EWR (Norwegen, Island und Liechtenstein)
Dieses Symbol weist darauf hin, dass dieses Produkt gemäß der EU-Richtlinie über Elektro- und
Elektronik-Altgeräte (2012/19/EU) und nationalen Gesetzen nicht über den Hausmüll entsorgt werden
darf. Dieses Produkt muss bei einer dafür vorgesehenen Sammelstelle abgegeben werden. Dies kann z.
B. durch Rückgabe beim Kauf eines ähnlichen Produkts oder durch Abgabe bei einer autorisierten
Sammelstelle für die Wiederaufbereitung von Elektro- und Elektronik-Altgeräten geschehen. Der
unsachgemäße Umgang mit Altgeräten kann aufgrund potentiell gefährlicher Stoffe, die generell mit
Elektro- und Elektronik-Altgeräten in Verbindung stehen, negative Auswirkungen auf die Umwelt und die
menschliche Gesundheit haben. Durch die umweltgerechte Entsorgung dieses Produkts tragen Sie
außerdem zu einer effektiven Nutzung natürlicher Ressourcen bei. Informationen zu Sammelstellen für
Altgeräte erhalten Sie bei Ihrer Stadtverwaltung, dem öffentlich-rechtlichen Entsorgungsträger, einer
autorisierten Stelle für die Entsorgung von Elektro- und Elektronik-Altgeräten oder Ihrem örtlichen
Entsorgungsunternehmen. Weitere Informationen zur Rückgabe und Entsorgung von Elektro- und
Elektronik-Altgeräten finden Sie unter www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Union Européenne, Norvège, Islande et Liechtenstein uniquement.
Ce symbole indique que ce produit ne doit pas être jeté avec les ordures ménagères, conformément à la
directive DEEE (2012/19/UE) et à la réglementation de votre pays. Ce produit doit être confié au
distributeur à chaque fois que vous achetez un produit neuf similaire, ou à un point de collecte mis en
84
place par les collectivités locales pour le recyclage des Déchets des Équipements Électriques et
Électroniques (DEEE). Le traitement inapproprié de ce type de déchet risque d'avoir des répercussions
sur l'environnement et la santé humaine, du fait de la présence de substances potentiellement
dangereuses généralement associées aux équipements électriques et électroniques. Parallèlement, votre
entière coopération dans le cadre de la mise au rebut correcte de ce produit favorisera une meilleure
utilisation des ressources naturelles. Pour plus d'informations sur les points de collecte des équipements
à recycler, contactez vos services municipaux, les autorités locales compétentes, le plan DEEE approuvé
ou le service d'enlèvement des ordures ménagères. Pour plus d'informations sur le retour et le recyclage
des produits DEEE, consultez le site: www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Uitsluitend bestemd voor de Europese Unie en EER (Noorwegen, IJsland en
Liechtenstein)
Dit symbool geeft aan dat dit product in overeenstemming met de AEEA-richtlijn (2012/19/EU) en de
nationale wetgeving niet mag worden afgevoerd met het huishoudelijk afval. Dit product moet worden
ingeleverd bij een aangewezen, geautoriseerd inzamelpunt, bijvoorbeeld wanneer u een nieuw
gelijksoortig product aanschaft, of bij een geautoriseerd inzamelpunt voor hergebruik van elektrische en
elektronische apparatuur (EEA). Een onjuiste afvoer van dit type afval kan leiden tot negatieve effecten op
het milieu en de volksgezondheid als gevolg van potentieel gevaarlijke stoffen die veel voorkomen in
elektrische en elektronische apparatuur (EEA). Bovendien werkt u door een juiste afvoer van dit product
mee aan het effectieve gebruik van natuurlijke hulpbronnen. Voor meer informatie over waar u uw
afgedankte apparatuur kunt inleveren voor recycling kunt u contact opnemen met het gemeentehuis in uw
woonplaats, de reinigingsdienst, of het afvalverwerkingsbedrijf. U kunt ook het schema voor de afvoer van
afgedankte elektrische en elektronische apparatuur (AEEA) raadplegen. Ga voor meer informatie over het
inzamelen en recyclen van afgedankte elektrische en elektronische apparatuur naar www.canon-
europe.com/weee.
Sólo para la Unión Europea y el Área Económica Europea (Noruega,
Islandia y Liechtenstein)
Este símbolo indica que este producto no debe desecharse con los desperdicios domésticos, de acuerdo
con la directiva RAEE (2012/19/UE) y con la legislación nacional. Este producto debe entregarse en uno
de los puntos de recogida designados, como por ejemplo, entregándolo en el lugar de venta al comprar
un producto similar o depositándolo en un lugar de recogida autorizado para el reciclado de residuos de
aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos (RAEE). La manipulación inapropiada de este tipo de desechos podría
tener un impacto negativo en el entorno y la salud humana, debido a las sustancias potencialmente
peligrosas que normalmente están asociadas con los RAEE. Al mismo tiempo, su cooperación a la hora
de desechar correctamente este producto contribuirá a la utilización eficazde los recursos naturales. Para
más información sobre cómo puede eliminar el equipo para su reciclado, póngase en contacto con las
autoridades locales, con las autoridades encargadas de los desechos, con un sistema de gestión RAEE
85
autorizado o con el servicio de recogida de basuras doméstico. Si desea más información acerca de la
devolución y reciclado de RAEE, visite la web www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Només per a la Unió Europea i a l’Espai Econòmic Europeu (Noruega,
Islàndia i Liechtenstein)
Aquest símbol indica que aquest producte no s’ha de llençar a les escombraries de la llar, d’acord amb la
Directiva RAEE (2012/19/UE) i la legislació nacional. Aquest producte s’hauria de lliurar en un dels punts
de recollida designats, com per exemple, intercanviant-lo un per un en comprar un producte similar o
lliurant-lo en un lloc de recollida autoritzat per al reciclatge de residus d’aparells elèctrics i electrònics
(AEE). La manipulació inadequada d’aquest tipus de residus podria tenir un impacte negatiu en l’entorn i
en la salut humana, a causa de les substàncies potencialment perilloses que normalment estan
associades als AEE. Així mateix, la vostra cooperació a l’hora de llençar correctament aquest producte
contribuirà a la utilització efectiva dels recursos naturals. Per a més informació sobre els punts on podeu
lliurar aquest producte per procedir al seu reciclatge, adreceu-vos a la vostra oficina municipal, a les
autoritats encarregades dels residus, al pla de residus homologat per la RAEE o al servei de recollida de
deixalles domèstiques de la vostra localitat. Per a més informació sobre la devolució i el reciclatge de
productes RAEE, visiteu www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Solo per Unione Europea e SEE (Norvegia, Islanda e Liechtenstein)
Questo simbolo indica che il prodotto deve essere oggetto di raccolta separata in conformità alla Direttiva
RAEE (2012/19/UE) e alla normativa locale vigente. Il prodotto deve essere smaltito presso un centro di
raccolta differenziata, un distributore autorizzato che applichi il principio dell'"uno contro uno", ovvero del
ritiro della vecchia apparecchiatura elettrica al momento dell'acquisto di una nuova, o un impianto
autorizzato al riciclaggio dei rifiuti di apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche. La gestione impropria di
questo tipo di rifiuti può avere un impatto negativo sull'ambiente e sulla salute umana causato dalle
sostanze potenzialmente pericolose che potrebbero essere contenute nelle apparecchiature elettriche ed
elettroniche. Un corretto smaltimento di tali prodotti contribuirà inoltre a un uso efficace delle risorse
naturali ed eviterà di incorrere nelle sanzioni amministrative di cui all'art. 255 e successivi del Decreto
Legislativo n. 152/06. Per ulteriori informazioni sullo smaltimento e il recupero dei Rifiuti di
Apparecchiature Elettriche ed Elettroniche, consultare la Direttiva RAEE, rivolgersi alle autorità
competenti, oppure visitare il sito www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Apenas para a União Europeia e AEE (Noruega, Islândia e Liechtenstein)
86
Este símbolo indica que o produto não deve ser colocado no lixo doméstico, de acordo com a Directiva
REEE (2012/19/UE) e a legislação nacional. Este produto deverá ser colocado num ponto de recolha
designado, por exemplo, num local próprio autorizado quando adquirir um produto semelhante novo ou
num local de recolha autorizado para reciclar resíduos de equipamentos eléctricos e electrónicos (EEE).
O tratamento inadequado deste tipo de resíduo poderá causar um impacto negativo no ambiente e na
saúde humana devido às substâncias potencialmente perigosas normalmente associadas aos
equipamentos eléctricos e electrónicos. Simultaneamente, a sua cooperação no tratamento correcto
deste produto contribuirá para a utilização eficaz dos recursos naturais. Para mais informações sobre os
locais onde o equipamento poderá ser reciclado, contacte os serviços locais, a autoridade responsável
pelos resíduos, o esquema REEE aprovado ou o serviço de tratamento de lixo doméstico. Para mais
informações sobre a devolução e reciclagem de produtos REEE, vá a www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Gælder kun i Europæiske Union og EØS (Norge, Island og Liechtenstein)
Dette symbol angiver, at det pågældende produkt ikke må bortskaffes sammen med dagrenovation jf.
direktivet om affald af elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr (WEEE) (2012/19/EU) og gældende national
lovgivning. Det pågældende produkt skal afleveres på et nærmere specificeret indsamlingssted, f.eks. i
overensstemmelse med en godkendt én-til-én-procedure, når du indkøber et nyt tilsvarende produkt, eller
produktet skal afleveres på et godkendt indsamlingssted for elektronikaffald. Forkert håndtering af denne
type affald kan medføre negative konsekvenser for miljøet og menneskers helbred på grund af de
potentielt sundhedsskadelige stoffer, der generelt kan forefindes i elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr. Når du
foretager korrekt bortskaffelse af det pågældende produkt, bidrager du til effektiv brug af
naturressourcerne. Yderligere oplysninger om, hvor du kan bortskaffe dit elektronikaffald med henblik på
genanvendelse, får du hos de kommunale renovationsmyndigheder. Yderligere oplysninger om
returnering og genanvendelse af affald af elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr får du ved at besøge www.canon-
europe.com/weee.
Μόνο για την Ευρωπαϊκή Ένωση και τον ΕΟΧ (Νορβηγία, Ισλανδία και
Λιχτενστάιν)
Αυτό το σύμβολο υποδηλώνει ότι αυτό το προϊόν δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται μαζί με τα οικιακά
απορρίμματα, σύμφωνα με την Οδηγία σχετικά με τα Απόβλητα Ηλεκτρικού και Ηλεκτρονικού Εξοπλισμού
(ΑΗΗΕ) (2012/19/ΕΕ) και την εθνική σας νομοθεσία. Αυτό το προϊόν πρέπει να παραδίδεται σε
καθορισμένο σημείο συλλογής, π.χ. σε μια εξουσιοδοτημένη βάση ανταλλαγής όταν αγοράζετε ένα νέο
παρόμοιο προϊόν ή σε μια εξουσιοδοτημένη θέση συλλογής για την ανακύκλωση των αποβλήτων
Ηλεκτρικού και Ηλεκτρονικού Εξοπλισμού (ΗΗΕ). Ο ακατάλληλος χειρισμός αυτού του τύπου αποβλήτων
μπορεί να έχει αρνητικό αντίκτυπο στο περιβάλλον και την υγεία του ανθρώπου, λόγω δυνητικώς
επικίνδυνων ουσιών που γενικά συνδέονται με τον ΗΗΕ. Ταυτόχρονα, η συνεργασία σας όσον αφορά τη
σωστή απόρριψη αυτού του προϊόντος θα συμβάλει στην αποτελεσματική χρήση των φυσικών πόρων. Για
περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά με τα σημεία όπου μπορείτε να απορρίψετε τον εξοπλισμό σας για
87
ανακύκλωση, επικοινωνήστε με το τοπικό γραφείο της πόλης σας, την υπηρεσία απορριμμάτων, το
εγκεκριμένο σχήμα ΑΗΗΕ ή την υπηρεσία απόρριψης οικιακών αποβλήτων. Για περισσότερες
πληροφορίες σχετικά με την επιστροφή και την ανακύκλωση των προϊόντων ΑΗΗΕ, επισκεφθείτε την
τοποθεσία www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Gjelder kun den europeiske union og EØS (Norge, Island og Liechtenstein)
Dette symbolet indikerer at dette produktet ikke skal kastes sammen med husholdningsavfall, i henhold til
WEEE-direktiv (2012/19/EU) og nasjonal lov. Produktet må leveres til et dertil egnet innsamlingspunkt, det
vil si på en autorisert en-til-en-basis når du kjøper et nytt lignende produkt, eller til et autorisert
innsamlingssted for resirkulering av avfall fra elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr (EE-utstyr). Feil håndtering av
denne typen avfall kan være miljø- og helseskadelig på grunn av potensielt skadelige stoffer som ofte
brukes i EE-utstyr. Samtidig bidrar din innsats for korrekt avhending av produktet til effektiv bruk av
naturressurser. Du kan få mer informasjon om hvor du kan avhende utrangert utstyr til resirkulering ved å
kontakte lokale myndigheter, et godkjent WEEE-program eller husholdningens renovasjonsselskap. Du
finner mer informasjon om retur og resirkulering av WEEE-produkter på www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Vain Euroopan unionin sekä ETA:n (Norja, Islanti ja Liechtenstein) alueelle.
Tämä tunnus osoittaa, että sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromua koskeva direktiivi (SER-direktiivi,
2012/19/EU) sekä kansallinen lainsäädäntö kieltävät tuotteen hävittämisen talousjätteen mukana. Tuote
on vietävä asianmukaiseen keräyspisteeseen, esimerkiksi kodinkoneliikkeeseen uutta vastaavaa tuotetta
ostettaessa tai viralliseen sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun keräyspisteeseen. Sähkö- ja
elektroniikkalaiteromun virheellinen käsittely voi vahingoittaa ympäristöä ja ihmisten terveyttä, koska
laitteet saattavat sisältää ympäristölle ja terveydelle haitallisia aineita. Lisäksi tuotteen asianmukainen
hävittäminen säästää luonnonvaroja. Lisätietoja sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun keräyspisteistä saat
kaupunkien ja kuntien tiedotuksesta, jätehuoltoviranomaisilta, sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun
kierrätysjärjestelmän ylläpitäjältä ja jätehuoltoyhtiöltä. Lisätietoja sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun
keräyksestä ja kierrätyksestä on osoitteessa www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Endast för Europeiska unionen och EES (Norge, Island och Liechtenstein)
Den här symbolen visar att produkten enligt WEEE-direktivet (2012/19/EU) och nationell lagstiftning inte
får sorteras och slängas som hushållsavfall. Den här produkten ska lämnas in på en därför avsedd
insamlingsplats, t.ex. på en återvinningsstation auktoriserad att hantera elektrisk och elektronisk
utrustning (EE-utrustning) eller hos handlare som är auktoriserade att byta in varor då nya, motsvarande
88
köps (en mot en). Olämplig hantering av avfall av den här typen kan ha en negativ inverkan på miljön och
människors hälsa på grund av de potentiellt farliga ämnen som kan återfinnas i elektrisk och elektronisk
utrustning. Din medverkan till en korrekt avfallshantering av den här produkten bidrar dessutom till en
effektiv användning av naturresurserna. Kontakta ditt lokala kommunkontor, berörd myndighet, företag för
avfallshantering eller ta del av en godkänd WEEE-organisation om du vill ha mer information om var du
kan lämna den kasserade produkten för återvinning. För mer information om inlämning och återvinning av
WEEE-produkter, se www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Pouze Evropská unie a EHP (Norsko, Island a Lichtenštejnsko)
Tento symbol znamená, že podle směrnice o OEEZ (2012/19/EU) a podle vnitrostátních právních
předpisů nemá být tento výrobek likvidován s odpadem z domácností. Tento výrobek má být vrácen do
sběrného místa, např. v rámci autorizovaného systému odběru jednoho výrobku za jeden nově prodaný
podobný výrobek nebo v autorizovaném sběrném místě pro recyklaci odpadních elektrických a
elektronických zařízení (OEEZ). Nevhodné nakládání s tímto druhem odpadu by mohlo mít negativní
dopad na životní prostředí a lidské zdraví, protože elektrická a elektronická zařízení zpravidla obsahují
potenciálně nebezpečné látky. Vaše spolupráce na správné likvidaci tohoto výrobku současně napomůže
efektivnímu využívání přírodních zdrojů. Další informace o místech sběru vašeho odpadního zařízení
k recyklaci vám sdělí místní úřad vaší obce, správní orgán vykonávající dozor nad likvidací odpadu,
sběrny OEEZ nebo služba pro odvoz komunálního odpadu. Další informace týkající se vracení a
recyklace OEEZ naleznete na adrese www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Csak az Európai Unió és az EGT (Norvégia, Izland és Liechtenstein)
országaiban
Ez a szimbólum azt jelzi, hogy a helyi törvények és a WEEE-irányelv (2012/19/EU) szerint a termék nem
kezelhető háztartási hulladékként. A terméket a kijelölt nyilvános gyűjtőpontokon kell leadni, például
hasonló cserekészülék vásárlásakor, illetve bármelyik, elektromos és elektronikai berendezésekből
származó hulladék (WEEE) átvételére feljogosított gyűjtőponton. Az ilyen jellegű hulladékok a nem
megfelelő kezelés esetén a bennük található veszélyes anyagok révén ártalmasak lehetnek a környezetre
és az emberek egészségére. Továbbá, a termékből származó hulladék megfelelő kezelésével
hozzájárulhat a természetes nyersanyagok hatékonyabb hasznosításához. A berendezésekből származó,
újrahasznosítható hulladékok elhelyezésére vonatkozó további tudnivalókért forduljon a helyi
önkormányzathoz, a közterület-fenntartó vállalathoz, a háztartási hulladék begyűjtését végző vállalathoz,
illetve a hivatalos WEEE-képviselethez. További tudnivalókat a WEEE-termékek visszajuttatásáról és
újrahasznosításáról a www.canon-europe.com/weee.
89
Tylko dla krajów Unii Europejskiej oraz EOG (Norwegia, Islandia i
Liechtenstein)
Ten symbol oznacza, że zgodnie z dyrektywą WEEE dotyczącą zużytego sprzętu elektrycznego i
elektronicznego (2012/19/UE) oraz przepisami lokalnymi nie należy wyrzucać tego produktu razem z
odpadami gospodarstwa domowego. Produkt należy przekazać do wyznaczonego punktu gromadzenia
odpadów, np. firmie, od której kupowany jest nowy, podobny produkt lub do autoryzowanego punktu
gromadzenia zużytego sprzętu elektrycznego i elektronicznego w celu poddania go recyklingowi.
Usuwanie tego typu odpadów w nieodpowiedni sposób może mieć negatywny wpływ na otoczenie i
zdrowie innych osób ze względu na niebezpieczne substancje stosowane w takim sprzęcie. Jednocześnie
pozbycie się zużytego sprzętu w zalecany sposób przyczynia się do właściwego wykorzystania zasobów
naturalnych. Aby uzyskać więcej informacji na temat punktów, do których można dostarczyć sprzęt do
recyklingu, prosimy skontaktować się z lokalnym urzędem miasta, zakładem utylizacji odpadów,
skorzystać z instrukcji zatwierdzonej dyrektywą WEEE lub skontaktować się z przedsiębiorstwem
zajmującym się wywozem odpadów domowych. Więcej informacji o zwracaniu i recyklingu zużytego
sprzętu elektrycznego i elektronicznego znajduje się w witrynie www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Platí len pre štáty Európskej únie a EHP (Nórsko, Island a Lichtenštajnsko)
Tento symbol znamená, že podľa Smernice 2012/19/EÚ o odpade z elektrických a elektronických
zariadení (OEEZ) a podľa platnej legislatívy Slovenskej republiky sa tento produkt nesmie likvidovať spolu
s komunálnym odpadom. Produkt je potrebné odovzdať do určenej zberne, napr. prostredníctvom výmeny
za kúpu nového podobného produktu, alebo na autorizované zberné miesto, ktoré spracúva odpad z
elektrických a elektronických zariadení (EEZ). Nesprávna manipulácia s takýmto typom odpadu môže mať
negatívny vplyv na životné prostredie a ľudské zdravie, pretože elektrické a elektronické zariadenia
obsahujú potenciálne nebezpečné látky. Spoluprácou na správnej likvidácii produktu prispejete
k účinnému využívaniu prírodných zdrojov. Ďalšie informácie o mieste recyklácie opotrebovaných
zariadení získate od miestneho úradu, úradu životného prostredia, zo schváleného plánu OEEZ alebo od
spoločnosti, ktorá zaisťuje likvidáciu komunálneho odpadu. Viac informácií nájdete aj na webovej stránke:
www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Üksnes Euroopa Liit ja EMP (Norra, Island ja Liechtenstein)
See sümbol näitab, et antud toodet ei tohi vastavalt elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmete jäätmeid käsitlevale
direktiivile (2012/19/EL) ning teie riigis kehtivatele õigusaktidele utiliseerida koos olmejäätmetega. Antud
toode tuleb anda selleks määratud kogumispunkti, nt müügipunkt, mis on volitatud üks ühe vastu
vahetama, kui ostate uue sarnase toote, või elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmete jäätmete ümbertöötlemiseks
90
mõeldud kogumispunkti. Täiendava teabe saamiseks elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmetest tekkinud jäätmete
tagastamise ja ümbertöötlemise kohta võtke ühendust kohaliku omavalitsusega, asjakohase
valitsusasutusega, asjakohase tootjavastutusorganisatsiooniga või olmejäätmete käitlejaga. Lisateavet
leitate ka Interneti-leheküljelt www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Tikai Eiropas Savienībai un EEZ (Norvēģijai, Islandei un Lihtenšteinai)
Šis simbols norāda, ka atbilstoši ES Direktīvai (2012/19/ES) par elektrisko un elektronisko iekārtu
atkritumiem (EEIA) un vietējiem tiesību aktiem no šī izstrādājuma nedrīkst atbrīvoties, izmetot to kopā ar
sadzīves atkritumiem. Šis izstrādājums ir jānodod piemērotā savākšanas vietā, piemēram, apstiprinātā
veikalā, kur iegādājaties līdzīgu jaunu produktu un atstājat veco, vai apstiprinātā vietā izlietotu elektrisko
un elektronisko iekārtu pārstrādei. Nepareiza šāda veida atkritumu apsaimniekošana var apdraudēt vidi
un cilvēka veselību tādu iespējami bīstamu vielu dēļ, kas parasti ir elektriskajās un elektroniskajās
iekārtās. Turklāt jūsu atbalsts pareizā šāda veida atkritumu apsaimniekošanā sekmēs efektīvu dabas
resursu izmantošanu. Lai saņemtu pilnīgāku informāciju par vietām, kur izlietoto iekārtu var nodot
pārstrādei, sazinieties ar vietējo pašvaldību, atkritumu savākšanas atbildīgo dienestu, pilnvarotu EEIA
struktūru vai sadzīves atkritumu apsaimniekošanas iestādi. Lai saņemtu plašāku informāciju par elektrisko
un elektronisko iekārtu nodošanu pārstrādei, apmeklējiet tīmekļa vietni www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Tik Europos Sąjungai ir EEE (Norvegijai, Islandijai ir Lichtenšteinui)
Šis ženklas reiškia, kad gaminio negalima išmesti su buitinėmis atliekomis, kaip yra nustatyta Direktyvoje
(2012/19/ES) ir nacionaliniuose teisė aktuose dėl EEĮ atliekų tvarkymo. Šį gaminį reikia atiduoti į tam
skirtą surinkimo punktą, pvz., pagal patvirtintą keitimo sistemą, kai perkamas panašus gaminys, arba į
elektros ir elektroninės įrangos (EEĮ) atliekų perdirbimo punktą. Netinkamas tokios rūšies atliekų
tvarkymas dėl elektros ir elektroninėje įrangoje esančių pavojingų medžiagų gali pakenkti aplinkai ir
žmonių sveikatai. Padėdami užtikrinti tinkamą šio gaminio šalinimo tvarką, kartu prisidėsite prie
veiksmingo gamtos išteklių naudojimo. Jei reikia daugiau informacijos, kaip šalinti tokias atliekas, kad jos
būtų toliau perdirbamos, kreipkitės į savo miesto valdžios institucijas, atliekų tvarkymo organizacijas,
patvirtintų EEĮ atliekų sistemų arba jūsų buitinių atliekų tvarkymo įstaigų atstovus. Išsamesnės
informacijos apie EEĮ atliekų grąžinimo ir perdirbimo tvarką galite rasti apsilankę tinklalapyje www.canon-
europe.com/weee.
Samo za Evropsko unijo in EGP (Norveška, Islandija in Lihtenštajn)
91
Ta simbol pomeni, da tega izdelka v skladu z direktivo OEEO (2012/19/EU) in državno zakonodajo ne
smete odvreči v gospodinjske odpadke. Ta izdelek morate odložiti na ustrezno zbiralno mesto, na primer
pri pooblaščenem prodajalcu, ko kupite podoben nov izdelek ali na zbiralno mesto za recikliranje
električne in elektronske opreme. Neprimerno ravnanje s takšnimi odpadki lahko negativno vpliva na
okolje in človekovo zdravje zaradi nevarnih snovi, ki so povezane z električno in elektronsko opremo. S
pravilno odstranitvijo izdelka hkrati prispevate tudi k učinkoviti porabi naravnih virov. Če želite več
informacij o tem, kje lahko odložite odpadno opremo za recikliranje, pokličite občinski urad, komunalno
podjetje ali službo, ki skrbi za odstranjevanje odpadkov, ali si oglejte načrt OEEO. Če želite več informacij
o vračanju in recikliranju izdelkov v skladu z direktivo OEEO, obiščite www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Само за Европейския съюз и ЕИП (Норвегия, Исландия и Лихтенщайн)
Този символ показва, че този продукт не трябва да се изхвърля заедно с битовите отпадъци,
съгласно Директивата за ИУЕЕО (2012/19/ЕC) и Вашето национално законодателство. Този продукт
трябва да бъде предаден в предназначен за целта пункт за събиране, например на база размяна,
когато купувате нов подобен продукт, или в одобрен събирателен пункт за рециклиране на излязло
от употреба електрическо и електронно оборудване (ИУЕЕО). Неправилното третиране на този тип
отпадъци може да доведе до евентуални отрицателни последствия за околната среда и човешкото
здраве поради потенциално опасните вещества, които обикновено са свързани с ЕЕО. В същото
време Вашето съдействие за правилното изхвърляне на този продукт ще допринесе за
ефективното използване на природните ресурси. Повече информация относно местата, където
може да предавате излязло от употреба оборудване за рециклиране, може да получите от местните
власти, от органа, отговорен за отпадъците и от одобрена система за излязло от употреба ЕЕО или
от Вашата местна служба за битови отпадъци. За повече информация относно връщането и
рециклирането на продукти от излязло от употреба ЕЕО посетете www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Doar pentru Uniunea Europeană şi EEA (Norvegia, Islanda şi Liechtenstein)
Acest simbol indică faptul că acest produs nu trebuie aruncat o dată cu reziduurile menajere, în
conformitate cu Directiva DEEE (Directiva privind deşeurile de echipamente electrice şi electronice)
(2012/19/UE) şi legile naţionale. Acest produs trebuie transportat la un punct de colectare special, de
exemplu un centru care preia produsele vechi atunci când achiziţionaţi un produs nou similar, sau la un
punct de colectare autorizat pentru reciclarea deşeurilor provenite de la echipamentele electrice şi
electronice (EEE). Mânuirea necorespunzătoare a acestor tipuri de deşeuri poate avea un impact negativ
asupra mediului înconjurător şi sănătăţii indivizilor, din cauza substanţelor potenţial nocive care sunt în
general asociate cu EEE. În acelaşi timp, cooperarea dvs. la reciclarea corectă a acestui produs va
contribui la utilizarea efectivă a resurselor naturale. Pentru mai multe informaţii privind locurile de reciclare
a deşeurilor provenite de la echipamente, contactaţi biroul primăriei locale, autoritatea responsabilă cu
colectarea deşeurilor, schema DEEE aprobată sau serviciul de colectare a deşeurilor menajere. Pentru
92
mai multe informaţii privind returnarea şi reciclarea produselor DEEE, vizitaţi www.canon-europe.com/
weee.
Samo za Europsku uniju i EEZ (Norveška, Island i Lihtenštajn)
Ovaj simbol pokazuje da se ovaj proizvod ne smije odlagati s kućnim otpadom sukladno WEEE Direktivi
(2012/19/EC) i vašem nacionalnom zakonu. Ovaj proizvod je potrebno predati na posebno mjesto za
sakupljanje otpada, npr. na ovlašteno mjesto gdje možete zamijeniti staro za novo ukoliko kupujete novi
sličan proizvod ili na ovlašteno mjesto za sakupljanje rabljene električne i elektroničke opreme (EEE) za
recikliranje. Nepropisno rukovanje ovom vrstom otpada može imati negativan učinak na okolinu i zdravlje
ljudi zbog supstanci koje su potencijalno opasne za zdravlje, a općenito se povezuju s EEE. Istovremeno,
vaša će suradnja kroz propisno odlaganje ovog proizvoda doprinijeti efektivnoj uporabi prirodnih resursa.
Za više informacija o tome gdje možete odložiti svoj otpad za recikliranje obratite se vašem lokalnom
gradskom uredu, komunalnoj službi, odobrenom WEEE programu ili službi za odlaganje kućnog otpada.
Ostale informacije o vraćanju i recikliranju WEEE proizvoda potražite na www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Korisnici u Srbiji
Ovaj simbol označava da ovaj proizvod ne sme da se odlaže sa ostalim kućnim otpadom, u skladu sa
WEEE Direktivom (2012/19/EU) i nacionalnim zakonima. Ovaj proizvod treba predati određenom centru
za prikupljanje, npr. na osnovi "jedan-za-jedan" kada kupujete sličan novi proizvod, ili ovlašćenom centru
za prikupljanje za reciklažu istrošene električne i elektronske opreme (EEE). Nepravilno rukovanje ovom
vrstom otpada može da ima moguće negativne posledice po životnu sredinu i ljudsko zdravlje usled
potencijalno opasnih materijala koji se uglavnom vezuju za EEE. U isto vreme, vaša saradnja na
ispravnom odlaganju ovog proizvoda će doprineti efikasnom korišćenju prirodnih resursa. Za više
informacija o tome gde možete da predate vašu staru opremu radi recikliranje, vas molimo, da
kontaktirate lokalne gradske vlasti, komunalne službe, odobreni plan reciklaže ili Gradsku čistoću. Za više
informacija o vraćanju i recikliranju WEEE proizvoda, posetite stranicu www.canon-europe.com/weee.
93
Front View
(1) ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
Load a document here. The documents loaded in the document tray are scanned automatically one
sheet at a time.
Loading Documents in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
(2) operation panel
Use to change the settings of the printer or to operate it.
Operation Panel
(3) document feeder cover
Open when clearing jammed documents.
(4) document guide
Adjust this guide to match the width of document in the ADF.
(5) paper support extension
Open to load paper in the rear tray.
(6) paper support
Open to load paper in the rear tray.
(7) rear tray
Load paper here. Two or more sheets of the same size and type of paper can be loaded at the same
time, and fed automatically one sheet at a time.
Loading Plain Paper / Photo Paper
Loading Envelopes
(8) paper guides
Align with both sides of the paper stack.
(9) document tray
Open to load a document in the ADF. You can load two or more sheets of document of the same size
and thickness. Load the document with the side you want to scan facing up.
96
(10) document output slot
Documents scanned from the ADF are delivered here.
(11) document cover
Open to load an original on the platen glass.
(12) paper output tray
Printed paper is ejected. Open before printing.
(13) output tray extension
Open to support ejected paper.
(14) POWER lamp
Lights after flashing when the power is turned on.
(15) FAX Memory lamp
Lights or flashes depending on the document stored in the printer's memory.
Lights:
Printed received document or unsent document is stored in the printer's memory.
Flashes
Unprinted received document is stored in the printer's memory.
(16) Alarm lamp
Lights or flashes when an error occurs.
(17) ON button
Turns the power on or off. Before turning on the power, make sure that the document cover is closed.
(18) platen glass
Load an original here.
97
Rear View
(1) USB port
Plug in the USB cable to connect the printer with a computer.
(2) external device jack
Connect an external device such as telephone or answering machine.
(3) telephone line jack
Connect the telephone line.
(4) power cord connector
Plug in the supplied power cord.
Important
• Do not touch the metal casing.
• Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the printer is printing or scanning originals with the
computer.
98
Inside View
(1) ink tank covers
Open to refill ink tanks.
(2) scanning unit / cover
Scans originals. Open to refill ink tanks or to remove jammed paper.
(3) ink tanks
The black ink tank is on the right, and the color ink tanks (cyan, magenta, and yellow) are on the left.
If any ink levels are low, refill the low tanks.
(4) cartridge holder
Install the cartridge here.
Note
• For details on refilling ink tanks, see Refilling Ink Tanks.
(5) Upper limit line
Indicates the maximum capacity of the ink.
(6) Single dot
Indicates the amount of ink required when performing system cleaning.
(7) Lower limit line
Indicates the lower limit of the sufficient amount of ink to print. Refill the ink tank before the amount of
ink is below the this line.
99
Operation Panel
(1) LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
Displays messages, menu items, and the operational status.
(2) Back button
Returns the LCD to the previous screen.
(3) FAX button
Switches the printer to the fax mode.
(4) COPY button
Switches the printer to the copy mode.
(5) SCAN button
Switches the printer to the scan mode.
(6) Setup button
Displays the Setup menu screen. With this menu, you can perform printer maintenance and change
printer settings.
(7) Black button
Starts black & white copying, scanning, faxing, etc.
(8) Color button
Starts color copying, scanning, faxing, etc.
(9) and buttons
Used to select a menu or setting item. The button is also used when entering characters.
LCD and Operation Panel
(10) OK button
Finalizes the selection of a menu or setting item. This button is also used to resolve an error or ejects
documents in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
100
(11) Menu button
Displays the Copy menu, Scan menu, or FAX menu screen.
(12) Numeric buttons
Used to enter numerical values such as the number of copies, as well as fax/telephone numbers and
characters.
(13) Tone button
Switches to tone dialing temporarily if your printer is connected to a rotary pulse line.
(14) Stop button
Cancels operation when print, copy, scan, or fax transmission/reception job is in progress.
Note
• The printer makes the beep sound when pressing keypad buttons on the operation panel. The keypad
sound can be enabled or disabled in Sound control of Dev. user settings.
Sound control
101
Confirming that the Power Is On
The POWER lamp is lit when the printer is turned on.
Even if the LCD is off, if the POWER lamp is lit, the printer is on.
Note
• It may take a while for the printer to start printing immediately after you turn on the printer.
• The LCD will turn off if the printer is not operated for about 10 minutes. To restore the display, press any
button except the ON button or perform the print operation. You cannot change the wait time before the
LCD turns off.
103
Turning the Printer On and Off
Turning on the printer
1. Press the ON button to turn on the printer.
The POWER lamp flashes and then remains lit.
Confirming that the Power Is On
Note
• It may take a while for the printer to start printing immediately after you turn on the printer.
• If an error message is displayed on the LCD, see An Error Occurs.
• You can set the printer to automatically turn on when a print or scan operation is performed from
a computer connected by USB cable or wireless network. This feature is set to off by default.
From the printer
ECO settings
From the computer
• For Windows:
Managing the Printer Power
• For Mac OS:
Managing the Printer Power
Turning off the printer
1. Press the ON button to turn off the printer.
When the POWER lamp stops flashing, the printer is turned off.
104
Important
• When you unplug the power cord after turning off the printer, be sure to confirm that the
POWER lamp is off.
Note
•You can set the printer to automatically turn off when no operations are performed or no print
jobs are sent to the printer for a certain interval. This feature is set to on by default.
From the printer
ECO settings
From the computer
•For Windows:
Managing the Printer Power
•For Mac OS:
Managing the Printer Power
105
Checking the Power Plug/Power Cord
Unplug the power cord once a month to confirm that the power plug/power cord does not have anything
unusual described below.
• The power plug/power cord is hot.
• The power plug/power cord is rusty.
• The power plug/power cord is bent.
• The power plug/power cord is worn.
• The power plug/power cord is split.
Caution
• If you find anything unusual with the power plug/power cord described above, Unplugging the Printer
and call for service. Using the printer with one of the unusual conditions above may cause a fire or an
electric shock.
106
Unplugging the Printer
To unplug the power cord, follow the procedure below.
Important
• When you unplug the power cord, press the ON button, then confirm that the POWER lamp is off.
Unplugging the power cord while the POWER lamp is lit or flashing may cause drying or clogging of the
print head and print quality may be reduced.
• If the power cord is unplugged, the date/time settings will be reset and all documents stored in the
printer's memory will be lost. Send or print a necessary document before unplugging the power cord.
1. Press the ON button to turn the printer off.
2. Confirm that the POWER lamp is off.
3. Unplug the power cord.
The specification of the power cord differs depending on the country or region of use.
107
LCD and Operation Panel
The mode button (A) on the operation panel allows you to switch between the copy mode, scan mode, fax
mode, and setup menu screen.
Pressing the Menu button (B) in the respective modes shows the menu screen to select various functions or
settings.
Selecting a Menu or Setting Item
On the menu screen or settings screen, use the button (C) to select an item or option, then press
the OK button (D) to proceed with the procedure.
To return to the previous screen, press the Back button (E).
Example: Changing the scan contrast for faxing.
Press the Menu button in the Fax standby screen.
Press the button (C) to select FAX TX settings.
Press the OK button (D).
108
Select Scan contrast, press the OK button (D).
Use the button (C) to change the contrast, then press the OK button (D).
Network Status Indication
Wireless LAN setting and the network status indicate by the icon.
icon is displayed on the LCD after pressing each mode button, Wireless LAN is enabled and the
printer is connected to the wireless router.
Depending on the signal state, the icon will change.
(Signal strength: 81 % or more)
You can use the printer over a wireless LAN without any problems.
(Signal strength: 51 % or more)
The problem such as the printer cannot print may occur according to the net-
work status. We recommend placing the printer near the wireless router.
(Signal strength: 50 % or less)
The problem such as the printer cannot print may occur. Place the printer near
the wireless router.
Wireless LAN is enabled but the printer is not connected to the wireless router.
Note
• When Wireless LAN is disabled, icon is not displayed.
109
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
Use the Numeric buttons to enter or edit such information as unit name, a recipient's name for the directory,
etc.
Switching the Input Mode
Each time the Tone button is pressed, the input mode is switched.
The current input mode appears at the upper right corner of the LCD.
Note
• Only numbers and symbols that are available for the type of information you are entering are
displayed, such as numbers for telephone or fax number input.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
Press the Tone button to switch the input mode.
Use the Numeric buttons to enter the desired characters.
• To insert a space
Press the button five times.
• To delete the last entered character
Press the Back button.
Editing Entered Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
Press the or button to move the cursor under the position you want to edit.
• To insert a space
Press the button five times.
• To insert a character
Move the cursor under the character to the right of the insertion position, then enter the character. The
character on the cursor will move to the right and the new character will be inserted.
• To delete a character
Move the cursor under the character, then press the Back button.
110
List of Characters Assigned to Each Numeric Button
For Fax/Telephone Number, Name, Number of Copies
Button Lowercase mode
(:a)
Uppercase mode
(:A)
Numeric mode
(:1)
Fax/Tele-
phone no.
1 1
abcåäáàãâæç ABCÅÄÁÀÃÂÆÇ 2 2
defëéèê DEFËÉÈÊ 3 3
gh i ï í ì î GH I Ï Í Ì Î 4 4
jkl JKL 5 5
mnoñøöóòõô MNOÑØÖÓÒÕÔ 6 6
pqrsþ PQRSÞ 7 7
tuvüúùû TUVÜÚÙÛ 8 8
wxyzý WXYZÝ 9 9
0 0
. @ - _ SP*1 # ! " , ; : ^ ` = / | ' ? $ % & + ( ) [ ] { } < > #
Switch the input mode.
*1 "SP" indicates a space.
For LAN Settings
Button Lowercase mode
(:a)
Uppercase mode
(:A)
Numeric mode
(:1)
1
abc ABC 2
def DEF 3
gh i GH I 4
jkl JKL 5
mno MNO 6
111
pqrs PQRS 7
tuv TUV 8
wxyz WXYZ 9
0
. @ - _ SP*2 # ! " , ; : ^ ` = / | ' ? $ % & + ( ) [ ] { } < > \ ~
Switch the input mode.
*2 "SP" indicates a space.
112
Changing the Print Options
You can change the detailed printer driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software.
Specify this option if you encounter print failures such as part of an image data being cut off.
The procedure for changing the print options is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Print Options... on the Page Setup tab
The Print Options dialog box opens.
Note
•When you use the XPS printer driver, the functions available to you are different.
3. Change the individual settings
If necessary, change the setting of each item, and then click OK.
The Page Setup tab is displayed again.
115
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time.
The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows:
Registering a Printing Profile
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the necessary items
From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select the printing profile to be used and if
necessary, change the settings after Additional Features.
You can also register necessary items on the Main and Page Setup tabs.
3. Click Save...
The Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box opens.
4. Save the settings
116
Enter a name in the Name field. If necessary, click Options..., set the items, and then click OK.
In the Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box, click OK to save the print settings and return to the
Quick Setup tab.
The name and icon are displayed in Commonly Used Settings.
Important
• To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click Options...,
and check each item.
Note
• When you re-install the printer driver or upgrade the printer driver version, the print settings that are
already registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings.
Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved. If a profile is deleted, register the print
settings again.
Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile
1. Select the printing profile to be deleted
Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick
Setup tab.
2. Delete the printing profile
Click Delete. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.
The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly Used Settings list.
Note
• Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.
117
Managing the Printer Power
This function allows you to manage the printer power from the printer driver.
The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows:
Power Off
The Power Off function turns off the printer. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the
printer on from the printer driver.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Execute power off
Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.
The printer power switches off, and the Maintenance tab is displayed again.
Important
•You cannot receive faxes when the printer is switched off.
Auto Power
Auto Power allows you to set Auto Power On and Auto Power Off.
The Auto Power On function automatically turns on the printer when data is received.
The Auto Power Off function automatically turns off the printer when there are no operations from the
printer driver or the printer for a specified period of time.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Make sure that the printer is on and then click Auto Power on the Maintenance tab
The Auto Power Settings dialog box opens.
Note
•If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an
error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
3. If necessary, complete the following settings:
Auto Power On
Specifying Enable from the list will turn the printer on upon receipt of print data.
118
Auto Power Off
Specify the time from the list. When this time lapses without any operations from the printer driver
or the printer, the printer is turned off automatically.
4. Apply the settings
Click OK. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.
The Maintenance tab is displayed again.
The setting is enabled after this. When you want to disable this function, select Disable from the list
according to the same procedure.
Note
• When the printer is turned off, the Canon IJ Status Monitor message varies depending on the Auto
Power On setting.
When the setting is Enable, "Printer is standing by" is displayed. When the setting is Disable,
"Printer is offline" is displayed.
Important
• When you use the printer by connecting it to a telephone line via a modular cable, you can set Auto
Power Off but the power will not be turned off automatically.
119
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.
The procedure for configuring Custom Settings is as follows:
Custom Settings
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Make sure that the printer is on, and then click Custom Settings on the Maintenance
tab
The Custom Settings dialog box opens.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an
error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
3. If necessary, complete the following settings:
Prevent paper abrasion
The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high-density
printing to prevent paper abrasion.
Check this check box to prevent paper abrasion.
Align heads manually
Usually, the Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is set to automatic head
alignment, but you can change it to manual head alignment.
If the printing results of automatic print head alignment are not satisfactory, perform manual head
alignment.
Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment. Uncheck this check box to perform
the automatic head alignment.
Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape]
On the Page Setup tab, you can change the rotation direction of the Landscape in the
Orientation.
To rotate the print data 90 degrees to the left during printing, select this item. To rotate the print
data 90 degrees to the right during printing, clear this item.
Important
•Do not change this setting while the print job is displayed in the print wait list. Otherwise,
characters may be omitted or the layout may become corrupt.
Don't detect mismatch of paper settings when printing from computer
When you print documents from your computer and the paper settings in the printer driver and the
paper information registered on the printer do not match, this setting disables the message
120
display and allows you to continue printing.
To disable detection of paper setting mismatches, select this check box.
Ink Drying Wait Time
You can set the length of the printer rest time until printing of the next page begins. Moving the
slider to the right increases the pause time, and moving the slider to the left decreases the time.
If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page
dries, increase the ink drying wait time.
Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing.
4. Apply the settings
Click OK and when the confirmation message appears, click OK.
The printer operates with the modified settings hereafter.
121
Changing Settings from Operation Panel
This section describes the procedure to change the settings in the Device settings screen, taking the steps
to specify Extended copy amt. as an example.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Select Device settings and then press the OK button.
The Device settings screen is displayed.
4. Select a setting item to adjust and then press the OK button.
The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.
5. Select a setting item and then press the OK button.
6. Select a setting to specify and then press the OK button.
For more on setting items on the operation panel:
Setting Items on Operation Panel
123
Fax settings
Select this menu from Setup menu.
Easy setup
TEL no. registration
FAX user settings
Adv. FAX settings
Auto print settings
Security control
Note
• Before changing the settings, you can confirm the current settings by printing USER'S DATA LIST.
Summary of Reports and Lists
Easy setup
The printer must be set up depending on your telephone line and use of the faxing function. Follow the
procedure according to the instructions on the LCD.
Note
• You can specify the setup setting individually or the advanced setting.
For details on how to specify the setting:
Preparing for Faxing
TEL no. registration
You can register the recipient's fax/telephone number to the printer.
Registering Recipients Using Operation Panel of Printer
FAX user settings
•Unit TEL no. registr.
Registers your fax/telephone number printed on sent faxes.
Registering User Information
•Unit name registr.
Registers your name printed on sent faxes.
Registering User Information
•Telephone line type (Country or region of purchase other than China)
Selects the telephone line type setting for the printer.
Setting Telephone Line Type
125
Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
•TEL line auto select (China only)
If you select ON, the telephone line type is selected automatically.
If you select OFF, you can select the telephone line type manually.
Setting Telephone Line Type
Adv. FAX settings
•Auto redial
Enables/disables automatic redialing.
If you select ON, you can specify the maximum number of redial attempts and the length of time the
printer waits between redial attempts.
•Dial tone detect
Avoids mistransmission when reception and transmission occur at the same time.
If you select ON, the printer transmits the fax after confirming the dial tone.
Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
•Pause time settings
Sets the length of pause time for each when you enter "P" (pause).
•TTI position
Selects the position of the sender information (outside or inside the image area).
•Remote RX
Enables/disables remote reception.
If you select ON, you can specify the remote reception ID.
Remote Reception
•Color transmission
When faxing color documents using the ADF, selects whether to convert them into black & white data
if the recipient's fax device does not support color faxing.
If you select If incompatible, end, the printer does not send color documents when the recipient's fax
device does not support color faxing.
•RX image reduction
Enables/disables automatic reduction of incoming faxes so that they fit in the selected paper.
If you select ON, you can select the image reduction direction.
126
•Adv. communication
◦ECM TX
Selects whether to send faxes in Error Correction Mode (ECM).
Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM
◦ECM RX
Selects whether to receive faxes in Error Correction Mode (ECM).
Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM
◦TX start speed
Selects the fax transmission speed.
Ex:
The following settings are available.
33600 bps/14400 bps/9600 bps/4800 bps
The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
The fax transmission start speed will be faster as the value is bigger.
Some of settings are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.
When the telephone line condition or connection is poor, selecting a lower transmission start
speed may solve transmission problems.
◦RX start speed
Selects the fax reception speed.
Ex:
The following settings are available.
33600 bps/14400 bps/9600 bps/4800 bps
The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
The fax reception start speed will be faster as the value is bigger.
Some of settings are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.
When the telephone line condition or connection is poor, selecting a lower reception start speed
may solve reception problems.
Auto print settings
•Received documents
Selects whether to print the received fax automatically when receiving a fax.
If you select Do not print, the received fax is stored in the printer's memory.
127
For details on the received fax stored in the printer's memory:
Document Stored in Printer's Memory
•Activity report
Selects whether to print ACTIVITY REPORT automatically.
If you select Print, the printer prints ACTIVITY REPORT for the 20 histories of sent and received
faxes automatically.
For details on the procedure to print ACTIVITY REPORT manually:
Summary of Reports and Lists
•TX report
Selects whether to print TX REPORT/ERROR TX REPORT automatically after sending a fax.
If you print the report, select Print error only or Print for each TX.
If you select Print error only or Print for each TX, you can specify the print setting that the first page
of the fax is printed along with the report.
•RX report
Selects whether to print RX REPORT automatically after receiving a fax.
If you print RX REPORT, select Print error only or Print for each RX.
Security control
•FAX no. re-entry
If you select ON, you can set the printer to send faxes after using the Numeric buttons to enter the
number twice. By using this setting, you can avoid the mistransmission of faxes.
Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes
•Check RX FAX info
If you select ON, the printer checks whether the recipient's fax device information matches the dialed
number. If it matches the number, the printer starts to send faxes.
Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes
•Hook setting
If you select Enable, you can use the on hook dial function.
•FAX RX reject
If you select ON, the printer rejects the reception of faxes with no sender information or faxes from
specific senders.
Rejecting Fax Reception
128
•Caller rejection
If you subscribe to the Caller ID service, the printer detects the sender's Caller ID. If the sender's ID
matches the condition specified in this setting, the printer rejects the phone call or fax reception from
the sender.
If you select Subscribed, you can specify the settings of rejection.
Using Caller ID Service to Reject Calls
Note
• This setting may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase. Contact your
telephone company to confirm whether it provides this service.
129
Print settings
Select this menu from Device settings in Setup menu.
•Prevent abrasion
Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged.
Important
• Be sure to set this back to OFF after printing since it may result in lower printing speed or lower
print quality.
•Extended copy amt.
Selects the amount of image that extends off the paper when copying in Borderless (full).
Slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image is enlarged to fill the whole page. You
can change the width to be cropped from the borders of the original image as needed.
Cropped area will be larger if Amount: Large is selected.
Note
• If printouts contain margins even though you are copying in Borderless, specifying Amount: Large
for this setting may help solve the problem.
130
LAN settings
Select this menu from Device settings in Setup menu.
Wireless LAN
Wireless Direct
Print LAN details
Common settings
Wireless LAN
•Wireless LAN setup
Selects the setup method for wireless LAN connection.
Note
• You can also enter this setting menu by selecting Wireless LAN setup from the Setup menu
screen.
◦Easy WL connect
Select if you specify the settings of the access point information to the printer directly from a
device (such as a smartphone) without operating the wireless router. Follow the on-screen
instructions of the connecting device for the setup procedure.
◦Manual connect
Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN manually using the operation panel of the
printer.
◦WPS (Push button)
Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN using a wireless router supporting a Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) push button method. Follow the on-screen instructions during setup.
◦Other setup
■Manual setup
Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN manually. You can specify multiple WEP
keys.
■WPS (PIN code)
Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN using a wireless router supporting a Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) PIN code method. Follow the on-screen instructions during setup.
•WLAN activ./inactiv.
Enables/disables wireless LAN.
Wireless Direct
•Switch WL Direct
Enables/disables Wireless Direct.
131
•Update SSID/PW
Updates the identifier (SSID) and password for Wireless Direct.
•Change device name
Changes the printer's name displayed on a Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.
•Confirm request
Set whether the printer displays the confirmation screen when a Wi-Fi Direct compatible device is
connecting the printer.
Print LAN details
You can print out the network settings of the printer such as its IP address and SSID.
For more information on the printer's network setting is printed out:
Printing Network Settings
Important
• The network settings printout contains important information about your network. Handle it with care.
Common settings
•Set printer name
Specifies the printer name. You can use up to 15 characters for the name.
Note
• You cannot use the same printer name as that already used for other LAN connected devices.
• You cannot use a hyphen for the initial or last character of the printer name.
•TCP/IP settings
Performs IPv4 or IPv6 setting.
•WSD setting
Setting items when you use WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows).
Enable/disable WSD
Selects whether WSD is enabled or disabled.
Note
• When this setting is enabled, the printer icon is displayed on the Network Explorer in Windows.
Optimize WSD-In
Selecting Active allows you to receive the WSD printing data faster.
WSD scan from dev.
Selecting Active allows you to transfer the scanned data to the computer using WSD.
Timeout setting
Specifies the timeout length.
132
•Bonjour settings
Setting items for LAN using Bonjour for Mac OS.
Enab./disab. Bonjour
Selecting Active allows you to use Bonjour to perform the network settings.
Enter service name
Specifies the Bonjour service name. You can use up to 48 characters for the name.
Note
• You cannot use the same service name as that already used for other LAN connected devices.
•LPR setting
Enables/disables the LPR setting.
•RAW protocol
Enables/disables RAW printing.
•LLMNR
Enables/disables LLMNR (Link-Local Multicast Name Resolution). Selecting Active allows the printer
to detect printer's IP address from the printer name without a DNS server.
•IPsec settings
Selecting Active allows you to specify the IPsec settings.
133
Dev. user settings
Select this menu from Device settings in Setup menu.
•Date/time setting
Sets the current date and time.
Setting Sender Information
Important
• If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, the date/time settings will be reset.
•Date display format
Sets the format of dates displayed on the LCD and printed on sent faxes.
•DST setting
Some countries adopt the daylight saving time (summer time) system that shifts the clock time forward
at certain periods of the year.
You can set your printer to automatically change the time by registering the date and time that daylight
saving time (summer time) begins and ends.
Setting Sender Information
Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
•Sound control
Selects whether the beep sound in operations is enabled or not.
◦Keypad sound
Selects whether the beep sound is enabled or not when pressing the buttons on the operation
panel.
◦Alarm sound
Selects whether the alarm is enabled or not.
◦Line monitor sound
Selects whether the line monitor sound is enabled or not.
◦Offhook alarm
Selects whether the alarm is enabled or not when the phone receiver is not put on the hook
properly.
•Country or region
Selects the country or region where you are using the printer.
Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
134
•Language selection
Changes the language for LCD messages and menus.
Japanese / English / German / French / Italian / Spanish / Dutch / Portuguese / Norwegian / Swedish /
Danish / Finnish / Russian / Ukrainian / Polish / Czech / Slovak / Hungarian / Slovene / Croatian /
Romanian / Bulgarian / Turkish / Greek / Estonian / Latvian / Lithuanian / Simplified Chinese / Traditional
Chinese / Korean / Indonesian / Vietnamese
•Key repeat
Enables/Disables continuous input by pressing and holding down the button when setting the
number of copies, the zoom ratio, etc.
•Device info sending
Selects whether you will send the printer usage information to Canon server. The information sent to
Canon will be utilized to develop better products. Select ON to send the printer usage information to
Canon server.
•Doc. remov. reminder
Selects whether the printer will display the reminder screen in case you forget to remove the original
from the platen glass after scanning.
Important
• Depending on the type of original or the state of the document cover, forgetting to remove the
original may not be detected.
135
Firmware update
Select this menu from Device settings in Setup menu.
You can update the firmware of the printer, check the firmware version, or perform settings of a notification
screen.
Note
• Only Current version is available when Inactive is selected for WLAN activ./inactiv..
•Install update
Performs the firmware update of the printer. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform update.
Important
• When you use this function, make sure the printer is connected to the Internet.
Note
• If the firmware update is not complete, check the following and take an appropriate action.
• Check the network settings such as a wireless router.
• If Cannot connect to the server; try again is displayed on the LCD, press the OK button and
try again after a while.
•Current version
You can check the current firmware version.
•Update notification
When Yes is selected and the firmware update is available, the screen to inform you of the firmware
update is displayed on the LCD.
•DNS server setup
Performs settings for a DNS server. Select Auto setup or Manual setup. If you select Manual setup,
follow the display on the LCD to perform settings.
•Proxy server setup
Performs settings for a proxy server. Select Use or Do not use. If you select Use, follow the display on
the LCD to perform settings.
136
Feed settings
Select this menu from Device settings in Setup menu.
By registering the paper size and the media type loaded on the rear tray, you can prevent the printer from
misprinting by displaying the message before printing starts when the paper size or the media type of the
loaded paper differs from the print settings.
For details:
Paper Settings
•Register paper info
Registers the paper size and the media type you load on the rear tray.
Note
• For more on the combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on the LCD:
• For Windows:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
• For Mac OS:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
•Det. paper mismatch
If you select ON, the printer detects whether the paper size and the media type are identical with those
registered in Register paper info. If printing starts with the settings that do not match, an error message
is displayed on the LCD.
Note
• When OFF is selected, Register paper info is disabled.
•Detect reinsertion
If you select ON, the printer detects the cassette is reinserted. When the Register paper info screen is
displayed, register the paper size and the media type.
137
Reset setting
Select this menu from Device settings in Setup menu.
Returns all settings you made to the printer back to the default. However, some data may not be changed,
depending on the current usage state of your printer.
Important
• Depending on the setting item, it is necessary to perform connection or setup again after you have
returned the setting back to the default.
•Web service setup
Returns the Web service settings back to the default.
•LAN settings
Returns the LAN settings back to the default.
•Telephone no. data
Returns the telephone/fax number settings to default.
•Setting data
Returns the settings such as the paper size, media type, or other setting items other than the LAN
settings or the fax settings back to the default.
•Device info sending
Returns only the device information sending settings back to the default.
•FAX settings
Returns the fax settings back to the default. Disconnect the telephone line from the printer before you
return this setting item back to the default.
After resetting, perform setup again as necessary.
•All data
Sets all settings you made to the printer back to the default. The administrator password specified by
Remote UI or IJ Network Device Setup Utility reverts to the default setting.
After resetting, perform setup again as necessary.
Note
• You cannot set the following setting items back to the default:
• The language displayed on the LCD
• The current position of the print head
• CSR (Certificate Signing Request) for encryption method (SSL/TLS) setting
• The country or region selected for Country or region
You can delete the registered user's name or telephone number following the procedure below.
1. Displays Unit TEL no. registr. or Displays Unit name registr..
Setting Sender Information
138
2. Delete all the numbers and the letters by pressing the Back button.
3. Press the OK button after deleting all the numbers and the letters.
•ON is selected for Device info sending on Dev. user settings after you have reset the setting to send
device information. However, the printer does not send device information. Select OFF to disable the
function to send device information.
139
Ink notification set.
Select this menu from Setup menu.
•Ink notification
If ON is selected, the message appears on the LCD when ink runs out.
Refilling Ink Tanks
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
If this menu is changed OFF to ON, For correct operation of the function, you must refill all ink
tanks to the upper limit line appears.
Refill the ink tanks of all colors to the upper limit line and then press the OK button. If all the ink tanks
are not refilled to the upper limit line, the remaining ink level is not detected correctly.
Are all the ink tanks refilled to the upper limit line? appears.
If No is selected, Ink notification set. can not be set to ON.
Important
• If the remaining ink level notification function is disabled, visually inspect the remaining ink and refill
the ink tanks as necessary. Continuing printing with ink below the lower limit line of an ink tank may
prevent satisfactory print quality or may cause malfunction or damage to the printer.
•Reset ink lev. count
If you refill the ink tank when remaining ink level notification function is enabled and when the remaining
ink error has not occurred, resets the remaining ink level count after refilling the ink tank to the upper
limit line.
Reset of the ink remaining amount count in one of the following ways.
◦ Resetting the remaining ink level count for all colors
◦ Resetting the remaining ink level count for some colors
If you select Yes, the following screen appears.
To reset the remaining ink level count for all colors, select Yes.
To reset the remaining ink level count for some colors, select No.
Important
• When you reset the remaining ink level count, you must refill the ink tanks of all colors to the upper
limit line. If you reset the remaining ink level count without refilling the ink tanks to the upper limit
line, the remaining ink level count cannot be reset correctly.
140
System information
Select this menu from Setup menu.
•Current version
Displays the current firmware version.
•Printer name
Displays the printer name currently specified.
•Serial number
Displays the printer serial number.
142
ECO settings
This setting allows you to turn on/off the printer automatically to save electricity.
Turning on Printer Automatically
Turning off Printer Automatically
Turning on Printer Automatically
You can enable the printer to turn on automatically when printing data is sent to the printer or the printer is
operated for scanning from the computer.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Select ECO settings and then press the OK button.
4. Select Auto power on and then press the OK button.
5. Select ON and then press the OK button.
Turning off Printer Automatically
You can enable the printer to turn off automatically when no operation is made or no printing data is sent
to the printer for a specified period of time.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Select ECO settings and then press the OK button.
4. Select Auto power off and then press the OK button.
5. Select a time to turn off the printer and then press the OK button.
143
Default Network Settings
LAN Connection Defaults
Item Default
Enable/Disable LAN Disable LAN
SSID BJNPSETUP
Wireless LAN security Disable
IP address (IPv4)Auto setup
IP address (IPv6) Auto setup
Set printer name* XXXXXXXXXXXX
Enable/disable IPv6 Enable
Enable/disable WSD Enable
Timeout setting 15 minutes
Enab./disab. Bonjour Enable
Service name Canon G4000 series
LPR setting Enable
RAW protocol Enable
LLMNR Active
("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.)
* Default value depends on printer. To check value, use operation panel.
LAN settings
Wireless Direct Defaults
Item Default
SSID (Identifier for wireless direct) DIRECT-abXX-G4000series *1
Password YYYYYYYYYY *2
Security method WPA2-PSK (AES)
WL Direct dev. name ZZZZZZ-G4000series *3
Confirm request Displayed
*1 "ab" is specified at random and "XX" represents last two digits of printer's MAC address. (The value is
specified when the printer is turned on for the first time.)
146
*2 The password is specified automatically when the printer is turned on for the first time.
*3 "ZZZZZZ" represents last six digits of printer's MAC address.
147
Another Printer Found with Same Name
When the printer is found during setup, other printers with the same name may appear on the results
screen.
Select a printer with checking the printer settings against those on detection result screen.
• For Windows:
Check the printer's MAC address or serial to select the correct printer from the results.
• For Mac OS:
The printer names appear with the MAC address added at the end or as the printer name specified by
Bonjour.
Check identifiers such as the MAC address, the printer name specified by Bonjour, and the printer's
serial number to select the printer from among those that appear.
Note
• Serial number may not appear on result screen.
To check the printer's MAC address and the serial number, print out the network settings information.
Printing Network Settings
Note
• You can check the serial number by displaying on the LCD.
System information
148
Connecting to Another Computer via LAN/Changing from USB to
LAN Connection
For Windows:
For Mac OS:
For Windows:
To add a computer to connect to the printer on a LAN or to change from USB to LAN connection, perform
setup using the Setup CD-ROM or follow the instructions on the Canon website.
For Mac OS:
To connect an additional computer to the printer via LAN, or to change from USB to LAN connection,
follow the instructions on the Canon website.
149
Printing Network Settings
Use the operation panel to print the printer's current network settings.
Important
• The network settings printout contains important information about your network. Handle it with care.
1. Make sure printer is turned on.
2. Load two sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper.
3. Press Setup button.
The Setup menu screen appears.
4. Select Device settings and press OK button.
5. Select LAN settings and press OK button.
6. Select Print LAN details and press OK button.
The printer starts printing network settings information.
The printed network settings information is as follows: (Some setting values are not displayed depending
on the printer settings.)
Item Description Setting
Product Information Product information –
Product Name Product name XXXXXXXX
ROM Version ROM version XXXXXXXX
Serial Number Serial number XXXXXXXX
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Enable/Disable
Infrastructure Infrastructure Enable/Disable
MAC Address MAC address XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
Connection Connection status Active/Inactive
SSID SSID Wireless LAN SSID
Channel Channel XX (1 to 11)
Encryption Encryption method None/WEP/TKIP/AES
WEP Key Length WEP key length (bits) Inactive/128/64
Authentication Authentication method None/auto/open/shared/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
150
Signal Strength Signal strength 0 to 100 [%]
TCP/IPv4 TCP/IPv4 Enable
IP Address IP address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Subnet Mask Subnet mask XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Default Gateway Default gateway XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
TCP/IPv6 TCP/IPv6 Enable/Disable
Link Local Address Link local address XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Link Local Prefix Length Link local prefix length XXX
Stateless Address1 Stateless address 1 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Stateless Prefix Length1 Stateless prefix length 1 XXX
Stateless Address2 Stateless address XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Stateless Prefix Length2 Stateless prefix length 2 XXX
Stateless Address3 Stateless address 3 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Stateless Prefix Length3 Stateless prefix length 3 XXX
Stateless Address4 Stateless address 4 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Stateless Prefix Length4 Stateless prefix length 4 XXX
Default Gateway1 Default gateway 1 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Default Gateway2 Default gateway 2 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Default Gateway3 Default gateway 3 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Default Gateway4 Default gateway 4 XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
IPsec IPsec setting Active
Security Protocol Security method ESP/ESP & AH/AH
Wireless Direct Wireless direct Enable/Disable
MAC Address MAC address XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
151
Connection Connection status Active/Inactive
SSID SSID Wireless Direct SSID
Password Password Wireless Direct password (10 alphanumeric
characters)
Channel Channel 3
Encryption Encryption method AES
Authentication Authentication method WPA2-PSK
TCP/IPv4 TCP/IPv4 Enable
IP Address IP address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Subnet Mask Subnet mask XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Default Gateway Default gateway XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
TCP/IPv6 TCP/IPv6 Enable/Disable
Link Local Address Link local address XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
Link Local Prefix Length Link local prefix length XXX
IPsec IPsec setting Active
Security Protocol Security method –
Other Settings Other settings –
Printer Name Printer name Printer name (Up to 15 alphanumeric charac-
ters)
Wireless Direct DevName Device name for wireless direct
(Up to 32 characters)
Device name for wireless direct
WSD Printing WSD printing setting Enable/Disable
WSD Timeout Timeout 1/5/10/15/20 [min]
LPD Printing LPD printing setting Enable/Disable
RAW Printing RAW printing setting Enable/Disable
Bonjour Bonjour setting Enable/Disable
Bonjour Service Name Bonjour service name Bonjour service name (Up to 52 alphanumeric
characters)
LLMNR LLMNR setting Enable/Disable
SNMP SNMP setting Enable/Disable
152
DNS Server Obtain DNS server address auto-
matically
Auto/Manual
Primary Server Primary server address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Secondary Server Secondary server address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Proxy Server Proxy server setting Enable/Disable
Proxy Address Proxy address XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Proxy Port Proxy port specification 1 to 65535
Cert. Fingerprt(SHA-1) Certificate fingerprint (SHA-1) XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
Cert. Fingerprt(SHA-256) Certificate fingerprint (SHA-256) XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.)
153
Changing Wireless LAN Connection Method
Follow either procedure below to change wireless LAN connection method (infrastructure or wireless direct).
•For Windows:
◦ Use the Setup CD-ROM or follow the instructions on the Canon website to redo setup.
◦ Perform settings on the Network Settings screen on IJ Network Device Setup Utility.
Important
• Before you perform settings using IJ Network Device Setup Utility, turn on Easy wireless
connect mode on the printer following the procedure below.
1. Make sure printer is turned on.
2. Press Setup button.
The Setup menu screen appears.
3. Select Wireless LAN setup and press OK button.
4. Select Easy WL connect and press OK button.
Follow instructions on your smartphone or tablet.
5. If message saying setup is completed appears, press OK button.
•For Mac OS:
Follow the instructions on the Canon website to redo setup.
154
Transporting Your Printer
When relocating the printer for changing your living place or repairing it, make sure of the following.
Important
• You cannot take ink out of ink tanks.
• Check if the tank cap is completely inserted. If the ink tank cover is not completely closed, insert the
tank cap properly.
• Do not tilt the printer. Ink may leak.
• Please handle with care and ensure the box remains flat and NOT turned upside down or on its side, as
the printer may be damaged and ink in the printer may leak.
• Pack the printer in a sturdy box so that it is placed with its bottom facing down, using sufficient
protective material to ensure safe transport.
• With the cartridge left installed in the printer, press the ON button to turn off the power. This allows the
printer to automatically cap the print head, thus preventing it from drying.
• Do not remove the cartridge. Ink may leak.
• When transporting the printer, pack the printer in a plastic bag so that ink does not leak.
• When a shipping agent is handling transport of the printer, have its box marked "THIS SIDE UP" to
keep the printer with its bottom facing down. Mark also with "FRAGILE" or "HANDLE WITH CARE".
1. Make sure that the power is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button, use the button to select Maintenance, and press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
3. Use the button to select Lock transport pump and then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select ON and then press the OK button.
5. Confirm that the ON lamp is off and unplug the power cord.
156
Important
• Do not unplug the printer while the ON lamp is lit or flashing, as it may cause malfunction or
damage to the printer, making the printer unable to print.
• If the power cord is unplugged, the date/time settings will be reset and all documents stored in the
printer's memory will be lost. Send or print a necessary document before unplugging the power
cord.
6. Retract the paper output tray and the output tray extension, then close the paper support
and the document tray.
7. Unplug the printer cable from the computer and from the printer, then unplug the power
cord from the printer.
8. Use adhesive tape to secure all the covers on the printer to keep them from opening during
transportation. Then pack the printer in the plastic bag.
9. Attach the protective material to the printer when packing the printer in the box.
157
Legal Restrictions on Scanning/Copying
Scanning, printing, copying, or modifying copies of the following may be punishable under law.
This list is non-exhaustive. When in doubt, check with a local legal representative.
• Paper money
• Money orders
• Certificates of deposit
• Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Identification badges or insignia
• Selective service or draft papers
• Checks or drafts issued by governmental agencies
• Motor vehicle licenses and certificates of title
• Traveler's checks
• Food stamps
• Passports
• Immigration papers
• Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
• Stock certificates
• Copyrighted works or works of art, without the owner's consent
158
Specifications
General Specifications
Printing resolution (dpi) 4800* (horizontal) x 1200 (vertical)
* Ink droplets can be placed with a pitch of 1/4800 inch at minimum.
Interface USB Port:
Hi-Speed USB *1
LAN Port:
Wireless LAN *2: IEEE802.11n *3 / IEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11b
*1 A computer that complies with Hi-Speed USB standard is required. Since
the Hi-Speed USB interface is fully upwardly compatible with USB 1.1, it can
be used at USB 1.1.
*2 Setup possible through Standard setup, WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), WCN
(Windows Connect Now) or Easy wireless connect.
*3 The 2.4 GHz frequency band is utilized.
USB and LAN can be used at the same time.
Print width 8 inches/203.2 mm
(for Borderless Printing: 8.5 inches/216 mm)
Printable area Borderless printing: Top/Bottom/Left/Right margin: 0.00 inch (0.0 mm)
Standard printing:
-Top margin: 0.12 inch (3.0 mm)
-Bottom margin: 0.20 inch (5.0 mm)
-Left margin:
• Letter/Legal: 0.26 inch (6.4 mm)
• Other sizes: 0.14 inch (3.4 mm)
-Right margin:
• Letter/Legal: 0.25 inch (6.3 mm)
• Other sizes: 0.14 inch (3.4 mm)
Operating environment Temperature: 41 to 95 °F (5 to 35 °C)
Humidity: 10 to 90 % RH (no condensation)
* The performance of the printer may be reduced under certain temperature
and humidity conditions.
Recommended conditions:
Temperature: 59 to 86 °F (15 to 30 °C)
Humidity: 10 to 80 % RH (no condensation)
* For the temperature and humidity conditions of papers such as photo paper,
refer to the paper's packaging or the supplied instructions.
Storage environment Temperature: 32 to 104 °F (0 to 40 °C)
Humidity: 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation)
159
Power supply AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption Printing (Copy): Approx. 13 W
Standby (minimum): Approx. 1.1 W *1*2
OFF: Approx. 0.3 W *1
*1 USB connection to PC
*2 The wait time for standby cannot be changed.
External dimensions Approx. 17.6 (W) x 13 (D) x 7.8 (H) inches
Approx. 445 (W) x 330 (D) x 197 (H) mm
* With the Paper Output Tray retracted.
Weight Approx. 15.8 lb (Approx. 7.2 kg)
* With the Print Head and ink tanks installed.
Print Head/Ink Total 1472 nozzles (BK 320 nozzles, C/M/Y each 384 nozzles)
ADF capacity A4 or Letter size: max. 20 sheets (20 lb/75 g /m2 paper), up to 0.08 inch/2 mm
in height
Legal size: max. 5 sheets (20 lb/75 g /m2 paper), up to 0.02 inch/0.5 mm in
height
Copy Specifications
Multiple copy max. 99 pages
Intensity adjustment 9 positions, Auto intensity (AE copy)
Reduction / Enlargement 25 % - 400 % (1 % unit)
Scan Specifications
Scanner driver Windows: TWAIN 1.9 Specification, WIA
Mac OS: ICA
Maximum scanning size Platen Glass: A4/Letter, 8.5" x 11.7"/216 x 297 mm
ADF: A4/Letter/Legal, 8.5" x 14.0"/216 x 356 mm
Scanning resolution Optical resolution (horizontal x vertical) max: 600 x 1200 dpi *1
Interpolated resolution max: 19200 x 19200 dpi *2
*1 Optical Resolution represents the maximum sampling rate based on ISO
14473.
*2 Increasing the scanning resolution will limit the maximum possible scanning
area.
Gradation (Input / Output) Gray: 16 bit/8 bit
Color: 48 bit/24 bit (RGB each 16 bit/8 bit)
160
Fax Specifications
Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Communication mode Super G3, G3
Data compressing system Black: MH, MR, MMR
Color: JPEG
Modem speed max. 33.6 kbps
(Automatic fallback)
Transmission speed Black: Approx. 3 seconds/page at 33.6 kbps
(Based on ITU-T No.1 chart for US specifications and Canon FAX Standard
chart No.1 for others, both in standard mode.)
Color: Approx. 1 minute/page at 33.6 kbps
(Based on Canon COLOR FAX TEST SHEET.)
Gradation Black: 256 levels
Color: 24 bit Full Color (RGB each 8 bit)
Density adjustment 3 levels
Memory Transmission/reception: approx. 50 pages
(Based on ITU-T No.1 chart for US specifications and Canon FAX Standard
chart No.1 for others, both in standard mode.)
Fax resolution Black Standard: 203 pels/inch x 98 lines/inch (8 pels/mm x 3.85 lines/mm)
Black Fine, Photo: 203 pels/inch x 196 lines/inch (8 pels/mm x 7.70 lines/mm)
Black Extra fine: 300 x 300 dpi
Color: 200 x 200 dpi
Dialing Automatic dialing
- Recipient (max. 20 destinations)
- Group dial (max. 19 destinations)
Regular dialing (with Numeric buttons)
Automatic redialing
Manual redialing (max. 10 destinations)
Others Activity report (after every 20 transactions)
Sequential broadcasting (max. 21 destinations)
Rejected numbers (max. 10 destinations)
Network Specifications
Communication protocol TCP/IP
Wireless LAN Supported Standards: IEEE802.11n / IEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11b
Frequency bandwidth: 2.4 GHz
161
Channel: 1-11 or 1-13
* Frequency bandwidth and available channels differ depending on country or
region.
Communication distance: Indoors 164 feet/50 m
* Effective range varies depending on the installation environment and location.
Security:
WEP (64/128 bits)
WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)
Setup:
WPS (Push button configuration/PIN code method)
WCN (WCN-NET)
Easy wireless connect
Other Features: Administration password
Minimum System Requirements
Conform to the operating system's requirements when higher than those given here.
Windows
Operating System Windows 10, Windows 8.1*, Windows 8
Windows 7 SP1
Windows Vista SP2
* Windows 8.1 includes Windows 8.1 Update.
Hard Disk Space 3.1 GB
Note: For bundled software installation.
The necessary amount of hard disk space may be changed without notice.
Display XGA 1024 x 768
Mac OS
Operating System OS X v10.8.5 - OS X v10.11
Hard Disk Space 1.5 GB
Note: For bundled software installation.
The necessary amount of hard disk space may be changed without notice.
Display XGA 1024 x 768
162
Other Supported OS
Some functions may not be available with each OS. Refer to the Canon web site for details on operation with iOS,
Android, Windows RT, and Windows 10 Mobile.
Mobile Printing Capability
Apple AirPrint
Google Cloud Print
PIXMA Cloud Link
• An internet connection is required to use Easy-WebPrint EX and all the Online Manual.
• Windows: Operation can only be guaranteed on a PC with pre-installed Windows Vista or later.
• Windows: A CD-ROM Drive or internet connection is required during software installation.
• Windows: Internet Explorer 8, 9, 10 or 11 is required to install Easy-WebPrint EX.
• Windows: Some functions may not be available with Windows Media Center.
• Windows: .NET Framework 4.5.2 or 4.6 must be installed to use the Windows software.
• Windows: The TWAIN driver (ScanGear) is based on the TWAIN 1.9 Specification and requires the
Data Source Manager bundled with the operating system.
• Mac OS: For Mac OS, an internet connection is required during software installation.
• In an in-house network environment, the 5222 port must be opened. Contact the network
administrator for details.
Information in this guide is subject to change without notice.
163
Supported Media Types
For best results, choose paper designed for how you are printing. A variety of paper for documents as well
as photos or illustrations is available from Canon. Use genuine Canon paper to print important photos, when
possible.
Media Types
Genuine Canon paper
Note
• For warnings on use of the non-printable side, see each product's usage information.
• For details on page sizes and media types, access the Canon website.
• Genuine Canon paper is not available in some countries or regions. Note that in the United States,
Canon paper is not sold by model number. Instead, purchase paper by name.
Paper for printing documents:
• Canon Red Label Superior <WOP111>
• Canon Océ Office Colour Paper <SAT213>
• High Resolution Paper <HR-101N>*1
Paper for printing photos:
• Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" <GP-501>
• Photo Paper Glossy <GP-701>
• Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201>
• Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-301>
• Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101>
• Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201>
• Matte Photo Paper <MP-101>
Paper other than genuine Canon paper
• Plain Paper (including recycled paper)
• Envelopes*1
*1 Printing to this paper from the operation panel is not supported.
Paper Load Limit
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Windows)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Mac OS)
Page Sizes
You can use the following page sizes.
Note
• Page sizes and media types the printer supports differ depending on the OS you are using.
165
Standard sizes:
• Letter
• Legal
• A4
• B5
• A5
• L(89x127mm)
• KG/4"x6"(10x15)
• 2L/5"x7"(13x18)
• Hagaki
• Hagaki 2
• 8"x10"(20x25cm)
• Square 5"x5" 127x127mm
• Envelope Com 10
• Envelope DL
• Nagagata 3
• Nagagata 4
• Yougata 4
• Yougata 6
Special sizes
Special page sizes must be within the following limits:
• Minimum size: 2.17 x 3.51 inches (55.0 x 89.0 mm)
• Maximum size: 8.50 x 26.61 inches (215.9 x 676.0 mm)
Paper Weight
You can use paper in the following weight range.
• 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g /m2) (plain paper other than genuine Canon paper)
166
Paper Load Limit
Genuine Canon Paper
Paper for printing documents:
Media Name <Model No.> Rear Tray Paper Output
Tray
Canon Red Label Superior <WOP111> Approx. 100 sheets Approx. 50 sheets
Canon Océ Office Colour Paper <SAT213> Approx. 80 sheets Approx. 50 sheets
High Resolution Paper <HR-101N>*1 Approx. 80 sheets Approx. 50 sheets
Paper for printing photos:
Media Name <Model No.> Rear Tray
Pa-
per
Out-
put
Tray
Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" <GP-501>*2 A4, Letter: 10 sheets
4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm): 20 sheets
*3
Photo Paper Glossy <GP-701>*2 A4, Letter: 10 sheets
4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm): 20 sheets
*3
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201>*2 A4, Letter, 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm), 8" x 10" (20 x 25
cm): 10 sheets
4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm), Square 5" x 5" (127 x 127
mm): 20 sheets
*3
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-301>*2 A4, Letter, 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm), 8" x 10" (20 x 25
cm): 10 sheets
4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm), Square 5" x 5" (127 x 127
mm): 20 sheets
*3
Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101>*2 A4, Letter: 10 sheets *3
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201>*2 A4, Letter, 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm), 8" x 10" (20 x 25
cm): 10 sheets
4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm): 20 sheets
*3
Matte Photo Paper <MP-101> A4, Letter: 10 sheets
4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm): 20 sheets
*3
Paper other than Genuine Canon Paper
Common Name Rear Tray Paper Output
Tray
167
Plain Paper (including recycled paper)*1 Approx. 100 sheets (10 sheets: Legal) Approx. 50
sheets (10
sheets: Legal)
Envelopes 10 envelopes *3
*1 Normal feeding at maximum capacity may not be possible with some types of paper, or under very high
or low temperature or humidity. In this case, load half the amount of paper or less.
*2 Feeding from a loaded stack of paper may leave marks on the printed side or prevent efficient feeding.
In this case, load one sheet at a time.
*3 For best results in continuous printing, remove printed paper or envelopes from the paper output tray to
avoid smearing or discoloration.
168
Unsupported Media Types
Do not use the following types of paper. Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results, but also
the printer to jam or malfunction.
• Folded, curled, or wrinkled paper
• Damp paper
• Paper that is too thin (weighing less than 17 lb (64 g /m2))
• Paper that is too thick (plain paper weighing more than 28 lb (105 g /m2), except for Canon genuine
paper)
• Paper thinner than a postcard, including plain paper or notepad paper cut to a small size (when printing
on paper smaller than A5)
• Picture postcards
• Postcards
• Envelopes with a double flap
• Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface
• Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive
• Any type of paper with holes
• Paper that is not rectangular
• Paper bound with staples or glue
• Paper with an adhesive surface on the back such as label seal
• Paper decorated with glitter, etc.
169
Handling Paper
• Be careful not to rub or scratch the surfaces of any types of paper when handling.
• Hold the paper as closely as possible to its edges and try not to touch the printing surface. The print
quality may be degraded if the printing surface is smudged with sweat or oil that comes from your
hands.
• Do not touch the printed surface until the ink is dried. Even when the ink is dried, be careful not to touch
the printed surface as much as possible when handling. Due to the nature of the pigment ink, the ink on
the printed surface may be removed when being rubbed or scratched.
• Take out only the necessary number of paper from the package, just before printing.
• To avoid curling, when you do not print, put unused paper back into the package and keep it on a level
surface. And also, store it avoiding heat, humidity, and direct sunlight.
170
Basic Printing Setup
This section describes settings on the Quick Setup tab used for basic printing.
Basic Printing Setup
1. Check that printer power is on
2. Load paper in printer
3. Open printer driver's setup screen
4. Select frequently used settings
On the Quick Setup tab, use Commonly Used Settings to select from predefined print settings.
When you select a print setting, the settings for Additional Features, Media Type, and Printer Paper
Size automatically switch to the predefined values.
5. Select print quality
For Print Quality, select from High, Standard, or Draft.
173
Important
• The print quality selections will differ depending on which print setting you select.
6. Click OK
The printer will now print using these settings.
Important
• When you select Always Print with Current Settings, the settings on the Quick Setup, Main, and
Page Setup tabs are saved, and those settings are used in subsequent printings.
• To register the current settings as a new preset, click Save... under Commonly Used Settings.
174
Note
• If the paper settings in the printer driver differ from the paper information registered on the printer, an
error may occur. For instructions on what to do if an error occurs, see "Paper Settings."
To check the current printer settings or to apply the printer settings to the printer driver, display the
Quick Setup tab, click Printer Media Information..., and specify the settings in the dialog box that
appears.
For details about the paper information to be registered on the printer, see the following:
•Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
•Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
Checking Printer Settings and Applying Settings to Printer Driver
1. Open printer driver setup window
2. On Quick Setup tab, click Printer Media Information...
The Printer Media Information dialog box appears.
3. Select Paper Source
From Paper Source, check the setting or select a new paper source.
The current printer settings appear in Media Type and Page Size.
4. Apply settings
To apply the printer settings to the printer driver, click Set.
Note
•If the media type on the printer is set to Hagaki, Ink Jet Hagaki, or Hagaki K, or if the output
paper size on the printer is set to 2L/5"x7"(13x18), click Set to display the dialog box.
Select the media type and paper size that match your purpose, and then click OK.
• If the media type and the output paper size are not set on the printer, Set will be grayed out and
cannot be clicked.
• If communication with the printer is disabled, the Printer Media Information... dialog box will
not appear or the printer driver will not be able to obtain printer media information.
175
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
When you use this printer, selecting a media type and paper size that matches the print purpose will help
you achieve the best print results.
You can use the following media types on this printer.
Canon genuine papers (Document Printing)
Media name <Model No.> Media Type in the printer
driver
Paper information registered on
the printer
Canon Red Label Superior <WOP111> Plain Paper Plain paper
Canon Océ Office Colour Paper <SAT213> Plain Paper Plain paper
Canon genuine papers (Photo Printing)
Media name <Model No.> Media Type in the printer driver Paper information registered
on the printer
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201/PP-301> Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PlusGlossyII
Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101> Photo Paper Pro Luster Pro Luster
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201> Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss Semi-gloss
Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" <GP-501> Glossy Photo Paper Glossy
Photo Paper Glossy <GP-701> Glossy Photo Paper Glossy
Matte Photo Paper <MP-101> Matte Photo Paper Matte
Canon genuine papers (Business Letter Printing)
Media name <Model No.> Media Type in the printer driver Paper information registered on the
printer
High Resolution Paper <HR-101/
HR-101N> High Resolution Paper High Res
Commercially available papers
Media name Media Type in the printer driver Paper information registered on the
printer
Plain Paper (including recycled paper) Plain Paper Plain paper
Envelopes Envelope Envelope
Other Photo Paper Other Photo Paper Other Photo
176
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
When you use this printer, selecting a paper size that matches the print purpose will help you achieve the
best print results.
You can use the following paper sizes on this printer.
Printer Paper Size in the printer driver Paper information registered on the printer
Letter 8.5"x11" 22x28cm Letter
Legal 8.5"x14" 22x36cm Legal
A5 A5
A4 A4
B5 B5
4"x6" 10x15cm KG/4"x6"
5"x7" 13x18cm 2L/5"x7"
8"x10" 20x25cm 8"x10"
L 89x127mm L
2L 127x178mm 2L/5"x7"
Square 5"x5" 13x13cm Square 5"
Hagaki 100x148mm Hagaki
Hagaki 2 200x148mm Hagaki 2
Envelope Com 10 Env. Com 10
Envelope DL Envelope DL
Nagagata 3 4.72"x9.25" Nagagata 3
Nagagata 4 3.54"x8.07" Nagagata 4
Yougata 4 4.13"x9.25" Yougata 4
Yougata 6 3.86"x7.48" Yougata 6
Custom Size Others
177
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application software. When the page size
and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the
application software, you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab.
When you are not able to specify them with the application software, the procedure for selecting a page size
and orientation is as follows:
You can also set page size and orientation on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the paper size
Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Set Orientation
Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation. Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to
perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees.
4. Click OK
When you execute print, the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation.
Note
• If Normal-size is selected for Page Layout, then Automatically reduce large document that the
printer cannot output is displayed.
Normally, you can leave the check box checked. During printing, if you do not want to reduce large
documents that cannot be printed on the printer, uncheck the check box.
179
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows:
You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Specify the number of copies to be printed
For Copies on the Page Setup tab, specify the number of copies to be printed.
3. Specify the print order
Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order, and
uncheck the check box when you want to print from the first page.
Check the Collate check box when you are printing multiple copies of a document and want to print out
all pages in each copy together. Uncheck this check box when you want to print all pages with the same
page number together.
•Print from Last Page: /Collate:
•Print from Last Page: /Collate:
180
•Print from Last Page: /Collate:
•Print from Last Page: /Collate:
4. Click OK
When you execute print, the specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order.
Important
• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, specify the
settings on the printer driver. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function
settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with
both the application software and this printer driver, the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of
the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.
•Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Tiling/Poster is selected for Page
Layout.
• When Booklet is selected for Page Layout, Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and
cannot be set.
• When Duplex Printing (Manual) is selected, Print from Last Page appears grayed out and cannot be
set.
Note
• By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate, you can perform printing so that papers are collated
one by one starting from the last page.
These settings can be used in combination with Normal-size, Borderless, Fit-to-Page, Scaled, and
Page Layout.
181
Execute Borderless Printing
The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it
extends slightly off the paper. In standard printing, margins are created around the document area. However,
in borderless printing function, these margins are not created. When you want to print data such as a photo
without providing any margin around it, set borderless printing.
The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows:
You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
Setting Borderless Printing
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set borderless printing
Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
When a message prompting you to change the media type appears, select a media type from the list
and click OK.
182
3. Check the paper size
Check the Page Size list. When you want to change it, select another page size from the list. The list
displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing.
4. Adjust the amount of extension from the paper
If necessary, adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider.
Moving the slider to the right increases the amount extending off the paper, and moving the slider to
the left decreases the amount.
It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases.
Important
•When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the rightmost position, the back side of the
paper may become smudged.
5. Click OK
When you execute print, the data is printed without any margins on the paper.
Important
• When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected, the size is automatically
changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing.
• When Borderless is selected, the Printer Paper Size, Duplex Printing (Manual), Stapling Side
settings, and the Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out
and are unavailable.
• When Envelope or High Resolution Paper is selected from the Media Type list on the Main tab,
you cannot perform borderless printing.
• Depending on the type of the media used during borderless printing, the print quality may deteriorate
at the top and bottom of the sheet or stains may form.
• When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data, a portion of the image may not
be printed depending on the size of the media used.
In this case, crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size.
Note
• When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab, borderless printing is not
recommended. Therefore, the message for media selection appears.
When you are using plain paper for test printing, select Plain Paper, and click OK.
Expanding the Range of the Document to Print
Setting a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems. However,
the portion of the document extending off the paper range will not be printed and for this reason, the
subjects around the perimeter of a photo may not be printed.
183
When you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing, reduce the amount of extension. The
extension amount decreases as the Amount of Extension slider is moved to the left.
Important
• When the amount of extension is decreased, an unexpected margin may be produced on the print,
depending on the size of the paper.
Note
• When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position, image data will be printed in the
full size. If you set this when printing the address side of a postcard, the postal code of the sender is
printed in the correct position.
• When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab, you can confirm whether there will be no
margin before printing.
184
Scaled Printing
The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set scaled printing
Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the paper size of the document
Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application software.
4. Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods:
•Select a Printer Paper Size
When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced. When
the printer paper size is larger than the Page Size, the page image will be enlarged.
185
•Specify a scaling factor
Directly type in a value into the Scaling box.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
5. Click OK
When you execute print, the document will be printed with the specified scale.
Important
• When the application software which you used to create the original has the scaled printing function,
configure the settings on your application software. You do not need to configure the same setting in the
printer driver.
186
Note
• Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document.
187
Page Layout Printing
The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper.
The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set page layout printing
Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list.
4. Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box, and
click OK.
188
Page Layout
To change the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper, select the number of pages
from the list.
Page Order
To change the page arrangement order, select a placement method from the list.
Page Border
To print a page border around each document page, check this check box.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the
specified order.
189
Tiling/Poster Printing
The tiling/poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data, divide it into several pages, and print
these pages on separate sheets of paper. You can also paste the pages together to create a large print like
a poster.
The procedure for performing tiling/poster printing is as follows:
Setting Tiling/Poster Printing
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set tiling/poster printing
Select Tiling/Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list.
190
4. Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box,
and then click OK.
Image Divisions
Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal).
As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases. If you are
pasting pages together to create a poster, increasing the number of divisions allows you to create
a larger poster.
Print "Cut/Paste" in margins
To leave out words "Cut" and "Paste", uncheck this check box.
Note
• This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are
used.
Print "Cut/Paste" lines in margins
To leave out cut lines, uncheck this check box.
Print page range
Specifies the printing range. Select All under normal circumstances.
To reprint only a specific page, select Pages and enter the page number you want to print. To
specify multiple pages, enter the page numbers by separating them with commas or by entering a
hyphen between the page numbers.
Note
• You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document will be divided into several pages during printing.
Printing Only Specific Pages
If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing, you can reprint only the specific pages by following the
procedure below:
1. Set the print range
191
In the settings preview on the left of the Page Setup tab, click the pages that do not need to be
printed.
The pages that were clicked are deleted, and only the pages to be printed are displayed.
Note
• Click the deleted pages to display them again.
• Right-click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages.
2. Complete the setup
After completing the page selection, click OK.
When you execute print, only specified pages will be printed.
Important
• Since tiling/poster printing enlarges the document when printing it, the print results may become coarse.
192
Duplex Printing
The procedure for printing data on both sides of one sheet of paper is as follows:
You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set duplex printing
Check the Duplex Printing (Manual) check box on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the layout
Select Normal-size, Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout from the Page Layout list.
4. Specify the side to be stapled
The best Stapling Side is selected automatically from the Orientation and Page Layout settings. To
change the setting, select another stapling side from the list.
5. Set the margin width
If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK.
193
6. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document is first printed on one side of a sheet of paper. After one side is
printed, reload the paper correctly according to the message.
Then click Start Printing to print the opposite side.
Important
• When a media type other than Plain Paper is selected from Media Type on the Main tab, Duplex
Printing (Manual) appears grayed out and is unavailable.
• When Borderless, Tiling/Poster or Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list, Duplex Printing
(Manual) and Stapling Side appear grayed out and are unavailable.
Note
• If the back side of the paper becomes smudged during duplex printing, perform Bottom Plate Cleaning
in the Maintenance tab.
Related Topics
Cleaning Inside the Printer
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
194
Setting Up Envelope Printing
The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows:
1. Load envelope on the printer
2. Open the printer driver setup window
3. Select the media type
Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
4. Select the paper size
When the Envelope Size Setting dialog box is displayed, select Envelope Com 10, Envelope DL,
Yougata 4 4.13"x9.25", or Yougata 6 3.86"x7.48", and then click OK.
5. Set the orientation
To print the addressee horizontally, select Landscape for Orientation.
Note
•If Yougata 4 4.13"x9.25", Yougata 6 3.86"x7.48", Envelope Com 10, or Envelope DL is
selected for Printer Paper Size, the printer rotates the paper 90 degrees to the left to print,
regardless of the Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape] setting for Custom
Settings on the Maintenance tab.
195
6. Select the print quality
Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
7. Click OK
When you execute print, the information is printed on the envelope.
Important
• When you execute envelope printing, guide messages are displayed.
To hide the guide messages, check the Do not show this message again check box.
To show the guide again, click the View Printer Status button on the Maintenance tab, and start the
Canon IJ Status Monitor.
Then click Envelope Printing from Display Guide Message of the Option menu to enable the setting.
Note
• If the paper settings in the printer driver differ from the paper information registered on the printer, an
error may occur. For instructions on what to do if an error occurs, see "Paper Settings."
To check the current printer settings or to apply the printer settings to the printer driver, click Printer
Media Information... from the Quick Setup tab, and specify the settings in the dialog box that appears.
For details about the paper information to be registered on the printer, see the following:
•Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
•Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
196
Printing on Postcards
This section describes the procedure for postcard printing.
1. Load postcard on the printer
2. Open the printer driver setup window
3. Select commonly used settings
Display the Quick Setup tab, and for Commonly Used Settings, select Standard.
4. Select the media type
For Media Type, select Ink Jet Hagaki (A), Ink Jet Hagaki, Hagaki K (A), Hagaki K, Hagaki (A), or
Hagaki.
Important
• This printer cannot print on postcards that have photos or stickers attached.
• When printing on each side of a postcard separately, you will get cleaner printing if you print the
message side first and then print the address side.
• The paper settings on the printer driver are different, depending on whether you are printing on
the address side or the message side.
To check the current printer settings or to apply the printer settings to the printer driver, click
Printer Media Information... from the Quick Setup tab, and specify the settings in the dialog box
that appears.
For details about the paper information to be registered to the printer driver and on the printer, see
the following:
•Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
•Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
5. Select the paper size
For Printer Paper Size, select Hagaki 100x148mm or Hagaki 2 200x148mm.
Important
•Return postcards can be used only when you print them from the computer.
•When printing a return postcard, always set the paper size to Hagaki 2 200x148mm from your
application software or the printer driver.
•Do not fold the return postcard. If a crease is formed, the printer will not be able to feed the
postcard properly, and this condition will cause line shifts or a paper jam.
•With return postcards, borderless printing cannot be used.
6. Set the print orientation
To print the address horizontally, set Orientation to Landscape.
7. Select the print quality
197
For Print Quality, select High or Standard, according to your purpose.
8. Click OK
When you execute printing, the data will be printed onto the postcard.
Important
• When you execute postcard printing, a guide message is displayed.
When the guide message is displayed, select Do not show this message again if you do not want any
guide messages to be displayed.
To display guide messages again, open the Maintenance tab and click View Printer Status to start the
Canon IJ Status Monitor.
On the Option menu, choose Display Guide Message and click Hagaki Printing to enable the setting.
• When printing on media other than postcards, load the media according to usage method of that media,
and click Start Printing.
198
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
The print quality level can be set in the Custom.
The procedure for setting the print quality level is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the print quality
On the Main tab, select Custom for Print Quality, and click Set....
The Custom dialog box opens.
3. Setting the print quality level
Drag the slider bar to select the print quality level and click OK.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the image data is printed with the selected print quality level.
Important
• Certain print quality levels cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type.
199
Related Topics
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
200
Canon IJ Printer Driver
The Canon IJ printer driver (simply called printer driver below) is software that you install onto your
computer so that it can communicate with the printer.
The printer driver converts the print data created by your application software into data that your printer can
understand, and sends the converted data to the printer.
Because different printers support different data formats, you need a printer driver that supports your printer.
Printer Driver Types
If your computer is running Windows Vista SP1 or a later version, you can install the XPS printer driver in
addition to the normal printer driver.
The XPS printer driver is suited to printing from application software that supports XPS printing.
Important
• Note that if you want to use the XPS printer driver, the normal printer driver must also be installed.
Installing the Printer Driver
• To install the normal printer driver, install the driver from Start Setup Again on the setup CD-ROM
that came with your printer.
• To install the XPS printer driver, load the setup CD-ROM that comes with the printer, and then select
XPS Driver from Add Software.
Specifying the Printer Driver
To specify the printer driver, open the Print dialog box of the application software you are using, and
select "Canon XXX" (where "XXX" is your model name) to specify the regular printer driver or select
"Canon XXX XPS" (where "XXX" is your model name) to specify the XPS printer driver.
Displaying the Manual from the Printer Driver
To display the description of a setup tab from the printer driver's setup screen, click Help on that tab.
Related Topic
Opening Printer Driver's Setup Screen
202
Opening Printer Driver's Setup Screen
You can display the printer driver's setup screen from your application software or by clicking the printer
icon.
Displaying the Printer Driver's Setup Screen from Your Application
Software
Perform this procedure to set up the print settings during printing.
1. Select print command from application software
The Print command can generally be found in the File menu.
2. Select your printer model, and click Preferences (or Properties)
The printer driver's setup screen appears.
Note
• Depending on the application software you are using, the command and menu names, and the
number of steps may vary. For details, refer to the operating instructions of your application
software.
Displaying the Printer Driver's Setup Screen by Clicking the Printer Icon
From the setup screen you can perform printer maintenance operations such as print head cleaning, or
set print settings to be shared by all application software.
1. To open the setup screen:
• If you are using Windows 10, Windows 8.1, or Windows 8, select Control Panel -> Hardware
and Sound -> Devices and Printers.
• If you are using Windows 7, from the Start menu, select Devices and Printers.
• If you are using Windows Vista, select the Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Printers.
2. Right-click the icon of your model. When the menu appears, select Printing preferences
The printer driver's setup screen appears.
Important
•Opening the printer driver setup window through Printer properties (Windows 10, Windows
8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7) or Properties (Windows Vista) displays such tabs regarding the
Windows functions as the Ports (or Advanced) tab. Those tabs do not appear when opening
through Printing preferences or application software. For tabs regarding Windows functions,
refer to the user's manual for the Windows.
203
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the
printer driver.
Restrictions on the Printer Driver
• With some applications, the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be
enabled.
In this case, use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software.
• If the selected Language in the About dialog box of the Maintenance tab does not match the
operating system interface language, the printer driver setup window may not be displayed properly.
• Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties. If you change any of the items, you
will not be able to use the following functions correctly.
Also, if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications
that prohibit EMF spooling, such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor, the following
functions will not operate.
◦Preview before printing on the Main tab
◦Prevention of Print Data Loss in the Print Options dialog box on the Page Setup tab
◦Page Layout, Tiling/Poster, Booklet, Duplex Printing (Manual), Specify Margin..., Print from
Last Page, Collate, and Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) on the Page Setup tab
◦Print a pattern for color adjustment on the Color Adjustment tab in the Manual Color
Adjustment dialog box
• Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution, text and lines in the
preview display may appear different from the actual print result.
• With some applications, the printing is divided into multiple print jobs.
To cancel printing, delete all divided print jobs.
• If image data is not printed correctly, display the Print Options dialog box from the Page Setup tab
and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software. This may solve the
problem.
Note
•Disable ICM required from the application software cannot be used when the XPS printer
driver is used.
Points to Note About Applications with Restrictions
• There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word (Microsoft Corporation).
◦ When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver, use Word to specify
them.
◦ When Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout is used for Page Layout on the Page Setup tab of
the printer driver, the document may not print normally in certain versions of Word.
◦ When Page Size in Word is set to "XXX Enlarge/Reduce", the document may not print normally in
certain versions of Word.
If this happens, follow the procedure below.
1. Open Word's Print dialog box.
2. Open the printer driver setup window, and on the Page Setup tab, set Page Size to the same
paper size that you specified in Word.
204
3. Set the Page Layout that you want, and then click OK to close the window.
4. Without starting printing, close the Print dialog box.
5. Open Word's Print dialog box again.
6. Open the printer driver setup window and click OK.
7. Start printing.
• If bitmap printing is enabled in Adobe Illustrator (Adobe Systems Incorporated), printing may take time
or some data may not be printed. Print after unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print
dialog box.
205
Quick Setup tab Description
The Quick Setup tab is for registering commonly used print settings. When you select a registered setting,
the printer automatically switches to the preset items.
Commonly Used Settings
The names and icons of frequently used printing profiles are registered. When you select a printing
profile according to the purpose of the document, settings that match the purpose are applied.
In addition, functions that are thought to be useful for the selected printing profile are displayed in
Additional Features.
You can also change a printing profile and register it under a new name. You can delete the registered
printing profile.
You can rearrange the profiles either by dragging the individual profiles or by holding down the Ctrl key
and pressing the up or down arrow keys.
Standard
These are the factory settings.
If Page Size, Orientation, and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have
priority.
Photo Printing
If you select this setting when printing a photo, the photo paper and photo size generally used are
set. The Borderless Printing check box is checked automatically.
If Orientation and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have priority.
Business Document
Select this setting when printing a general document.
If Page Size, Orientation, and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have
priority.
Paper Saving
Select this setting to save paper when printing a general document. The 2-on-1 Printing and
Duplex Printing (Manual) check boxes are checked automatically.
207
If Page Size, Orientation, and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have
priority.
Envelope
If you select this setting for printing an envelope, Media Type is set automatically to Envelope. In
the Envelope Size Setting dialog box, select the size of the envelope to be used.
Note
• The combination of the Additional Features that was displayed for the printing profile that had
been selected when the added printing profile was saved is also displayed when that added
printing profile is selected.
Save...
Displays the Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box.
Click this button when you want to save the information that you set on the Quick Setup, Main, and
Page Setup tabs to Commonly Used Settings.
Delete
Deletes a registered printing profile.
Select the name of the setting to be deleted from Commonly Used Settings, and click Delete. When a
confirmation message is displayed, click OK to delete the specified printing profile.
Note
• Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.
Settings Preview
The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper.
You can check an overall image of the layout.
Preview before printing
Shows what the print result will look like before you actually print the data.
Check this check box to display a preview before printing.
Uncheck this check box if you do not want to display a preview.
Important
• To use the Canon IJ XPS Preview, you must have Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5.2 or later
installed on your computer.
Additional Features
Displays the frequently used, convenient functions for the printing profile that you selected for
Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
When you move the mouse pointer near a function that can be changed, a description of that function is
displayed.
To enable a function, check the corresponding check box.
For some functions, you can set detailed settings from the Main and Page Setup tabs.
Important
• Depending on the printing profiles, certain function may be grayed out and you will not be able to
change them.
208
2-on-1 Printing
Prints two pages of the document, side by side, on one sheet of paper.
To change the page sequence, click the Page Setup tab, select Page Layout for Page Layout,
and click Specify.... Then in the Page Layout Printing dialog box that appears, specify the Page
Order.
4-on-1 Printing
Prints four pages of the document, side by side, on one sheet of paper.
To change the page sequence, click the Page Setup tab, select Page Layout for Page Layout,
and click Specify.... Then in the Page Layout Printing dialog box that appears, specify the Page
Order.
Duplex Printing (Manual)
Select whether to print the document to both sides of the paper manually or to one side of the
paper.
To change the staple side or the margins, set the new values from the Page Setup tab.
Borderless Printing
Performs borderless printing without any margins on the paper.
With the borderless printing function, the document to be printed is enlarged, so that it extends
slightly off the paper. In other words, the document is printed without any margin.
To adjust the amount that the document extends beyond the paper, click the Page Setup tab,
choose Borderless, and enter the value in Amount of Extension.
Grayscale Printing
This function converts the data to monochrome data when printing your document.
Draft
This setting is appropriate for test printing.
Rotate 180 degrees
Prints the document by rotating it 180 degrees against the paper feed direction.
The width of print area and the amount of extension that are configured in other application
software will be reversed vertically and horizontally.
Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment
Select when you set the Color Correction method and individual settings such as Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast, etc.
Media Type
Selects a type of printing paper.
Select a media type that matches the paper that is loaded in the printer. This ensures that printing is
carried out properly for the specified paper.
Printer Paper Size
Selects the size of paper actually loaded into the printer.
Normally, the paper size is set automatically according to the output paper size setting, and the
document is printed with no scaling.
When you set 2-on-1 Printing or 4-on-1 Printing in Additional Features, you can manually set the
paper size with Page Size on the Page Setup tab.
If you select a paper size that is smaller than the Page Size, the document size will be reduced. If you
select a paper size that is larger, the document size will be enlarged.
209
Also if you select Custom..., the Custom Paper Size dialog box opens and allows you to specify any
vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.
Orientation
Selects the printing orientation.
If the application used to create your document has a similar function, select the same orientation that
you selected in that application.
Portrait
Prints the document so that its top and bottom positions are unchanged relative to the paper feed
direction. This is the default setting.
Landscape
Prints the document by rotating it 90 degrees relative to the paper feed direction.
You can change the rotation direction by going to the Maintenance tab, opening the Custom
Settings dialog box, and then using Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape]
check box.
To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing, select the Rotate 90 degrees left
when orientation is [Landscape] check box.
Print Quality
Selects your desired printing quality.
Select one of the following to set the print quality level that is appropriate for the purpose.
To set the print quality level individually, click the Main tab, and for Print Quality, select Custom. The
Set... becomes enabled. Click Set... to open the Custom dialog box, and then specify the desired
settings.
High
Gives priority to print quality over printing speed.
Standard
Prints with average speed and quality.
Draft
This setting is appropriate for test printing.
Paper Source
Shows the source from which paper is supplied.
Rear Tray
Paper is always supplied from the rear tray.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies you want to print. You can specify a value from 1 to 999.
Important
• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function,
specify the settings on the printer driver. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the
function settings on the application software.
Always Print with Current Settings
Prints documents with the current settings starting from the next print execution.
When you select this function and then close the printer driver setup window, the information that you
set on the Quick Setup, Main, and Page Setup tabs are saved and printing with the same settings is
possible starting from the next print execution.
210
Important
• If you log on with a different user name, the settings that were set when this function was enabled
are not reflected in the print settings.
• If a setting was specified on the application software, it has priority.
Printer Media Information...
Displays Printer Media Information dialog box.
You can check the printer settings and apply the checked settings to the printer driver.
Defaults
Restores all the settings you have changed to their default values.
Click this button to return all settings on the Quick Setup, Main, and Page Setup tabs to their default
values (factory settings).
Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box
This dialog box allows you to save the information that you set on the Quick Setup, Main, and Page
Setup tabs and add the information to the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab.
Name
Enter the name for the printing profile you wish to save.
Up to 255 characters can be entered.
The name appears, with its associated icon, in the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick
Setup tab.
Options...
Opens the Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box.
Changes the details of printing profile to be saved.
Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box
Select the icons of the printing profiles to be registered to Commonly Used Settings, and change the
items to be saved in the printing profiles.
Icon
Select the icon for the printing profile you wish to save.
The selected icon appears, with its name, in the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick
Setup tab.
Save the paper size setting
Saves the paper size to the printing profile in Commonly Used Settings.
To apply the saved paper size when the printing profile is selected, check this check box.
If this check box is unchecked, the paper size is not saved, and consequently the paper size setting
is not applied when the printing profile is selected. Instead the printer prints with the paper size
specified with the application software.
Save the orientation setting
Saves the Orientation to the printing profile in Commonly Used Settings.
To apply the saved print orientation when the printing profile is selected, check this check box.
If this check box is unchecked, the print orientation is not saved, and consequently the Orientation
211
setting is not applied when the printing profile is selected. Instead the printer prints with the print
orientation specified with the application software.
Save the copies setting
Saves the Copies setting to the printing profile in Commonly Used Settings.
To apply the saved copies setting when the printing profile is selected, check this check box.
If this check box is unchecked, the copies setting is not saved, and consequently the Copies
setting is not applied when the printing profile is selected. Instead the printer prints with the copies
setting specified with the application software.
Custom Paper Size dialog box
This dialog box allows you to specify the size (width and height) of the custom paper.
Units
Select the unit for entering a user-defined paper size.
Paper Size
Specifies the Width and the Height of the custom paper. Measurement is shown according to the
units specified in Units.
Printer Media Information dialog box
This dialog box allows you to check the printer settings and apply the checked settings to the printer
driver.
Paper Source
Check the setting or select a new paper source.
Media Type
Displays the Media Type that is currently set on the printer.
To apply the displayed setting to the printer driver, click Set.
Page Size
Displays the Page Size that is currently set on the printer.
To apply the displayed setting to the printer driver, click Set.
Related Topics
Basic Printing Setup
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Execute Borderless Printing
Duplex Printing
Setting Up Envelope Printing
Printing on Postcards
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
212
Main tab Description
The Main tab allows you to create a basic print setup in accordance with the media type. Unless special
printing is required, normal printing can be performed just by setting the items on this tab.
Settings Preview
The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper.
You can check an overall image of the layout.
Media Type
Selects a type of printing paper.
Select a media type that matches the paper that is loaded in the printer. This ensures that printing is
carried out properly for the specified paper.
Paper Source
Shows the source from which paper is supplied.
Rear Tray
Paper is always supplied from the rear tray.
Print Quality
Selects your desired printing quality.
Select one of the following to set the print quality level that is appropriate for the purpose.
Important
• Depending on the Media Type settings, the same print results may be produced even if the Print
Quality is changed.
High
Gives priority to print quality over printing speed.
Standard
Prints with average speed and quality.
214
Draft
This setting is appropriate for test printing.
Custom
Select this when you want to set the printing quality level individually.
Set...
Select Custom for Print Quality to enable this button.
Open the Custom dialog box. You can then individually set the print quality level.
Color/Intensity
Selects color adjustment method.
Auto
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast, and so on are adjusted
automatically.
Manual
Select when you set the individual settings such as Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness,
Intensity, and Contrast, etc. and Color Correction method.
Set...
Select Manual for Color/Intensity to enable this button.
In the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box, you can adjust individual color settings such as
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast on the Color Adjustment tab, and
select the Color Correction method on the Matching tab.
Note
• If you want to use an ICC profile to adjust colors, use the Manual Color Adjustment dialog
box to set the profile.
Grayscale Printing
This function converts the data to monochrome data when printing your document.
Check this check box to print a color document in monochrome.
Preview before printing
Shows what the print result will look like before you actually print the data.
Check this check box to display a preview before printing.
Important
• To use the Canon IJ XPS Preview, you must have Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5.2 or later
installed on your computer.
Defaults
Restores all the settings you have changed to their default values.
Clicking this button restores all the settings on the current screen to their default values (factory
settings).
Custom dialog box
Set the quality level, and select the desired print quality.
Quality
You can use the slider bar to adjust the print quality level.
215
Important
• Certain print quality levels cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type.
Note
• The High, Standard, or Draft print quality modes are linked with the slider bar. Therefore when
the slider bar is moved, the corresponding quality and value are displayed on the left. This is the
same as when the corresponding radio button is selected for Print Quality on the Main tab.
Color Adjustment Tab
This tab allows you to adjust the color balance by changing the settings of the Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,
Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast options.
Preview
Shows the effect of color adjustment.
The color and brightness change when each item is adjusted.
Note
• The graphic is in monochrome when the Grayscale Printing check box is checked.
View Color Pattern
Displays a pattern for checking color changes produced by color adjustment.
If you want to display the preview image with a color pattern, check this check box.
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow
Adjusts the strengths of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.
Moving the slider to the right makes a color stronger, and moving the slider to the left makes a color
weaker.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
This adjustment changes the relative amount of ink of each color used, which alters the total color
balance of the document. Use your application if you want to change the total color balance
significantly. Use the printer driver only if you want to adjust the color balance slightly.
Important
• When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow appear
grayed out and are unavailable.
Brightness
Selects the brightness of your print.
You cannot change the levels of pure white and black. However, the brightness of the colors between
white and black can be changed.
Intensity
Adjusts the overall intensity of your print.
Moving the slider to the right increases the intensity, and moving the slider to the left decreases the
intensity.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast between light and dark in the image to be printed.
Moving the slider to the right increases the contrast, moving the slider to the left decreases the
216
contrast.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
Print a pattern for color adjustment
When the color balance or intensity/contrast is changed, the pattern printing function prints a list of
the adjustment results along with the adjustment values.
Select this function when printing a pattern for color adjustment.
Pattern Print preferences...
Check Print a pattern for color adjustment to enable this button.
The Pattern Print dialog box opens and allows you to set pattern printing settings.
Pattern Print dialog box
Performs the setup for printing of patterns that allow you to check the color balance and intensity/
contrast of documents.
Parameters to Adjust
Select the item to be checked by pattern printing.
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
Prints a pattern that allows you to check the cyan/magenta/yellow balance.
Important
• When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab, Cyan/Magenta/Yellow appear
grayed out and are unavailable.
Intensity/Contrast
Prints a pattern that allows you to check the intensity/contrast balance.
Printer Paper Size
Selects the paper size to be used for pattern printing.
This setting is linked to Printer Paper Size on the Page Setup tab.
Note
• Depending on the paper size selected on the Page Setup tab, there may be sizes that cannot
be selected.
Amount of Pattern Instances
Sets the number of patterns to be printed.
You can select from Largest, Large, and Small. When you select a pattern size, the number of
patterns that can be printed is as follows:
Note
•Largest and Large cannot be selected when certain paper sizes or output paper sizes are
selected.
• The setting preview on the Main tab displays an image that allows you to check the overall
layout.
Largest
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 37
Intensity/Contrast 49
217
Large
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 19
Intensity/Contrast 25
Small
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 7
Intensity/Contrast 9
Color Variation Between Instances
Sets the amount of color change between neighboring patterns.
Select from Large, Medium, and Small. Large produces a large amount of change, and Small
produces a small amount of change.
Note
•Large is about double the size of Medium, and Small is about half the size of Medium.
Matching Tab
Allows you to select the method for adjusting colors to match the type of document to be printed.
Color Correction
Allows you to select Driver Matching, ICM (ICC Profile Matching), or None to match the purpose of
the print operation.
Important
• When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab, Color Correction appears grayed out
and is unavailable.
Driver Matching
With Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer.
ICM (ICC Profile Matching)
Adjusts the colors by using an ICC profile when printing.
Important
• If the application software is set so that ICM is disabled, ICM (ICC Profile Matching) is
unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data
properly.
None
Disables color adjustment with the printer driver.
Note
•In the XPS printer driver, ICM has become ICC Profile Matching.
Related Topics
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
218
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
219
Page Setup tab Description
The Page Setup tab allows you to determine how a document is to be arranged on the paper. Also, this tab
allows you to set the number of copies and the order of printing. If the application which created the
document has a similar function, set them with the application.
Settings Preview
The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper.
You can check an overall image of the layout.
Page Size
Selects a page size.
Ensure that you select the same page size as you selected within the application.
If you select Custom..., the Custom Paper Size dialog box opens and allows you to specify any
vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.
Orientation
Selects the printing orientation.
If the application used to create your document has a similar function, select the same orientation that
you selected in that application.
Portrait
Prints the document so that its top and bottom positions are unchanged relative to the paper feed
direction. This is the default setting.
Landscape
Prints the document by rotating it 90 degrees relative to the paper feed direction.
You can change the rotation direction by going to the Maintenance tab, opening the Custom
Settings dialog box, and then using Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape]
check box.
To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing, select the Rotate 90 degrees left
when orientation is [Landscape] check box.
220
Rotate 180 degrees
Prints the document by rotating it 180 degrees against the paper feed direction.
The width of print area and the amount of extension that are configured in other application software will
be reversed vertically and horizontally.
Printer Paper Size
Selects the size of paper actually loaded into the printer.
The default setting is Same as Page Size to perform normal-sized printing.
You can select a printer paper size when you select Fit-to-Page, Scaled, Page Layout, Tiling/Poster,
or Booklet for Page Layout.
If you select a paper size that is smaller than the Page Size, the document size will be reduced. If you
select a paper size that is larger, the document size will be enlarged.
Also if you select Custom..., the Custom Paper Size dialog box opens and allows you to specify any
vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.
Page Layout
Selects the size of the document you want to print and the type of printing.
Normal-size
This is the normal printing method. Select this when you do not specify any page layout.
Automatically reduce large document that the printer cannot output
If the printer cannot print the paper size of a document, the printer can automatically reduce
the size when it prints the document.
Check this check box to reduce the size when printing the document.
Borderless
Chooses whether you are printing on a full page without any page margins or printing with page
margins.
In borderless printing, originals are enlarged to extend slightly off the paper. Thus, printing can be
performed without any margins (border).
Use Amount of Extension to adjust how much of the document extends off the paper during
borderless printing.
Amount of Extension
Adjusts how much of the document extends off the paper during borderless printing.
Moving the slider to the right increases the amount of extension and allows you to perform
borderless printing with no problems.
Moving the slider to the left reduces the amount of extension and expands the range of the
document to print.
Fit-to-Page
This function enables you to automatically enlarge or reduce documents to fit to the paper size
loaded in the printer without changing the paper size you specified in your application software.
Scaled
Documents can be enlarged or reduced to be printed.
Specify the size in Printer Paper Size, or enter the scaling ratio in the Scaling box.
Scaling
Specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio for the document you want to print.
Page Layout
Multiple pages of document can be printed on one sheet of paper.
221
Specify...
Opens the Page Layout Printing dialog box.
Click this button to set details on page layout printing.
Tiling/Poster
This function enables you to enlarge the image data and divide the enlarged data into several
pages to be printed. You can also glue together these sheets of paper to create large printed
matter, such as a poster.
Specify...
Opens the Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box.
Click this button to set details on tiling/poster printing.
Booklet
The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of
the paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order,
when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.
Specify...
Opens the Booklet Printing dialog box.
Click this button to set details on booklet printing.
Duplex Printing (Manual)
Select whether to print the document to both sides of the paper manually or to one side of the paper.
Check this check box to print the document on both sides.
This function can be used only when Plain Paper is selected for Media Type and one of Normal-size,
Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout is selected.
Stapling Side
Selects the stapling margin position.
The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best
stapling margin position. Check Stapling Side, and select from the list to change it.
Specify Margin...
Opens the Specify Margin dialog box.
You can specify the width of the margin.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies you want to print. You can specify a value from 1 to 999.
Important
• If the application used to create your document has a similar function, specify the number of copies
with the application without specifying it here.
Print from Last Page
Check this check box when you want to print from the last page in order. If you do this, you do not need
to sort the pages into their correct order after printing.
Uncheck this check box to print your document in normal order, starting from the first page.
Collate
Check this check box to group together the pages of each copy when you want to print multiple copies.
Uncheck this check box when you want to print with all pages of the same page number grouped
together.
222
Important
• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give
priority to the printer driver settings. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the
function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the
printing order with both the application and this printer driver, the number of copies may be
multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.
Print Options...
Opens the Print Options dialog box.
Changes detailed printer driver settings for print data that is sent from applications.
Stamp/Background... (Stamp...)
Opens the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box.
The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also
allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light
illustration behind the document data.
Note
• With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button and
only the stamp function can be used.
Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, Stamp and Background
may not be available.
Custom Paper Size dialog box
This dialog box allows you to specify the size (width and height) of the custom paper.
Units
Select the unit for entering a user-defined paper size.
Paper Size
Specifies the Width and the Height of the custom paper. Measurement is shown according to the
units specified in Units.
Page Layout Printing dialog box
This dialog box allows you to select the number of document pages to be placed on one sheet of paper,
the page order, and whether a page border line is to be printed around each document page.
The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver.
Preview Icon
Shows the settings made on the Page Layout Printing dialog box.
You can check what the print result will look like before you actually print the data.
Page Layout
Specifies the number of document pages to fit on one sheet.
Page Order
Specifies the document orientation to be printed on a sheet of paper.
223
Page Border
Prints a page border line around each document page.
Check this check box to print the page border line.
Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box
This dialog box allows you to select the size of the image to be printed. You can also make settings for cut
lines and paste markers which are convenient for pasting together the pages into a poster.
The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver.
Preview Icon
Shows the settings of the Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box.
You can check what the print result will look like.
Image Divisions
Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal).
As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases. If you are
pasting pages together to create a poster, increasing the number of divisions allows you to create a
larger poster.
Print "Cut/Paste" in margins
Specifies whether to print the words "Cut" and "Paste" in the margins. These words serve as
guidelines for pasting together the pages into a poster.
Check this check box to print the words.
Note
• Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, this function may not
be available.
Print "Cut/Paste" lines in margins
Specifies whether to print cut lines that serve as guidelines for pasting together the pages into a
poster.
Check this check box to print the cut lines.
Print page range
Specifies the printing range. Select All under normal circumstances.
Select Pages to specify a specific page or range.
Note
•If some of the pages have not been printed well, specify the pages that do not need to be printed
by clicking them in the settings preview of the Page Setup tab. Only the pages shown on the
screen will be printed this time.
Booklet Printing dialog box
This dialog box allows you to set how to bind the document as a booklet. Printing only on one side and
printing a page border, can also be set in this dialog box.
The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver.
224
Preview Icon
Shows the settings made on the Booklet Printing dialog box.
You can check what the document will look like when printed as a booklet.
Margin for stapling
Specifies which side of the booklet is to be stapled.
Insert blank page
Selects whether to print the document on one side or both sides of the booklet.
Check this check box to print the document on one side of the booklet and select the side to be left
blank from the list.
Margin
Specifies the width of the stapling margin.
The specified width becomes the stapling margin from the center of the sheet.
Page Border
Prints a page border line around each document page.
Check this check box to print the page border line.
Specify Margin dialog box
This dialog box allows you to specify the margin width for the side to be stapled. If a document does not fit
on one page, the document is reduced when printed.
Margin
Specifies the width of the stapling margin.
The width of the side specified by Stapling Side becomes the stapling margin.
Print Options dialog box
Makes changes to print data that is sent to the printer.
Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, this function may not be
available.
Disable ICM required from the application software
Disables the ICM function required from the application software.
When an application software uses Windows ICM to print data, unexpected colors may be produced
or the printing speed may decrease. If these problems occur, checking this check box may resolve
the problems.
Important
• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.
• This function does not work when ICM is selected for Color Correction on the Matching tab of
the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box.
Note
•Disable ICM required from the application software tab cannot be used with the XPS printer
driver.
225
Disable the color profile setting of the application software
Checking this check box disables information in the color profile that was set on the application
software.
When the information in the color profile set on the application software is output to the printer driver,
the print result may contain unexpected colors. If this happens, checking this check box may resolve
the problem.
Important
• Even when this check box is checked, only some of the information in the color profile is
disabled, and the color profile can still be used for printing.
• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.
Ungroup Papers
Sets the display method of Media Type, Page Size, and Printer Paper Size.
To display the items separately, select the check box.
To display the items as a group, clear the check box.
Do not allow application software to compress print data
Compression of the application software print data is prohibited.
If the print result has missing image data or unintended colors, selecting this check box may improve
the condition.
Important
• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.
Note
•Do not allow application software to compress print data tab cannot be used with the XPS
printer driver.
Print after creating print data by page
The print data is created in page units, and printing starts after the processing of one page of print
data is complete.
If a printed document contains unintended results such as streaks, selecting this check box may
improve the results.
Important
• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.
Scale images using nearest-neighbor interpolation
When an image is to be enlarged or reduced when printed, the printer uses a simple interpolation
process to enlarge or reduce the image.
If the image data in a printed document is not printed clearly, selecting this check box may improve
the results.
Important
• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.
Note
•Scale images using nearest-neighbor interpolation can be used only with the XPS printer
driver.
226
Prevention of Print Data Loss
You can reduce the size of the print data that was created with the application software and then print
the data.
Depending on the application software being used, the image data may be cut off or may not be
printed properly. In such cases, select On. If you will not be using this function, select Off.
Important
• When using this function, the print quality may drop depending on the print data.
Unit of Print Data Processing
Selects the processing unit of the print data to be sent to the printer.
Select Recommended under normal circumstances.
Important
• A large amount of memory may be used for certain settings.
Do not change the setting if your computer has a small amount of memory.
Note
•Unit of Print Data Processing tab cannot be used with the XPS printer driver.
Stamp/Background (Stamp...) dialog box
The Stamp/Background (Stamp...) dialog box allows you to print a stamp and/or background over or
behind the document pages. In addition to the pre-registered ones, you can register and use your original
stamp or background.
Note
• With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button and
only the stamp function can be used.
Stamp
Stamp printing is a function that prints a stamp over a document.
Check this check box and select a title from the list to print a stamp.
Define Stamp...
Opens the Stamp Settings dialog box.
You can check the details of a selected stamp or save a new stamp.
Place stamp over text
Sets how the stamp is to be printed over the document.
Check the Stamp check box to enable this.
Check this check box to print a stamp over the printed document page. The printed data may be
hidden behind the stamp.
Uncheck this check box to print the document data over the stamp. The printed data will not be
hidden behind the stamp. However, the sections of the stamp that are overlapped by the document
may be hidden.
Print semitransparent stamp
Sets how the stamp is to be printed over the document.
Check the Stamp check box to enable this.
Check this check box to print a semi-transparent stamp over the printed document page.
227
Uncheck this check box to print the stamp over the document data. The printed data may be hidden
behind the stamp.
Note
• You can use Print semitransparent stamp only with the XPS printer driver.
Stamp first page only
Selects whether the stamp is to be printed on the first page only or on all pages when the document
has two or more pages.
Check the Stamp check box to enable this.
Check this check box to print a stamp on the first page only.
Background
Background printing is a function that allows you to print an illustration or a similar object (bitmap)
behind the document.
Check this check box to print a background and select a title from the list.
Select Background...
Opens the Background Settings dialog box.
You can register a bitmap as a background, and change layout method and intensity of the selected
background.
Background first page only
Selects whether to print the background on the first page only or print on all pages when the
document has two or more pages.
Check the Background check box to enable this.
Check this check box to print a background on the first page only.
Stamp Tab
The Stamp tab allows you to set the text and bitmap file (.bmp) to be used for a stamp.
Preview Window
Shows the status of the stamp configured in each tab.
Stamp Type
Specifies the stamp type.
Select Text to create a stamp with characters. Select Bitmap to create with a bitmap file. Select
Date/Time/User Name to display the creation date/time and user name of the printed document.
The setting items in the Stamp tab change depending on the selected type.
When Stamp Type is Text or Date/Time/User Name
Stamp Text
Specifies the stamp text string.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
For Date/Time/User Name, the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are
displayed in Stamp Text.
Important
•Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable if Date/Time/User Name is selected.
TrueType Font
Selects the font for the stamp text string.
228
Style
Selects the font style for the stamp text string.
Size
Selects the font size for the stamp text string.
Outline
Selects a frame that encloses the stamp text string.
If a large font size is selected for Size, characters may extend outside of the stamp border.
Color/Select Color...
Shows the current color for the stamp.
To select a different color, click Select Color... to open the Color dialog box, and select or create a
color you wish to use as a stamp.
When Stamp Type is Bitmap
File
Specifies the name of the bitmap file to be used as the stamp.
Select File...
Opens the dialog box to open a file.
Click this button to select a bitmap file to be used as a stamp.
Size
Adjusts the size of the bitmap file to be used as a stamp.
Moving the slider to the right increases the size, moving the slider to the left decreases the size.
Transparent white area
Specifies whether to make white-filled areas of the bitmap transparent.
Check this check box to make white-filled areas of the bitmap transparent.
Note
• Click Defaults to set Stamp Type to text, Stamp Text to blank, TrueType Font to Arial, Style to
Regular, Size to 36 points, Outline unchecked, and Color to gray with the RGB values (192, 192,
192).
Placement Tab
The Placement tab allows you to set the position where the stamp is to be printed.
Preview Window
Shows the status of the stamp configured in each tab.
Position
Specifies the stamp position on the page.
Selecting Custom from the list allows you to enter values for the X-Position and Y-Position
coordinates directly.
Orientation
Specifies the angle of rotation for the stamp. The angle can be set by entering the number of
degrees.
Negative values rotate the stamp clockwise.
229
Note
•Orientation is enabled only when Text or Date/Time/User Name is selected for Stamp Type
on the Stamp tab.
Note
• Click Defaults to set the stamp position to Center and the orientation to 0.
Save settings Tab
The Save settings tab allows you to register a new stamp or delete an unnecessary stamp.
Title
Enter the title to save the stamp you created.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Note
• Spaces, tabs, and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title.
Stamps
Shows a list of saved stamp titles.
Specify a title to display the corresponding stamp in Title.
Save/Save overwrite
Saves the stamp.
Enter a title in Title, and then click this button.
Delete
Deletes an unnecessary stamp.
Specify the title of an unnecessary stamp from the Stamps list, and click this button.
Background Tab
The Background tab allows you to select a bitmap file (.bmp) to be used as a background or determine
how to print the selected background.
Preview Window
Shows the status of the bitmap set on the Background tab.
File
Specifies the name of the bitmap file to be used as the background.
Select File...
Opens the dialog box to open a file.
Click this button to select a bitmap file (.bmp) to be used as the background.
Layout Method
Specifies how the background image is to be placed on the paper.
When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the bitmap to be used as a background.
Moving the slider to the right increases the intensity, and moving the slider to the left decreases the
230
intensity. To print the background at the original bitmap intensity, move the slider to the rightmost
position.
Note
• Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, this function may not be
available.
• Click Defaults to set File to blank, Layout Method to Fill page, and the Intensity slider to the
middle.
Save settings Tab
The Save settings tab allows you to register a new background or delete an unnecessary background.
Title
Enter the title to save the background image you specified.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Note
• Spaces, tabs, and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title.
Backgrounds
Shows a list of registered background titles.
Specify a title to display the corresponding background in Title.
Save/Save overwrite
Saves the image data as a background.
After inserting the Title, click this button.
Delete
Deletes an unnecessary background.
Specify the title of an unnecessary background from the Backgrounds list, and then click this
button.
231
Maintenance tab Description
The Maintenance tab allows you to perform printer maintenance or change the settings of the printer.
Cleaning
Performs print head cleaning.
Print head cleaning removes any blockage in the print head nozzles.
Perform cleaning when printing becomes faint, or a specific color fails to print, even though all ink levels
are sufficiently high.
Deep Cleaning
Performs deep cleaning.
Perform deep cleaning when two cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem.
Note
•Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning.
Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Therefore, perform
cleaning only when necessary.
Ink Group
When you click Cleaning or Deep Cleaning, the Ink Group window is displayed.
Selects the ink group that you want to clean the print head for.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items that you need to check before you execute cleaning
or deep cleaning.
232
System Cleaning
Performs system cleaning.
Execute this function if the status does not improve even after deep cleaning is performed.
System Cleaning consumes an extremely large amount of ink.
Executing system cleaning frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Therefore execute
system cleaning only when necessary.
Important
• If System Cleaning is run when the remaining ink level is insufficient, it may cause a failure.
Be sure to check the remaining ink level before running System Cleaning.
Ink Group
When you click System Cleaning, the Ink Group window is displayed.
Selects the ink group that you want to clean the print head for.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items that you need to check before you execute cleaning,
deep cleaning or system cleaning.
Print Head Alignment
Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors
and lines.
Align the print head immediately after installing the print head.
When you click Print Head Alignment, the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box is displayed.
Nozzle Check
Prints a nozzle check pattern.
Perform this function if printing becomes faint or a specific color fails to print. Print a nozzle check
pattern, and check whether the print head is working properly.
If the print result for a specific color is fainted, or if there are any unprinted sections, click Cleaning to
clean the print head.
To display a list of items that you should check before printing the nozzle check pattern, click Initial
Check Items.
Print Check Pattern
This function prints a pattern that allows you to check whether the any of the ink nozzles are
clogged.
Click Print Check Pattern. When the confirmation message is displayed, click OK. The Pattern
Check dialog box is then displayed.
Left-side bitmap (good)
The print head nozzles are not clogged.
Right-side bitmap (bad)
The print head nozzles may be clogged.
Exit
Closes the Pattern Check dialog box, and returns to the Maintenance tab.
233
Cleaning
Performs print head cleaning.
Print head cleaning removes any blockage in the print head nozzles.
Perform cleaning when printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print, even though
all ink levels are sufficiently high.
Remaining Ink Notification Settings
Displays the Remaining Ink Notification Settings dialog box.
Run this function to switch the remaining ink level notification setting and to reset the remaining ink level
count.
Bottom Plate Cleaning
Performs cleaning of the bottom plate of the printer.
To prevent smudges on the back side of a sheet of paper, perform Bottom Plate Cleaning before you
perform duplex printing.
Also perform Bottom Plate Cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear
on the printed page.
Roller Cleaning
Cleans the paper feed rollers.
Paper feeding may fail if paper dust has stuck to the printer's paper feed rollers. In this case, clean the
paper feed rollers to improve the print result.
Power Off
Turns off the printer from the printer driver.
Perform this function to turn off the printer when you cannot press the ON button (POWER button) on
the printer because the printer is out of your reach.
You must press the ON button (POWER button) on the printer to turn the printer on again after clicking
this button. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the printer on from the printer driver.
Auto Power
Opens the Auto Power Settings dialog box.
Specify settings for operating the printer power automatically. Perform this function if you want to
change the auto power settings.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error
message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
234
Quiet Settings
Opens the Quiet Settings dialog box.
Quiet Settings dialog box allows you to specify a setting that reduces the operating noise of the printer.
This mode comes in handy when the operating noise of the printer becomes a concern, such when
printing at night. Perform this operation when you want to change the quiet mode setting.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error
message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
Custom Settings
Opens the Custom Settings dialog box.
Perform this function to change the settings of this printer.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error
message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
View Print History
This function starts the Canon IJ XPS preview, and displays the print history.
Note
• You can use this function only with the XPS printer driver.
View Printer Status
Starts the Canon IJ Status Monitor.
Perform this function when you want to check the printer status and how a print job is proceeding.
Note
• If you are using the XPS printer driver, the "Canon IJ Status Monitor" becomes the "Canon IJ XPS
Status Monitor".
About
Opens the About dialog box.
The version of the printer driver, plus a copyright notice, can be checked.
In addition, the language to be used can be switched.
Initial Check Items (Cleaning / Deep Cleaning)
Before running Cleaning or Deep Cleaning, check that the printer power is on.
Then check the following item:
•Is there ink remaining?
235
Initial Check Items (System Cleaning)
Before running System Cleaning, check that the printer power is on.
Then check the following items:
• When you ran Nozzle Check, were there areas where the print was smeared or unprinted areas?
• Did the condition not improve even after Deep Cleaning was run?
• Are the remaining ink levels insufficient?
◦ Visually check whether the remaining ink levels are insufficient.
If System Cleaning is run when the remaining ink levels are insufficient, it may trigger a failure.
◦ If you selected All Colors or Black for Ink Group, check that all remaining ink levels are at least
at the single dot position indicated on the ink tanks. (The color inks are consumed even if Black
was selected.)
If you selected Color, check that the remaining ink levels for all color inks are at least at the single
dot position indicated on the ink tanks.
◦ If the remaining ink level is below the single dot, refill the ink to the position of the single dot.
Start Print Head Alignment dialog box
This dialog box allows you to adjust the attachment position for the print head, or to print the current
setting value for the print head position.
Align Print Head
Aligns the print head.
Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors
and lines.
Align the print head immediately after installing the print head.
Print Alignment Value
Click this button to check the current setting value of the print head position.
Prints the current setting value for the print head position.
Print Head Alignment dialog box
To adjust the print head position manually, click Align Print Head in the Start Print Head Alignment
dialog box, and perform the operations instructed in the messages. The Print Head Alignment dialog
box is then displayed.
This dialog box allows you to check the printed pattern and adjust the print head position.
Preview Window
Displays the pattern of Print Head Alignment, and checks the position of the selected pattern.
You can also change the setting by clicking the pattern on the screen directly.
Select the Pattern Number
Compare the printed adjustment patterns, and enter the pattern number of the pattern with the
least visible streaks or horizontal stripes into the corresponding box.
Note
•If you do not know how to analyze the printed pattern, see Adjusting Print Head Position.
236
Initial Check Items (Nozzle Check)
Before running Nozzle Check, check that the printer power is on.
Then check the following item:
•Is there ink remaining?
Remaining Ink Notification Settings dialog box
When you click Remaining Ink Notification Settings, the Remaining Ink Notification Settings dialog
box appears.
Then from the print driver, you can switch the remaining ink level notification setting and reset the
remaining ink level count.
Function for Notifying the Remaining Ink Level
Select the setting for the remaining ink level notification function.
Select Enable to display an error message when the remaining ink level runs low.
Select Disable to prevent the error message from being displayed.
Then click Set to enable the selected setting.
Important
• Before enabling Function for Notifying the Remaining Ink Level, replenish all inks to the
upper limit line and reset the remaining ink level count by running Resets the Remaining Ink
Level Count. However, if you reset the count by operating the operation panel of the printer, the
setting in the printer driver is unnecessary.
If any ink is not replenished to the upper limit line, a significant error may occur in the accuracy of
the remaining ink level notification function.
• If you disable Function for Notifying the Remaining Ink Level, you must visually check the
remaining ink level. Replenish the ink before the ink level falls below the lower limit line.
Resets the Remaining Ink Level Count
Click Reset to reset the remaining ink level count.
Important
• When you reset the remaining ink level count, you must replenish all inks to the upper limit line.
Note
• When Enable is selected for Function for Notifying the Remaining Ink Level, the counters
can be reset separately by color from the operation panel of the printer. For specific procedure
information, see "Refilling Ink Tanks."
Auto Power Settings dialog box
When you click Auto Power, the Auto Power Settings dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box allows you to manage the printer power from the printer driver.
Auto Power On
Selects the auto power-on setting.
Specify Disable to prevent the printer from turning on automatically when print data is sent to it.
237
Make sure the printer is on and then click OK to change the printer settings.
Specify Enable to turn the printer on automatically when print data is sent to it.
Auto Power Off
Selects the auto power-off setting.
If a printer driver operation or a printer operation is not performed within the specified time, the printer
turns off.
Important
• When you use the printer by connecting it to a telephone line via a modular cable, you can set
Auto Power Off but the power will not be turned off automatically.
Quiet Settings dialog box
When you click Quiet Settings, the Quiet Settings dialog box is displayed.
Quiet Settings dialog box allows you to specify a setting that reduces the operating noise of the printer.
Select when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night, etc.
Using this function may lower the print speed.
Do not use quiet mode
Select this option when you wish to use the printer with volume of normal operating noise.
Always use quiet mode
Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer.
Use quiet mode during specified hours
Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer during a specified period
of time.
Set the Start time and the End time of the quiet mode you wish to be activated. If both are set to the
same time, the quiet mode will not function.
Important
• You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the printer, the printer driver, or ScanGear
(scanner driver).
No matter how you use to set the quiet mode, the mode is applied when you perform operations from
the operation panel of the printer or printing and scanning from the computer.
• If you specify a time for Use quiet mode during specified hours, quiet mode is not applied to
operations (copy, direct print, etc.) performed directly from the printer.
Custom Settings dialog box
When you click Custom Settings, the Custom Settings dialog box is displayed.
If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.
Prevent paper abrasion
The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high-density printing to
prevent paper abrasion.
Check this check box to enable this function.
238
Align heads manually
Usually, the Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is set to automatic head
alignment, but you can change it to manual head alignment.
If the printing results of automatic print head alignment are not satisfactory, perform manual head
alignment.
Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment.
Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape]
On the Page Setup tab, you can change the rotation direction of the Landscape in the Orientation.
To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing, select the check box.
Note
• If Yougata 4 4.13"x9.25", Yougata 6 3.86"x7.48", Envelope Com 10, or Envelope DL is
selected for Page Size on the Page Setup tab, the printer rotates the paper 90 degrees to the
left to print, regardless of the Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape] setting
for Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab.
Don't detect mismatch of paper settings when printing from computer
When you print documents from your computer and the paper settings in the printer driver and the
paper information registered on the printer do not match, this setting disables the message display
and allows you to continue printing.
To disable detection of paper setting mismatches, select this check box.
Ink Drying Wait Time
The printer can pause before printing a subsequent page. Moving the slider to the right increases the
pause time, and moving the slider to the left decreases the time.
If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries,
increase the ink drying wait time.
Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing.
About dialog box
When you click About, the About dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box displays the version, copyright, and module list of the printer driver. You can select the
language to be used and switch the language displayed in the setup window.
Modules
Lists the printer driver modules.
Language
Specifies the language you wish to use in the printer driver setup window.
Important
•If the font for displaying the language of your choice is not installed in your system, the
characters will be garbled.
Related Topics
Cleaning the Print Heads
Adjusting Print Head Position
Printing a Nozzle Check Pattern
239
Canon IJ Status Monitor Screen
The Canon IJ Status Monitor displays the printer status and the printing progress. The printer status is
shown by the images, icons, and messages in the status monitor.
Features of the Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor has the following functions:
Onscreen display of printer status
The status monitor displays the printer status in real-time.
You can check the progress of each document to be printed (print job).
Display of error content and correction procedure
The status monitor displays information on any errors that occur on the printer.
You can then immediately check what sort of action to perform.
Overview of the Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor uses messages to display the printer status and the ink status.
During printing, you can check information about the document being printed and the print progress.
If an error occurs, the status monitor displays the error content and instructions on how to correct the
error. Follow the message instructions.
Printer
Canon IJ Status Monitor shows an icon when a warning or error occurs to the printer.
: There is a warning.
: There has been an operator error.
: There is a notice about something other than a warning or an error.
: There has been an error which requires a service.
Document Name
Name of the document being printed.
241
Owner
Owner's name of the document being printed.
Printing Page
Page number of current page and the total page count.
Display Print Queue
The print queue, which controls the current document and documents waiting to be printed.
Cancel Printing
Cancels printing.
About Ink
Click (the disclosure triangle) to display messages.
Ink Model Number
You can look up the correct ink tank for your printer.
Option Menu
If a printer message appears, select Enable Status Monitor to start the Canon IJ Status Monitor.
Select Enable Status Monitor to use the following commands:
Always Display Current Job
Displays the Canon IJ Status Monitor whenever a document is being printed.
Always Display on Top
Displays the Canon IJ Status Monitor in front of other windows.
Display Guide Message
Displays guide messages for complicated paper setting operations.
Envelope Printing
Displays guide messages when envelope printing starts.
To hide these guide messages, select the Do not show this message again check
box.
To display the guide messages again, open the Option menu, select Display Guide
Message, click Envelope Printing, and enable this setting.
Hagaki Printing
Displays guide messages before the printer begins hagaki printing.
To hide these guide messages, select the Do not show this message again check
box.
To display the guide messages again, open the Option menu, select Display Guide
Message, click Hagaki Printing, and enable this setting.
Start when Windows is Started
Automatically starts the Canon IJ Status Monitor when Windows is started.
Remote UI menu
You are able to open the printer's Remote User Interface.
You are able to check the printer status and run maintenance functions on the printer when
connected to and using it through a network.
Note
• When the printer is being used via USB connection Remote UI will not display.
242
Printer Information
Allows you check detailed information, such as the printer status, the print progress, and
remaining ink levels.
Maintenance
Allows you to run printer maintenance and change printer settings.
Download Security Certificate
Displays the For secure communication window.
This window allows you to download the route certificate, register it to the browser, and
disable warning displays.
Help Menu
Select this menu to display Help information for the Canon IJ Status Monitor including version
and copyright information.
243
Installing the MP Drivers
You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers and XPS printer driver
for your model.
The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows:
1. Turn off the printer
2. Start the installer
Double-click the icon of the downloaded file.
The installation program starts.
Important
•A confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when starting, installing or uninstalling software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Yes (or Continue, Allow) to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. In such cases, switch to an
administrator account, and restart the operation from the beginning.
3. Install the MP Drivers
Take the appropriate action as described on the screen.
4. Complete the installation
Click Complete.
Depending on the environment you are using, a message prompting you to restart the computer may be
displayed. To complete the installation properly, restart the computer.
Important
• You can install the XPS printer driver with the same procedure for installing the MP Drivers. However,
when installing the XPS printer driver, first complete installation of the MP Drivers.
• You can download the MP Drivers and XPS printer driver for free, but any Internet access charges
incurred are your responsibility.
• Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version.
Related Topics
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Before Installing the MP Drivers
244
Using Printer with Wireless Direct
You can connect devices (e.g. smartphone, or tablet) to the printer by two methods below.
• Wireless connection (connecting devices via a wireless router)
• Direct wireless connection (connecting devices using Wireless Direct)
This section describes Wireless Direct, which allows you to print or scan by connecting the devices to the
printer directly.
Follow the procedure below to use Wireless Direct.
1. Changing Printer's Settings
2. Changing Settings of a Device and Connecting It to the Printer
3. Printing/Scanning with Wireless Direct
This section also describes changing Wireless Direct to wireless LAN.
•Changing Printer Setting to Use Wireless LAN
Important
• You can connect up to 5 devices to the printer at the same time.
• Check the usage restrictions and switch the printer to the Wireless Direct.
Restrictions
Preparing for Wireless Direct
Change settings below to prepare for Wireless Direct.
• Printer's LAN settings
Changing Printer's Settings
• Settings of a device to connect
Changing Settings of a Device and Connecting It to the Printer
Changing Printer's Settings
1. Make sure printer is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Select Device settings and then press the OK button.
The Device settings screen is displayed.
4. Select LAN settings and then press the OK button.
5. Select Wireless Direct and then press the OK button.
246
6. Select Switch WL Direct and then press the OK button.
7. Select ON and then press the OK button.
8. Select Done and then press the OK button.
The Wireless Direct is enabled and a device can be connected to the printer wirelessly.
Note
•You can check the following on the Wireless router info screen. Use the button to
select an item you want to check and then press the OK button.
•SSID: Identifier
•Security protocol: Security setting and password
•WL Direct dev. name: Printer's name which appears on a Wi-Fi Direct compatible device
The password is required when connecting a device to the printer. Depending on the device
you are using, no password is required.
When you connect a Wi-Fi Direct compatible device to the printer, select the device name
displayed on the LCD from your device.
• The identifier (SSID) and the security setting are specified automatically. To update them, see
below.
Changing Wireless Direct Setting
Changing Settings of a Device and Connecting It to the Printer
1. Turn on wireless communication on your device.
Enable "Wi-Fi" on your device's "Setting" menu.
For more on turning on wireless communication, see your device's instruction manual.
2. Select "DIRECT-XXXX-G4000series" ("X" represents alphanumeric characters) from list
displayed on device.
Note
•If "DIRECT-XXXX-G4000series" does not appear on the list, Wireless Direct is not enabled.
See Changing Printer's Settings to enable Wireless Direct.
3. Enter password.
Your device is connected to the printer.
Note
•You can check the password by printing the network settings from the printer.
Printing Network Settings
247
• Depending on the device you are using, entering the password is required to connect a
device to the printer via wireless LAN. Enter the password specified for the printer.
• If your Wi-Fi Direct compatible device is set to prioritize using Wi-Fi Direct and it is connecting
to the printer, the printer displays a confirmation screen asking if you allow the device to
connect to the printer.
Make sure the name on the LCD is the same as that of your wireless communication device
and select Yes.
Printing/Scanning with Wireless Direct
Connect a device and the printer and start printing/scanning.
Note
• For more on printing or scanning from a device via wireless LAN, refer to the device's or
application's instruction manual.
• You can print/scan from your smartphone or tablet by installing Canon PRINT Inkjet/SELPHY.
Download it from App Store and Google Play.
For iOS
For Android
Changing Printer Setting to Use Wireless LAN
Follow the procedure below to change the printer setting to use wireless LAN.
1. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
2. Select Device settings and then press the OK button.
The Device settings screen is displayed.
3. Select LAN settings and then press the OK button.
4. Select Wireless LAN and then press the OK button.
5. Select WLAN activ./inactiv. and then press the OK button.
6. Select Active and then press the OK button.
If you do not use the printer over wireless LAN, select Inactive.
Changing Wireless Direct Setting
Change the settings for the Wireless Direct following the procedure below.
1. Make sure printer is turned on.
248
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Select Device settings and then press the OK button.
The Device settings screen is displayed.
4. Select LAN settings and then press the OK button.
5. Select Wireless Direct and then press the OK button.
6. Select a setting item and then press the OK button.
Update SSID/PW
Updates the identifier (SSID) and the password for Wireless Direct.
Select Yes and then press the OK button on the confirmation screen.
You can check the updated identifier (SSID) in SSID on the Wireless router info screen.
Change device name
Changes the printer's name displayed on the Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.
Follow the procedure below to change the name.
1. Delete the current device name by pressing the Back button repeatedly.
2. Enter device name (up to 32 characters).
3. Press the OK button.
Confirm request
Changes the confirmation screen setting when a Wi-Fi Direct compatible device is connecting
to the printer.
After pressing the OK button the confirmation screen is displayed. If you want the printer to
display the screen to inform you a Wi-Fi direct compatible device is connecting to the printer,
select ON.
Important
•To prevent an unauthorized access, we recommend you should not change the setting
from the default.
Note
• If you change the Wireless Direct setting of the printer, also change the wireless router setting of
the device.
249
Paper Settings
By registering the paper size and the media type loaded on the rear tray, you can prevent the printer from
misprinting by displaying the message before printing starts when the paper size or the media type of the
loaded paper differs from the print settings.
Note
• The default display setting is different between when you print or copy from the operation panel of the
printer and when you print using the printer driver.
Default Setting for Displaying the Message which Prevents Misprinting
After loading paper:
When you load paper on the rear tray:
The screen to register the rear tray paper information is displayed.
Register the paper size and the media type according to the loaded paper.
Important
• For more on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on the
LCD:
• For Windows:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
• For Mac OS:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
250
When the paper settings for printing or copying are different from the paper
information registered to the printer:
Ex:
• Paper setting for printing or copying: A5
• Paper information registered to the printer: A4
When you start printing or copying, a message is displayed.
Pressing the OK button displays the paper setting specified for printing or copying under the message.
Note
• Depending on the setting, the choices below may not be displayed.
Use rear tray set.
Select if you want to print on the paper loaded without changing the paper settings.
For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is A5 and the paper information
registered to the printer is A4, the printer starts printing or copying with A5 on the paper loaded.
Replace the paper
Select if you want to print after replacing the paper of the rear tray.
For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is A5 and the paper information
registered to the printer is A4, you load A5 sized paper before you start printing or copying.
The paper information registration screen is displayed after replacing the paper and closing the feed
slot cover. Register the paper information according to the paper that you loaded.
Note
• For more on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on the
LCD:
• For Windows:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
251
• For Mac OS:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
Cancel
Cancels printing.
Select when you change the paper settings specified for printing or copying. Change the paper
settings and try printing again.
Default Setting for Displaying the Message which Prevents Misprinting
•When you print using the operation panel of the printer:
The message which prevents misprinting is enabled by default.
To change the display setting when you copy or print using the operation panel of the printer:
Feed settings
•When you print using the printer driver:
The message which prevents misprinting is disabled by default.
To change the display setting when you print using the printer driver:
◦ For Windows:
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
◦ For Mac OS:
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
Important
• When the message which prevents misprinting is disabled:
The printer starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and the
paper information registered to the printer are different.
252
Making Copies
This section describes the basic procedure to perform standard copying.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Load paper.
3. Press the COPY button.
The Copy standby screen is displayed.
4. Load the original document on the platen glass or in the ADF.
5. Confirm the page size and magnification.
1. Magnification
2. Page size
Note
• To change or confirm the page size, magnification, or other settings, press the Menu button, then
use the button to display the desired setting item.
Setting Items for Copying
• Press the COPY button to reset the magnification to 100%.
6. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of copies.
7. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white copying.
The printer starts copying.
Remove the original on the platen glass or from the document output slot after copying is complete.
Important
•If you load the original on the platen glass, do not open the document cover or remove the original
while Scanning... is displayed on the screen.
•If you load the original in the ADF, do not move the original until copying is complete.
Note
•To cancel copying, press the Stop button.
253
• If you load the original on the platen glass, you can add the copying job while printing.
Adding the Copying Job (Reserve copy)
Adding the Copying Job (Reserve copy)
If you load the original on the platen glass, you can add the copying job while printing (Reserve copy).
The screen below is displayed when you can reserve copy.
Load the original on the platen glass and press the same button (the Color button or the Black button) as
the one which you previously pressed.
Important
• When you load the original on the platen glass, move the document cover gently.
Note
• When Print quality is set High, or you load the original in the ADF, you cannot add the copying job.
• When you add the copying job, the number of copies or the settings such as the page size or media
type cannot be changed.
• If you press the Stop button while reserve copying is in progress, the screen to select the method to
cancel copying is displayed. If you select Cancel all reserv. then press the OK button, you can
cancel copying all scanned data. If you select Cancel last reserv., then press the OK button, you can
cancel the last copying job.
• If you set a document of too many pages to reserve copy, Memory is full may appears on the LCD.
Press the OK button and wait a while, then try copying again.
• If Try again appears on the LCD when scanning, press the OK button, then press the Stop button to
cancel copying. After that, copy the documents that have not been finished copying.
254
Setting Items for Copying
You can change the copy settings such as the page size, media type, and intensity.
Press the Menu button, use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.
Use the button to adjust each setting item, then press the OK button. The next setting item is
displayed.
The LCD returns to the Copy standby screen when all the settings are complete.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
• Some settings cannot be specified in combination with the setting of other setting items or the copy
menu.
• The settings of the page size, media type, etc. are retained even if the printer is turned off.
•Enlarge/Reduce
Select the reduction/enlargement method.
Reducing/Enlarging Copies
Ex:
Note
• This setting item is displayed under the following conditions.
• When standard copying is selected
• When Borderless copy is selected for Special copy
•Copy intensity
Change the intensity.
Ex:
Note
• If you select Auto adjust, load the original on the platen glass.
• If you select Manual adjust, use the button to decrease the intensity or the button to
increase it.
•Page size
Select the page size of the loaded paper.
Ex:
255
Note
• Some of setting items are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.
•Media type
Select the media type of the loaded paper.
Ex:
•Print quality
Select the print quality according to the original.
Ex:
Note
• If you use Draft with the media type set to Plain paper and the quality is not as good as expected,
select Standard or High and try copying again.
• Select High to copy in grayscale. Grayscale renders tones in a range of grays instead of black or
white.
•4-on-1 layout
Select the layout when copying four original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image.
Four different layouts are available.
Ex:
Note
• This setting item is displayed only when 4-on-1 copy is selected for Special copy.
Copying Four Pages onto Single Page
•Collate
Select whether to obtain sorted printouts when making multiple copies of a multi-paged original.
Collated Copying
Ex:
256
Note
• This setting item is displayed when standard copying is selected.
257
What Is IJ Scan Utility (Scanner Software)?
IJ Scan Utility is an application for scanning documents, photos, and other items.
Access all scanning functions to scan and save directly, from the icons in the IJ Scan Utility main screen.
IJ Scan Utility Features
Multiple Scanning Modes
Auto allows for one click scanning with default settings for various items. Document will sharpen text in
a document or magazine for better readability, and Photo is best suited for scanning photos.
Note
• For details on the IJ Scan Utility main screen, see IJ Scan Utility Main Screen.
Save Scanned Images Automatically
Scanned images are automatically saved to a preset folder. The folder can be changed as needed.
Note
• The default save folders are as follows.
•Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows Vista:
Documents folder
•Windows 8/Windows 7:
My Documents folder
•To change folder, see Settings Dialog Box.
Application Integration
Scanned images can be sent to other applications. For example, display scanned images in your
favorite graphics application, attach them to e-mails, or extract text from images.
260
Starting IJ Scan Utility
Note
• If you have more than one scanner or have changed from USB to network connection, set up the
network environment from IJ Scan Utility.
Network Scan Settings
Follow the steps below to start IJ Scan Utility.
Windows 10:
From Start menu, select All apps > Canon Utilities > IJ Scan Utility.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
Select IJ Scan Utility on the Start screen.
If IJ Scan Utility is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, and then search for "IJ Scan
Utility".
Windows 7/Windows Vista:
From Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Scan Utility > IJ Scan Utility.
262
Using Auto Scan Function
Auto Scan allows for automatic detection of the item type.
Important
• The following types of items may not be scanned correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames
(scan areas) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver), and then scan again.
• Photos with a whitish background
• Items printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, and other unclear items
• Thin items
• Thick items
• When scanning two or more documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), place documents of
the same size.
1. Make sure scanner or printer is turned on.
2. Place items on platen or ADF.
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
3. Start IJ Scan Utility.
4. Click Auto.
Scanning starts.
Note
• To cancel the scan, click Cancel.
• To apply suitable corrections based on the item type, click Settings..., and then select the Apply
recommended image correction checkbox in the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box.
• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box
displayed by clicking Settings.... In the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box, advanced scan settings can
also be made.
• To scan a specific item type, see the following pages.
Scanning Photos
Scanning Documents
Scanning with Favorite Settings
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
263
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto
Document Feeder)
Place multiple documents on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) and scan at one time.
Note
• You can scan multiple documents at one time from the ADF when scanning via Auto, Document,
Custom, or ScanGear.
Refer to "Scanning Using Application Software (ScanGear)" for your model from Home of the Online
Manual for how to scan using ScanGear (scanner driver).
Using Auto Scan:
The item type is detected automatically. Click Auto in the IJ Scan Utility main screen and scan.
Using Auto Scan Function
Not Using Auto Scan:
In the Settings dialog box, set Select Source to ADF or Auto, and scan.
Note
• The screens for scanning documents are used as examples in the following descriptions.
1. Place the documents on the ADF.
Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))
2. Start IJ Scan Utility.
3. Click Settings....
The Settings dialog box appears.
4. Click Document Scan.
264
5. Select Select Source according to the documents to be scanned.
To scan only the front side of each document, select Document (ADF/Platen) or Document (ADF
Simplex).
To scan the front side then the back side of each document, select Document (ADF Manual Duplex).
6. Set the color mode, document size, and scanning resolution as required.
265
Click Document Scan Orientation Settings... to specify the orientation of the documents to be
scanned. In the displayed dialog box, you can specify the Orientation and Binding Side. How to place
the documents when scanning the back sides depends on the Binding Side.
When setting is completed, click OK.
The IJ Scan Utility main screen appears.
Note
• Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box.
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
7. Click Document.
Scanning starts.
Note
•To cancel the scan, click Cancel.
When Document (ADF Manual Duplex) is selected for Select Source, proceed to Step 8.
266
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to place the documents.
Note
•The screens for scanning with Orientation set to Portrait are used as examples in the following
descriptions.
When Long edge is Selected for Binding Side in Document Scan Orientation Settings...:
Place the documents after rotating the output documents 180 degrees.
When Short edge is Selected for Binding Side in Document Scan Orientation Settings...:
Place the documents without changing the orientation of the output documents.
9. Click OK.
Scanning starts.
267
Note
• To cancel the scan, click Cancel.
• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the corresponding Settings dialog box
displayed by clicking Settings.... In each Settings dialog box, you can also make advanced scan
settings.
268
IJ Scan Utility Main Screen
Follow the steps below to start IJ Scan Utility.
Windows 10:
From Start menu, select All apps > Canon Utilities > IJ Scan Utility to start IJ Scan Utility.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
Select IJ Scan Utility on Start screen to start IJ Scan Utility.
If IJ Scan Utility is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, and then search for "IJ Scan
Utility".
Windows 7/Windows Vista:
From Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Scan Utility > IJ Scan Utility to start IJ Scan
Utility.
You can complete from scanning to saving at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Product Name
Displays the name of the product that IJ Scan Utility is currently set to use.
If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.
In addition, for network connection, select one with "Network" after the product name.
Note
• Refer to "Network Scan Settings" for how to set up a network environment.
Auto
Detects the item type automatically and saves them to a computer. The data format for saving will also
be set automatically.
Save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog
box.
Document
Scans items as documents and saves them to a computer.
Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Document Scan)
dialog box.
Photo
Scans items as photos and saves them to a computer.
Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Photo Scan)
dialog box.
270
Custom
Scans items with your favorite settings and saves the images to a computer. The item type can be
automatically detected.
Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Custom Scan)
dialog box.
Stitch
Displays the Image Stitch window in which you can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than
the platen and combine the scanned images back into one image.
Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Scan and Stitch)
dialog box.
ScanGear
Starts ScanGear (scanner driver) in which you can make image corrections and color adjustments
when scanning.
Scan/save settings and applications can be specified in the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Settings...
Displays the Settings dialog box in which you can specify the scan/save settings and the response after
scanning.
271
Settings Dialog Box
The Settings dialog box has three tabs: (Scanning from a Computer), (Scanning from the
Operation Panel), and (General Settings). When you click a tab, the options available in the red
frame switches; set the details of each function on each tab as needed.
(Scanning from a Computer) Tab
Set the default actions when scanning from IJ Scan Utility or My Image Garden.
Settings (Auto Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box
Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box
(Scanning from the Operation Panel) Tab
Set the default actions when scanning from the operation panel.
Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) Dialog Box
Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box
272
Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the (Scanning from the
Operation Panel) tab does not appear.
(General Settings) Tab
Set the model to use, file size restriction on e-mail attachment, language for detecting text in images, and
the folder in which to save images temporarily.
Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box
273
Settings (Auto Scan) Dialog Box
Click Auto Scan on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog
box.
In the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan by automatically
detecting the item type.
(1) Scan Options Area
(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the setting items for Application
Settings do not appear.
Supported Items
Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, documents, and BD/DVD/CD.
Important
• To scan the following types of items, specify the item type and size in the Settings (Document Scan)
dialog box, Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box, or Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, then click
Photo, Document, or Custom in the IJ Scan Utility main screen. You cannot scan correctly with Auto.
• A4 size photos
• Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback
pages with the spine cut off
274
• Items printed on thin white paper
• Long narrow items such as panoramic photos
• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.
• Place items to be scanned on the platen correctly. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.
Refer to "Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)" for how to place items.
• When scanning two or more documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), place documents of
the same size.
Note
• To reduce moire in scans, set Select Source to Magazine in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog
box or Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, then click Document or Custom in the IJ Scan Utility main
screen.
(1) Scan Options Area
Apply recommended image correction
Applies suitable corrections automatically based on the item type.
Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the
checkbox and scan.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
(2) Save Settings Area
File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
The default save folders are as follows.
•Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows Vista:
Documents folder
•Windows 8/Windows 7:
My Documents folder
275
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Data Format
Auto is selected. The following data formats are automatically applied according to the item type
when saving.
• Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD, and business cards: JPEG
• Magazines, newspapers, and documents: PDF
Important
• The save format may differ depending on how you place the item.
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
JPEG Image Quality
You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Create a PDF file that supports keyword search
Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.
Note
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
Save to a subfolder with current date
Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
(3) Application Settings Area
Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.
You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
276
You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.
Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.
You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.
Do not start any application
Saves to the folder specified in Save in.
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
277
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Click Document Scan on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Document
Scan) dialog box.
In the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan items as
documents.
(1) Scan Options Area
(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from the Scan screen of My Image Garden, the setting items
for Application Settings do not appear.
(1) Scan Options Area
Select Source
Select the type of item to be scanned.
278
• Scanning documents: Document or Document (ADF/Platen)
• Scanning magazines: Magazine
• Scanning documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder): Document (ADF Simplex),
Document (ADF Manual Duplex), or Document (ADF/Platen)
Note
• When Document (ADF/Platen) is selected and documents are placed both on the platen and
ADF, those placed on the ADF will be scanned.
Color Mode
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.
Paper Size
Select the size of the item to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears. Select a Unit,
then enter the Width and Height, and then click OK.
Note
• Click Defaults to restore the specified settings to the default settings.
Resolution
Select the resolution of the item to be scanned.
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Resolution
Note
• Only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application Settings.
Document Scan Orientation Settings...
This appears when you select ADF for Select Source.
Click to display the Document Scan Orientation Settings dialog box in which you can set the
orientation and binding side of the documents to be scanned from the ADF.
279
Important
•Binding Side cannot be specified when scanning only the front side of each document.
Image Processing Settings
Click (Plus) to set the following.
Note
• The displayed items vary by Select Source and Color Mode.
Apply Auto Document Fix
Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability.
Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
Reduce show-through
Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc.
Reduce moire
Reduces moire patterns.
Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots
are scanned.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire.
Reduce gutter shadow/Reduce gutter shadow (platen)
Reduces gutter shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
280
Important
• This function is available only when scanning from the platen.
Note
• Use ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when
scanning non-standard size items or specified areas.
Refer to "Gutter Shadow Correction" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for
details.
• When you enable this function, scanning may take longer than usual with network
connection.
Correct slanted text document
Detects the scanned text and corrects the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10
degrees) of the document.
Important
• The following types of documents may not be corrected properly since the text cannot be
detected correctly.
• Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary
by line
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
• Documents with extremely large or small fonts
• Documents with small amount of text
• Documents containing figures/images
• Hand-written text
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document.
Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image
Automatically rotates the image to the correct orientation by detecting the orientation of text in
the scanned document.
Important
• Only text documents written in the language selected from Document Language in the
Settings (General Settings) dialog box are supported.
• The orientation may not be detected for the following types of settings or documents since
the text cannot be detected correctly.
• Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
• Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
• Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
• Documents with patterned backgrounds
In that case, select the Check scan results and specify save settings checkbox, and then
rotate the image in the Save Settings dialog box.
281
(2) Save Settings Area
File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
The default save folders are as follows.
•Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows Vista:
Documents folder
•Windows 8/Windows 7:
My Documents folder
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.
You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages).
Important
• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
• When Start OCR is selected in Application Settings, you cannot select PDF or PDF (Multiple
Pages).
Note
•With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Important
•This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
•When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear.
282
JPEG Image Quality
You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.
Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.
Create a PDF file that supports keyword search
Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.
Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
Note
• If text cannot be searched correctly, we recommend that you select 300 dpi or higher for
Resolution.
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
Save to a subfolder with current date
Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Check scan results and specify save settings
Displays the Save Settings dialog box after scanning.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
(3) Application Settings Area
Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.
You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.
283
Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.
You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.
Start OCR
Select this when you want to convert text in the scanned image into text data.
You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Do not start any application
Saves to the folder specified in Save in.
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
284
Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) Dialog Box
Click Save to PC (Auto) on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings (Save
to PC (Auto)) dialog box.
In the Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images to a
computer after scanning them from the operation panel by automatically detecting the item type.
(1) Scan Options Area
(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area
(1) Scan Options Area
Paper Size
Auto is selected.
Resolution
Auto is selected.
Document Scan Orientation Settings...
Click to display the Document Scan Orientation Settings dialog box in which you can set the
orientation of the documents to be scanned from the ADF.
285
Image Processing Settings
Click (Plus) to set the following.
Apply recommended image correction
Applies suitable corrections automatically based on the item type.
Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
(2) Save Settings Area
File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
The default save folders are as follows.
•Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows Vista:
Documents folder
•Windows 8/Windows 7:
My Documents folder
Data Format
Auto is selected. The following data formats are automatically applied according to the item type
when saving.
• Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD, and business cards: JPEG
• Magazines, newspapers, and documents: PDF
286
Important
• The save format may differ depending on how you place the item.
Refer to "Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)" for how to place items.
JPEG Image Quality
You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Create a PDF file that supports keyword search
Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.
Note
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
Save to a subfolder with current date
Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
(3) Application Settings Area
Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.
You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.
Do not start any application
Saves to the folder specified in Save in.
287
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
288
Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box
Click the (General Settings) tab to display the Settings (General Settings) dialog box.
In the Settings (General Settings) dialog box, you can set the product to use, file size restriction on e-mail
attachment, language to detect text in images, and folder in which to save images temporarily.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, some options may not appear.
Product Name
Displays the name of the product that IJ Scan Utility is currently set to use.
If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.
In addition, for network connection, select one with "Network" after the product name.
Note
• With network connection, Select appears on the right side of the product name. Click Select to
display IJ Network Scanner Selector EX from which you can change the scanner to use. Refer to
"Network Scan Settings" for the setting procedure.
E-mail Attachment Size
You can restrict the size of scanned images to be attached to an e-mail.
You can select Small (Suitable for 640 x 480 Windows), Medium (Suitable for 800 x 600 Windows),
Large (Suitable for 1024 x 768 Windows), or No Change.
Document Language
You can select the language for detecting text in images and for use with search when a PDF file that
supports keyword search is created.
289
Folder to Save Temporary Files
Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. Click Browse... to specify the destination
folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
290
Scanning Using Application Software (ScanGear)
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in
Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.
291
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. Use the software to specify the
output size, image corrections, and other settings.
ScanGear can be started from IJ Scan Utility or applications that are compatible with the standard TWAIN
interface. (ScanGear is a TWAIN-compatible driver.)
Features
Specify the document type, output size, and other settings when scanning documents and preview scan
results. Make various correction settings or finely adjust the brightness, contrast, and other parameters to
scan in a specific color tone.
Screens
There are two modes: Basic Mode and Advanced Mode.
Switch modes with the tabs on the upper right of the screen.
Note
• ScanGear starts in the last used mode.
• Settings are not retained when you switch modes.
Basic Mode
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following three simple on-screen steps ( , , and
).
292
Advanced Mode
Use the Advanced Mode tab to scan by specifying the color mode, output resolution, image brightness,
color tone, and other settings.
293
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning. Start
ScanGear from IJ Scan Utility or other applications.
Note
• If you have more than one scanner or have a network compatible model and changed the connection
from USB connection to network connection, set up the network environment.
Starting from IJ Scan Utility
1. Start IJ Scan Utility.
For details search for "Starting IJ Scan Utility" from the top page of the Online Manual for your model.
2. In IJ Scan Utility main screen, click ScanGear.
The ScanGear screen appears.
Starting from Application
The procedure varies depending on the application. For details, see the application's manual.
1. Start application.
2. On application's menu, select machine.
Note
• A machine connected over a network, will have "Network" displayed after the product name.
3. Scan document.
The ScanGear screen appears.
294
Scanning in Basic Mode
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following these simple on-screen steps.
To scan multiple documents at one time from the Platen, see Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
with ScanGear (Scanner Driver).
When scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), preview is not available.
Important
• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly. In that case, click (Thumbnail) on
the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
• Photos with a whitish background
• Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, and other unclear documents
• Thin documents
• Thick documents
• The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly.
• Documents smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square
• Photos that have been cut to irregular shapes
Note
• Both sides of a two sided document can be scanned simultaneously on models with ADF duplex
scanning support.
1. Place document on machine's Platen or ADF, and then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Set Select Source to match your document.
295
Important
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, see the
application's manual.
Note
•To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine (Color).
3. Click Preview.
Preview image appears in the Preview area.
Important
•Preview is not available when scanning from the ADF.
Note
•Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source.
4. Set Destination.
Note
•Skip ahead to Step 7 if an ADF option is selected in Select Source.
5. Set Output Size.
Output size options vary with the selected Destination.
6. Adjust cropping frames (scan areas) as needed.
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frames on the preview image.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
296
7. Set Image corrections as needed.
8. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click (Information) to display a dialog box showing the document type and other details of the
current scan settings.
• How ScanGear behaves after scanning is complete can be set from Status of ScanGear dialog after
scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Related Topic
Basic Mode Tab
297
Basic Mode Tab
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following these simple on-screen steps.
This section describes the settings and functions available on the Basic Mode tab.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Preview Area
Note
• The displayed items vary by document type and view.
• Preview is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
Select Source
Photo (Color)
Scan color photos.
Magazine (Color)
Scan color magazines.
Document (Color)
Scan documents in color.
Document (Grayscale)
Scan documents in black and white.
Document (Color) ADF Simplex
Scan documents from the ADF in color.
Document (Grayscale) ADF Simplex
Scan documents from the ADF in black and white.
Document (Color) ADF Duplex (only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning)
Scan both sides of documents from the ADF in color.
299
Document (Grayscale) ADF Duplex (only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning)
Scan both sides of documents from the ADF in black and white.
Important
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, see the
application's manual.
Note
• When you select a document type, the unsharp mask function will be active.
• When you select an option other than the ADF types, the image adjustment function which
adjusts images based on the document type will also be active.
• When you select Magazine (Color), the descreen function will be active.
Display Preview Image
Preview
Performs a trial scan.
Note
• When using the machine for the first time, scanner calibration starts automatically. Wait a
while until the preview image appears.
Destination
Select what you want to do with the scanned image.
Print
Select this to print the scanned image on a printer.
Image display
Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor.
OCR
Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software.
"OCR software" is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be
edited in word processors and other programs.
300
Output Size
Select an output size.
Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination.
Flexible
Adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) freely.
In thumbnail view:
Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is
displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is
displayed, each frame is scanned individually.
In whole image view:
When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping
frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Paper Size (such as L or A4)
Select an output paper size. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of
the selected paper size. Drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining the
aspect ratio.
Monitor Size (such as 1024 x 768 pixels)
Select an output size in pixels. A cropping frame of the selected monitor size will appear and the
portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. Drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it
while maintaining the aspect ratio.
Add/Delete...
Displays the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box for specifying custom output sizes. This
option can be selected when Destination is Print or Image display.
In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, multiple output sizes can be specified and then
saved at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected,
along with the predefined items.
Adding:
Enter Output Size Name, Width, and Height, and then click Add. For Unit, select inches or
mm if Destination is Print; if it is Image display, only pixels can be selected. The name of the
added size appears in Output Size List. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List.
Deleting:
Select the output size you want to delete in Output Size List, and then click Delete. Click Save
to save the items listed in Output Size List.
301
Important
• Predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels cannot be deleted.
Note
• Save up to 10 items.
• An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the setting range.
Note
• For details on whether or how the cropping frame initially appears on a preview image, see
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in Preview Tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Invert aspect ratio
Available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible.
Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
Adjust cropping frames
Adjust the scan area within the Preview area.
If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
Image corrections
Correct the image to be scanned.
Important
•Apply Auto Document Fix and Correct fading are available when Recommended is selected
on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Note
• Available functions vary by the document type selected in Select Source.
Apply Auto Document Fix
Sharpens text in a document or magazine for better readability.
Important
• Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
• The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.
• Correction may not be applied properly if the scan area is too small.
Correct fading
Corrects photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast.
Reduce gutter shadow
Corrects shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
302
Important
• Be sure to see Gutter Shadow Correction for precautions and other information on using this
function.
Color Pattern...
Adjust the image's overall color. Correct colors that have faded due to colorcast or other reasons
and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Important
• This setting is not available when Color Matching is selected on the Color Settings tab of
the Preferences dialog box.
Perform Scan
Scan
Starts scanning.
Note
• When scanning starts, the progress appears. To cancel the scan, click Cancel.
Preferences...
Displays the Preferences dialog box for making scan/preview settings.
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
(2) Toolbar
Adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
In thumbnail view:
In whole image view:
(Thumbnail) / (Whole Image)
Switches the view in the Preview area.
(3) Preview Area
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
303
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the
Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas
within the cropping frame.
(Check All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the checkboxes of the images in thumbnail view.
(Uncheck All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Deselects the checkboxes of the images in thumbnail view.
(Select All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the images in thumbnail view and outlines them in blue.
(Select All Cropping Frames)
Available when two or more cropping frames are specified.
Turns the cropping frames into thick broken lines and applies the settings to all of them.
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear, along with the document type and other details of the current scan
settings.
(Open Guide)
Opens this page.
(3) Preview Area
This is where a trial image appears after you click Preview. The results of image corrections, color
adjustments, and other settings made in (1) Settings and Operation Buttons are also reflected.
304
When (Thumbnail) is displayed on Toolbar:
Cropping frames are specified according to the document size, and thumbnails of scanned images
appear. Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned.
Note
• When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
• Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
• Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected
Frames simultaneously. To select multiple images, click them while pressing the Ctrl key.
• Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
• Double-click a frame to enlarge the image. Click (Frame Advance) at the bottom of the
screen to display the previous or next frame. Double-click the enlarged frame again to return it to its
original state.
When (Whole Image) is displayed on Toolbar:
Items on the Platen are scanned and appear as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be
scanned.
305
Advanced Mode Tab
This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image
brightness, and color tone.
This section describes the settings and functions available on the Advanced Mode tab.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Preview Area
Note
• The displayed items vary by document type and view.
• The preview function is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
Favorite Settings
You can name and save a group of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings, and
Color Adjustment Buttons) on the Advanced Mode tab, and load it as required. It is convenient to
save a group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly. You can also use this to reload the default
settings.
Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu to open the Add/Delete Favorite Settings dialog box.
307
Enter Setting Name and click Add; the name appears in Favorite Settings List.
When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with
the predefined items.
To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save the settings
displayed in Favorite Settings List.
Note
• You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview.
• Save up to 10 items.
Input Settings
Specify the input settings such as the document type and size.
Output Settings
Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size.
Image Settings
Enable/disable various image correction functions.
Color Adjustment Buttons
Fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones can be made including adjustments to the
image's overall brightness or contrast and adjustments to its highlight and shadow values (histogram)
or balance (tone curve).
Zoom
Zooms in on a frame, or zooms in on the image in the area specified with a cropping frame (scan
area). When zoomed in, Zoom changes to Undo. Click Undo to return the display to its non-
magnified state.
In thumbnail view:
When multiple images are displayed in thumbnail view, clicking this button zooms in on the selected
frame. Click (Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next
frame.
Note
• You can also zoom in on an image by double-clicking the frame. Double-click the enlarged frame
again to return it to its original state.
In whole image view:
Rescans the image in the area specified with a cropping frame at higher magnification.
308
Note
•Zoom rescans the document and displays high-resolution image in Preview.
• (Enlarge/Reduce) on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly. However, the
resolution of the displayed image will be low.
Preview
Performs a trial scan.
Scan
Starts scanning.
Note
• When scanning starts, the progress appears. To cancel the scan, click Cancel.
• When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may appear.
Follow the prompt to complete. For details, refer to Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
in Scan Tab (Preferences dialog box).
• It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain
size. In that case, a warning message appears; it is recommended that you reduce the total size.
To continue, scan in whole image view.
Preferences...
Displays the Preferences dialog box for making scan/preview settings.
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
(2) Toolbar
Adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
309
In thumbnail view:
In whole image view:
(Thumbnail) / (Whole Image)
Switches the view in the Preview area.
(3) Preview Area
(Clear)
Deletes the preview image from the Preview area.
It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings.
(Crop)
Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse.
(Move Image)
Allows you to drag the image until the part you want to see is displayed when an image enlarged in
the Preview area does not fit in the screen. You can also move the image using the scroll bars.
(Enlarge/Reduce)
Allows you to zoom in on the Preview area by clicking the image. Right-click the image to zoom out.
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
•The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
•The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the
Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas
within the cropping frame.
(Check All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the checkboxes of the images in thumbnail view.
310
(Uncheck All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Deselects the checkboxes of the images in thumbnail view.
(Select All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the images in thumbnail view and outlines them in blue.
(Select All Cropping Frames)
Available when two or more cropping frames are specified.
Turns the cropping frames into thick broken lines and applies the settings to all of them.
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear, along with the document type and other details of the current scan
settings.
(Open Guide)
Opens this page.
(3) Preview Area
This is where a trial image appears after you click Preview. The results of image corrections, color
adjustments, and other settings made in (1) Settings and Operation Buttons are also reflected.
When (Thumbnail) is displayed on Toolbar:
Cropping frames are specified according to the document size, and thumbnails of scanned images
appear. Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned.
311
Note
• When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
• Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
• Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected
Frames simultaneously. To select multiple images, click them while pressing the Ctrl key.
• Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
When (Whole Image) is displayed on Toolbar:
Items on the Platen are scanned and appear as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be
scanned.
Note
• Create cropping frame(s) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, one cropping frame can be
created per image. In whole image view, multiple cropping frames can be created.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
Related Topic
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode
312
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using it.
Scanner Driver Restrictions
• When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the
TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons. Contact the computer's
administrator for help.
• Some computers (including laptops) connected to the machine may not resume correctly from
standby mode. In that case, restart the computer.
• Do not connect two or more scanners or multifunction printers with scanner function to the same
computer simultaneously. If multiple scanning devices are connected, you cannot scan from the
operation panel of the machine and also may experience errors while accessing the devices.
• Scanning may fail if the computer has resumed from sleep or standby mode. In that case, follow these
steps and scan again.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Exit ScanGear, then disconnect the USB cable from the computer and reconnect it.
3. Turn on the machine.
• ScanGear cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time. Within an application,
ScanGear cannot be opened for the second time when it is already open.
• Be sure to close the ScanGear window before closing the application.
• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, the machine cannot be
accessed from multiple computers at the same time.
• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, scanning takes longer than
usual.
• Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high
resolutions. For example, at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600
dpi in full-color.
• ScanGear and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time.
• Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scanning.
Applications with Restrictions on Use
• Some applications may not display the TWAIN user interface. In that case, refer to the application's
manual and change the settings accordingly.
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents. In some cases, only
the first scanned image is accepted, or multiple images are scanned as one image. For such
applications, do not scan multiple documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
• To import scanned images into Microsoft Office 2000, first save them using IJ Scan Utility, then import
the saved files from the Insert menu.
• When scanning Platen size images into Microsoft Office 2003 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, etc.), click
Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen. Otherwise, images may not
be scanned correctly.
• When scanning images into Microsoft Office 2007/Microsoft Office 2010 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint,
etc.), use Microsoft Clip Organizer.
313
• Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications. In that case, increase the operating
system's virtual memory and retry.
• When image size is too large (such as when scanning large images at high resolution), your computer
may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0 % depending on the application. In that case,
cancel the action (for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar), then increase the operating
system's virtual memory or reduce the image size/resolution and retry. Alternatively, scan the image
via IJ Scan Utility first, then save and import it into the application.
314
Positioning Originals (Scanning from Computer)
This section describes how to load originals on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) for scanning. If
items are not placed correctly they may not be scanned correctly.
Important
• Do not place objects on the document cover. When you open the document cover, the objects may fall
into your scanner or printer, resulting in malfunction.
• Close the document cover when scanning.
• Do not touch the operation panel buttons or LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) when opening/closing the
document cover. May result in unintended operation.
Placing Items (Platen)
Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))
Placing Items (Platen)
Place items as described below to scan by detecting the item type and size automatically.
Important
• When scanning by specifying the paper size in IJ Scan Utility or ScanGear (scanner driver), align an
upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen.
• Photos that have been cut to irregular shapes and items smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square
cannot be cropped accurately when scanning.
• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.
Photos, Postcards, Business Cards, and BD/DVD/CD Magazines, Newspapers, and Documents
Single item:
Place the item face-down on the platen, with 0.4 inch (1 cm)
or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of
the platen and the item. Portions placed on the diagonally
striped area cannot be scanned.
Place the item face-down on the platen and align an
upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow
(alignment mark) of the platen. Portions placed on
the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
315
Important
•Large items (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be
placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of
the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a for-
mat other than PDF, scan by specifying the data format.
Multiple items:
Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (di-
agonally striped area) of the platen and items, and between
items. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot
be scanned.
0.4 inch (1 cm) or more
Note
• Place up to 12 items.
• Positions of slanted items (10 degrees or less) are cor-
rected automatically.
Important
•For the portions in which items cannot be scan-
ned, see Loading Originals.
Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))
Important
• Do not leave thick items on the platen when scanning from the ADF. May result in paper jam.
• Place and align documents of the same size when scanning two or more documents.
• For supported document sizes when scanning from the ADF, see Supported Originals.
1. Open document tray.
2. Place documents on ADF, and then adjust document guides to width of documents.
Insert the documents face-up until a beep sounds.
316
317
Network Scan Settings
You can connect your scanner or printer to a network to share it among multiple computers or scan images
into a specified computer.
Important
• Multiple users cannot scan at the same time.
Note
• Complete the network settings of your scanner or printer beforehand from the Setup CD-ROM or by
following the instructions our website.
• With network connection, scanning takes longer than USB connection.
Complete the following settings to enable scanning over a network.
Specifying Your Scanner or Printer
Use IJ Network Scanner Selector EX to specify the scanner you want to use. By specifying the scanner,
you can scan over a network from your computer or the operation panel.
Important
• If the product you want to use is changed with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, the product used for
scanning with IJ Scan Utility changes as well. The product for scanning from the operation panel also
changes.
If your scanner or printer is not selected in IJ Scan Utility, check that it is selected with IJ Network
Scanner Selector EX.
Refer to "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 Menu and Setting Screen" for your model from Home of
the Online Manual for details.
• To scan from the operation panel, specify your scanner or printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector
EX beforehand.
1. Check that IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running.
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2) appears in the
notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.
Note
•If the icon is not displayed in the notification area on the desktop, follow the procedure below to
start.
•Windows 10:
From the Start menu, click All apps > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner Selector
EX2.
•Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
Click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 on the Start screen.
318
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 is not displayed on the Start screen, select the
Search charm, then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX".
•Windows 7/Windows Vista:
From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX2 > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2.
The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen
appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3.
2. In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2),
then select Settings....
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears.
3. Select your scanner or printer from Scanners.
Normally, the MAC address of your scanner or printer is already selected after the network setup. In
that case, you do not need to select it again.
Important
• If multiple scanners exist on the network, multiple model names appear. In that case, you can
select one scanner per model.
4. Click OK.
Note
• The scanner selected in the Scan-from-PC Settings screen will be automatically selected in the Scan-
from-Operation-Panel Settings screen as well.
Setting for Scanning with IJ Scan Utility
To scan from IJ Scan Utility using a scanner or printer connected to a network, specify your scanner or
printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, then follow the steps below to change the connection status
between it and the computer.
1. Start IJ Scan Utility.
2. Select "Canon XXX series Network" (where "XXX" is the model name) for Product
Name.
3. Click Settings... to use another scanner connected to a network.
4. Click (General Settings), then click Select in Product Name.
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen of IJ Network Scanner Selector EX appears.
319
Select the scanner you want to use and click OK.
5. In the Settings (General Settings) dialog box, click OK.
The IJ Scan Utility main screen reappears. You can scan via a network connection.
Setting for Scanning from the Operation Panel
You can make the setting for scanning from the operation panel.
Important
• Set IJ Scan Utility to use your scanner or printer via a network connection beforehand.
Setting for Scanning with IJ Scan Utility
1. Check that IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running.
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2) appears in the
notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.
Note
• If the icon is not displayed in the notification area on the desktop, follow the procedure below to
start.
•Windows 10:
From the Start menu, click All apps > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner Selector
EX2.
•Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
Click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 on the Start screen.
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2 is not displayed on the Start screen, select the
Search charm, then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX".
•Windows 7/Windows Vista:
From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX2 > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2.
The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen
appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3.
2. In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX2),
then select Settings....
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears.
3. Click Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings.
The Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings screen appears.
320
4. Select your scanner or printer from Scanners and click OK.
Select the MAC address of your scanner or printer.
Note
• When multiple scanners are connected via a network, you can select up to three scanners.
5. In the Scan-from-PC Settings screen, click OK.
Note
• If your scanner or printer does not appear, check the following, click OK to close the screen, then
reopen it and try selecting again.
• MP Drivers is installed
• Network settings of your scanner or printer is completed after installing the MP Drivers
• Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled
If the problem is still not solved, see Network Communication Problems.
321
Forwarding Scanned Data to Computer Using Operation Panel
Before forwarding scanned data to the computer, check the following:
•MP Drivers are installed. (Windows)
If MP Drivers are not yet installed, install MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from the
Canon website.
•The scanner driver is installed. (Mac OS)
If the scanner driver is not yet installed, install the scanner driver from the Canon website.
•The printer is connected to a computer correctly.
Make sure the printer is connected to the computer correctly.
Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the printer is in operation, or when the computer is in the
sleep or standby mode.
If you perform scanning via a network connection, make sure all the required settings have been
specified.
◦ For Windows:
Network Scan Settings
◦ For Mac OS:
Network Scan Settings
•The destination and the file name are specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility.
You can specify the destination and the file name in Canon IJ Scan Utility. For more on settings of
Canon IJ Scan Utility:
◦ For Windows:
Settings Dialog Box
◦ For Mac OS:
Settings Dialog
For Mac OS X 10.11, starting Canon IJ Scan Utility is required to forward the scanned data to your
computer.
Follow the procedure below to forward scanned data to the computer.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the SCAN button.
If you forward the scanned data to a computer for the first time, the Scan menu screen is displayed. Go
to step 3.
If you have forwarded the scanned data to a computer, the Scan standby screen is displayed.
323
* The Scan standby screen for USB-connected computer
If you change the destination or scan settings, press the Menu button, then go to step 3.
Go to step 8 if you do not change the destination or scan settings.
3. Select Save to and then press the OK button.
4. Select the computer to forward the scanned data and then press the OK button.
If you forward the data to the USB-connected computer, select Local (USB).
If you forward the data to the LAN-connected computer, select a name of the computer to forward the
scanned data.
Note
•If you select Search again and press the OK button, the printer starts searching for the connected
computers again.
•When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD (one of the network protocols
supported in Windows), select Active for WSD scan from dev. on WSD setting on Common
settings in LAN settings under Device settings.
WSD setting
5. Make sure that Document type is selected and then press the OK button.
6. Select a document type and then press the OK button.
Note
•When you forward the scanned data to the computer searched using WSD, you cannot select the
document type.
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
Auto scan
The printer detects the type of the originals automatically and the image is forwarded in the
optimized size, resolution and data format.
Important
•Load originals properly according to their type; otherwise, some originals may not be scanned
properly.
For details on how to load the original:
Loading Originals
•The following items can be scanned:
Photos, postcards, visiting cards, magazines, newspapers, documents, BD/DVD/CDs
•The following items cannot be scanned properly.
324
• A4 sized photos
• Documents smaller than 5 inches x 7 inches (127 mm x 178 mm) such as a paperback with its
backbone cut off
• Originals on thin white paper
•Long and narrow originals such as panoramic photographs
• When you scan originals from the ADF, it may take longer to scan the first page.
Document
Scans the original on the platen glass or in the ADF applying the optimized settings for scanning a
document.
Photo
Scans the original on the platen glass as a photo data applying the optimized settings for scanning a
photo.
7. Specify the scan settings.
Specify each scan setting in order.
Use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.
Use the button to adjust each setting item, then press the OK button. The next setting item is
displayed.
Note
• For details on each setting item:
Setting Items for Scanning Using Operation Panel
•Go to step 8 when Auto scan is selected for Document type.
The Scan standby screen is displayed after all the settings have been specified.
8. Load the original document on the platen glass or in the ADF.
9. Press the Color button for color scanning, or the Black button for black & white scanning.
Note
•When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD, press the Color button.
•If the original is not loaded properly, a message is displayed on the LCD. Load the original on the
platen glass or in the ADF according to the scan settings.
•If you load the original in the ADF:
The printer starts scanning and scanned data is forwarded to the computer.
325
•If you load the original on the platen glass:
◦ When you select JPEG or TIFF for Data format, the printer starts scanning and scanned data
is forwarded to the computer.
◦ When you select PDF or Compact PDF for Data format, the confirmation screen asking you if
you continue scanning is displayed after scanning is complete.
Selecting Yes and pressing the OK button allow you to scan the originals continuously. Load
the next document on the platen glass and start scanning.
By selecting No and pressing the OK button, scanning is complete and the data is forwarded
to the computer in one PDF file.
Scanned data is forwarded to the computer according to the settings specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility.
Remove the original on the platen glass or from the document output slot after scanning is complete.
Important
•If the scanning result with Auto scan is not satisfactory, select Document or Photo according to
the original in step 6, then specify the scan size or other setting items in step 7.
If program selection screen appears (Windows):
The program selection screen may be displayed after pressing the Start button. In this case, select
Canon IJ Scan Utility and click OK.
If you want to scan originals with advanced settings, or if you want to edit
or print scanned images:
If you scan originals from a computer using My Image Garden, My Image Garden enables you to edit the
scanned images, such as optimizing or trimming.
In addition, you can edit or print the scanned images using the compatible application software to make
better use of them.
• For Windows:
Scanning Photos and Documents
• For Mac OS:
Scanning Photos and Documents
Note
• For Windows:
• You can use a WIA-compliant application software to scan originals with this printer.
For details:
Other Scanning Methods
• If you want to convert a scanned document to text:
Extracting Text from Scanned Images (OCR)
326
Setting Items for Scanning Using Operation Panel
You can change the scan settings such as the scan size, resolution, or data format.
Use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.
Use the button to adjust each setting item, then press the OK button. The next setting item is
displayed.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
• The scan setting cannot be specified under the following conditions:
• When Auto scan is selected for Document type to forward the scanned data to the computer
• When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD (one of the network protocols
supported in Windows)
• Some setting items cannot be specified in combination with other setting items, the document type, or
the destination to save the data.
• The settings of the scan size, resolution, and data format are retained even if the printer is turned off.
• When you forward the scanned data to the computer or attach the data to an e-mail, you can specify
the destination and file name using Canon IJ Scan Utility.
• For Windows:
Settings Dialog Box
• For Mac OS:
Settings Dialog
• If you scan originals from the computer, you can scan with advanced settings. For more on scanning
from the computer:
• For Windows:
Scanning Photos and Documents
• For Mac OS:
Scanning Photos and Documents
•Scan size
Select the size of the original.
Ex:
If you select Auto scan(A) -Singl, the printer detects the page size automatically and starts scanning.
If you select Auto scan(A) -Multi to save to the computer, you can scan several originals at a time.
Note
• When Legal is selected, load the original in the ADF.
327
• When 4"x6", 10x15, 5"x7", 13x18, or Auto scan(A) -Singl is selected, load the original on the
platen glass.
• Some of setting items are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.
•Data format
Select the data format of the scanned data.
Ex:
•Scan resolution
Select the resolution for scanning.
Ex:
328
Preparing for Faxing
Connect the printer to the telephone line and set up the printer before using the faxing functions. Then
specify the basic setting such as sender information, date/time, and daylight saving time.
Important
• If the Power Disconnects:
If there is a power failure or if you accidentally unplug the power cord, the date/time settings will be
reset.
• The settings for user information and directory will be retained.
• All faxes stored in the printer's memory, such as unsent and received faxes, will be lost.
If the power disconnects, the following will apply:
• You will not be able to send or receive faxes, make copies, or scan originals.
• When you are connecting the telephone, whether or not you can use it depends upon your
telephone line or telephone.
Setting Up Printer
The printer must be set up depending on your telephone line and use of the faxing function.
All Setup
Setting Up the FAX
Individual Setup
1. Connecting Telephone Line
2. Setting Telephone Line Type
3. Setting Receive Mode
4. Setting Sender Information
Note
• You can set the fax setting according to the instruction on the LCD.
Easy setup
329
Connecting Telephone Line
The connection method differs depending on your telephone line.
• If you connect the printer to wall telephone line directly/If you connect the printer with the xDSL splitter:
Basic Connection (Connecting with General Telephone line)
• If you connect the printer to another line such as an xDSL:
Connecting Various Lines
If the connection is incorrect, the printer cannot send/receive faxes. Connect the printer correctly.
Important
• Do not connect fax devices and/or telephones in parallel (US and Canada only).
If two or more fax devices and/or telephones are connected in parallel, the following problems may
occur and the printer may not operate properly.
• If you pick up the handset of the telephone that is connected in parallel during fax transmission or
reception, the fax image may be corrupted or a communication error may occur.
• Such services as Caller ID, etc. may not operate properly on the telephone.
If you cannot avoid parallel connections, set the receive mode to TEL priority mode, understanding
that the above problems may occur. You will only be able to receive faxes manually.
Basic Connection (Connecting with General Telephone line)
Make sure that the printer is turned off, connect one end of supplied telephone line cable to the telephone
line jack near the "LINE" mark of the printer, then connect the other end to the telephone line jack on the
wall or to the telephone line jack of the xDSL splitter.
When you connect the telephone to the printer, make sure that the printer is turned off, connect one end
of the modular cable to the external device jack near the "EXT." mark of the printer, then connect the other
end to the telephone line jack of the telephone.
330
Important
• Be sure to connect the telephone line before the printer is turned on.
If you connect the telephone line when the printer is turned on, turn the printer off and unplug the
power cord. Wait for 1 minute then connect the telephone line and power plug.
Note
• Refer to Rear View for the position of the telephone line jack and the external device jack.
• Before connecting a telephone or answering machine, remove the Telephone connector cap.
•For users in the UK:
If the connector of the external device cannot be connected to the jack on the printer, you will need to
purchase a B.T. adapter to connect as follows:
Attach the B.T. adapter to the modular cable connecting the external device, then connect the B.T.
adapter to the external device jack.
Connecting Various Lines
This section introduces how to connect various lines.
These are examples and could not be guaranteed to suit every connecting condition. For details, refer to
the instruction manual supplied with the network device (control devices such as an xDSL (Digital
Subscriber Line) modem or terminal adapter) you are connecting to this printer.
Note
• xDSL is the generic term for the high speed digital communication technology with telephone line
such as ADSL/HDSL/SDSL/VDSL.
331
•Connecting to an Internet Telephone
A. Digital Subscriber Line
B. xDSL modem (splitter may not be built-in to the modem)
C. Broadband router compatible with Internet Telephone
D. Computer
E. Telephone or answering machine
F. WAN (Wide Area Network) port
G. LAN (Local Area Network) port
H. TEL port
I. LINE port
* Port configurations and names may vary depending on the product.
Note
• When connecting to the xDSL line, select the same line type as you are subscribing to in
Telephone line type.
Setting Telephone Line Type
•Connecting to an xDSL
A. Analog Subscriber Line
B. xDSL modem (splitter may not be built-in to the modem)
C. Computer
D. Telephone or answering machine
Important
• When the splitter is not built-in to the modem, do not branch the telephone line before the splitter
(wall side). And also, do not connect splitters in parallel. The printer may not be able to operate
properly.
332
Note
• When connecting to the xDSL line, select the same line type as you are subscribing to in
Telephone line type.
Setting Telephone Line Type
•Connecting to an ISDN Line
For details on ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network) connection and settings, refer to the manuals
supplied with your terminal adapter or dial-up router.
333
Setting Telephone Line Type
Before using your printer, make sure you set the correct telephone line type for your telephone line. If you
are unsure of your telephone line type, contact your telephone company. For xDSL or ISDN connections,
contact the telephone company or service provider to confirm your line type.
Important
•For users in China
After plugging the power cord and turning on the printer, the telephone line type is selected
automatically. However, if the printer is connected to the control device such as an xDSL modem or
terminal adapter, the telephone line type may not be selected correctly.
In this case, set the line type manually.
For details on how to set the Telephone line type manually in China:
Setting the Telephone Line Type Manually in China
Note
•Telephone line type will not appear in countries or regions where Rotary pulse is not supported.
• You can print USER'S DATA LIST to check the current setting.
Summary of Reports and Lists
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Select FAX user settings, then press the OK button.
5. Select Telephone line type, then press the OK button.
6. Select a telephone line type, then press the OK button.
Rotary pulse
Select when your telephone line type is pulse dialing.
Touch tone
Select when your telephone line type is tone dialing.
Note
•The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
7. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.
334
Setting the Telephone Line Type Manually in China
This section describes the procedure to set the telephone line type manually in China.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Select FAX user settings, then press the OK button.
5. Select TEL line auto select, then press the OK button.
The current telephone line type is displayed.
Note
• If you do not need to change the telephone line type, press the FAX button to return to the Fax
standby screen.
6. Select OFF, then press the OK button.
7. Select a telephone line type, then press the OK button.
Rotary pulse
Select when your telephone line type is pulse dialing.
Touch tone
Select when your telephone line type is tone dialing.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
8. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.
335
Setting Receive Mode
Set the receiving operation (receiving mode).
For details on how to set the receive mode:
Setting Receive Mode
You can select the appropriate mode.
For details on the selectable receive mode:
About Receive Mode
For details on the advanced settings of the receive mode:
Advanced Settings of Receive Mode
Note
• The receiving operation procedure varies depending on the selected receive mode.
For details on receiving method depending on each receive mode:
Receiving Faxes
• If you want to use a single telephone line for faxes and voice calls, you need to connect a telephone or
an answering machine to the external device jack of this printer.
For details on how to connect the telephone or the answering machine to the printer:
Basic Connection (Connecting with General Telephone line)
Setting Receive Mode
This section describes the procedure to select the receive mode.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
3. Press the Menu button.
The FAX menu screen is displayed.
4. Select Receive mode set., then press the OK button.
5. Select the receive mode, then press the OK button.
Note
•The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
•For details on the receive mode:
About Receive Mode
•DRPD is available only in the US and Canada.
336
•Network switch may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
• Refer to Receiving Faxes for information on receiving faxes or the procedure for each receive
mode.
About Receive Mode
You can select the receive mode suitable for your fax use conditions: whether you use a dedicated line for
fax, etc.
Receive
mode
Your fax use condition Receiving operation
TEL priori-
ty mode
When mainly receiving voice
calls (with a telephone or an-
swering machine connected
to the printer):
When a call incomes, the telephone will ring.
Pick up the handset.
If the call is a voice call, talk on the telephone.
If the call is a fax, hang up the handset after the printer starts receiving
the fax.
Note
•The telephone may not ring when a call incomes even if it is con-
nected to the printer, depending on the type or settings of the tele-
phone.
DRPD or
Network
switch
When receiving voice calls
(with a telephone or answer-
ing machine connected to the
printer) and subscribing to a
ring pattern detection service
provided by your telephone
company:
When a call incomes, the telephone will ring. The printer detects a fax
call by the fax ring pattern.
If the call is a fax, the printer will receive the fax automatically.
If the printer does not detect the fax ring pattern, the telephone will
continue ringing.
Note
•The telephone may not ring when a call incomes even if it is con-
nected to the printer, depending on the type or settings of the tele-
phone.
Fax only
mode
When not receiving voice
calls:
When a fax incomes, the printer will receive the fax automatically.
Advanced Settings of Receive Mode
You can specify the advanced settings of each receive mode.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
•Advanced setting in TEL priority mode
You can specify the following setting items.
◦Manual/auto switch
337
If you select ON, the printer automatically receives faxes after the external device rang a specified
length of time.
You can specify the length of time until automatic reception is started.
◦User-friendly RX
If you select ON, the printer automatically switches from telephone calling to fax reception by
detecting the fax signal (CNG signal) when you lift the handset of the telephone or the answering
machine answers. When you have an answering machine connected to the printer, select ON to
switch to fax reception automatically after the answering machine answers.
If you select OFF, the printer does not switch from telephone calling to fax reception automatically
even if the printer detects the fax signal (CNG signal). Select OFF if you want the printer not to
switch automatically during a call.
Note
• If you subscribe to Duplex Ringing service in Hong Kong, the number of times the external device
rings specified with Incoming ring in Fax only mode is available in TEL priority mode.
If you want to specify the number of times the external device rings in TEL priority mode, select
Fax only mode for Receive mode set. under FAX menu, specify the number of times the
external device rings with Incoming ring, then switch to TEL priority mode for Receive mode
set..
• If you subscribe to Duplex Ringing service in Hong Kong, we recommend that Manual/auto
switch be set to OFF.
•Advanced setting in Fax only mode
You can specify the following setting item.
◦Incoming ring
You can specify the number of times the external device rings when incoming.
•Advanced setting in DRPD
You can specify the following setting items.
◦DRPD: FAX ring pat.
Sets the distinctive ring pattern of a call that the printer assumes is a fax call.
If you subscribe to a DRPD service, set the ring pattern to match the pattern assigned by your
telephone company.
Setting the DRPD Ring Pattern (US and Canada only)
◦Incoming ring
You can specify the number of times the external device rings when incoming.
•Advanced setting in Network switch
You can specify the following setting item.
◦Incoming ring
You can specify the number of times the external device rings when incoming.
338
Setting the DRPD Ring Pattern (US and Canada only)
If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone
company, your telephone company will assign two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring
patterns to your single telephone line, allowing you to have different numbers for fax calls and voice calls
using only one telephone line. Your printer will automatically monitor the ring pattern, and will
automatically receive the fax if the ring pattern is a fax call.
To use DRPD, follow the procedure below to set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by
your telephone company.
Note
• Contact your local telephone company for detailed information on this service.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
3. Press the Menu button.
The FAX menu screen is displayed.
4. Select Receive mode set., then press the OK button.
5. Select DRPD, then press the OK button.
The confirmation screen asking whether to make advanced settings is displayed.
6. Select Yes, then press the OK button.
7. Select DRPD: FAX ring pat., then press the OK button.
The DRPD: FAX ring pat. screen is displayed.
8. Select the ring pattern that your telephone company assigned to your fax number, then
press the OK button.
Select from Normal ring, Double ring, Short-short-long, or Short-long-short.
Note
•The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
9. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.
339
Setting Sender Information
You can set the sender information such as date/time, unit name, and unit fax/telephone number.
About Sender Information
Setting Date and Time
Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)
Registering User Information
About Sender Information
If the unit name and unit fax/telephone number are registered, they are printed with date and time as
sender information on the recipient's fax.
A. Date and time of transmission
B. Unit fax/telephone number
C. Unit name
D. The registered recipient's name is printed when sending faxes.
E. Page number
Note
• You can print USER'S DATA LIST to confirm the sender information you have registered.
Summary of Reports and Lists
• When sending faxes in black & white, you can select whether to print the sender information inside or
outside the image area.
Specify the setting on TTI position in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.
Adv. FAX settings
• You can select the date print format from three formats: YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, and DD/MM/
YYYY.
Select the date print format on Date display format under Dev. user settings.
Dev. user settings
340
Setting Date and Time
This section describes the procedure to set the date and time.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Select Device settings, then press the OK button.
4. Select Dev. user settings, then press the OK button.
5. Select Date/time setting, then press the OK button.
6. Set the date and time.
Use the button to move the cursor under the desired position, then use the Numeric buttons to
enter the date and time.
Enter the date and time in 24-hour format.
Enter only the last two digits of the year.
7. Press the OK button.
8. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.
Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)
Some countries adopt the daylight saving time (summer time) system that shifts the clock time forward at
certain periods of the year.
You can set your printer to automatically change the time by registering the date and time that daylight
saving time (summer time) begins and ends.
Important
• Not all the latest information of all countries or regions is applied for DST setting by default. You
need to change the default setting according to the latest information of your country or region.
Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
341
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Select Device settings, then press the OK button.
4. Select Dev. user settings, then press the OK button.
5. Select DST setting, then press the OK button.
6. Select ON, then press the OK button.
To disable summer time, select OFF.
7. Set the date and time when summer time starts.
1. Select Start date/time, then press the OK button.
2. Make sure that Set month is selected, then press the OK button.
3. Select the month when summer time starts, then press the OK button.
4. Make sure that Set week is selected, then press the OK button.
5. Select the week when summer time starts, then press the OK button.
6. Make sure that Set day of week is selected, then press the OK button.
7. Select the day of the week when summer time starts, then press the OK button.
8. Make sure that Set shift time is selected, then press the OK button.
9. Use the button to move the cursor under the desired position, use the Numeric buttons to
enter the time (in 24-hour format) when summer time starts, then press the OK button.
Precede single digits with a zero.
8. Set the date and time when summer time ends.
1. Use the button to select End date/time, then press the OK button.
2. Make sure that Set month is selected, then press the OK button.
3. Use the button to select the month when summer time ends, then press the OK button.
4. Make sure that Set week is selected, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select the week when summer time ends, then press the OK button.
6. Make sure that Set day of week is selected, then press the OK button.
7. Use the button to select the day of the week when summer time ends, then press the OK
button.
8. Make sure that Set shift time is selected, then press the OK button.
342
9. Use the button to move the cursor under the desired position, use the Numeric buttons to
enter the time (in 24-hour format) when summer time ends, then press the OK button.
Precede single digits with a zero.
9. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.
Registering User Information
This section describes the procedure to register the user information.
Note
• Before sending a fax, be sure to enter your name and fax/telephone number in Unit TEL no. registr.
and Unit name registr. on the FAX user settings screen (for US only).
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Select FAX user settings, then press the OK button.
5. Enter the unit fax/telephone number.
1. Make sure that Unit TEL no. registr. is selected, then press the OK button.
2. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the unit fax/telephone number.
3. Press the OK button.
Note
•You can enter the fax/telephone number up to 20 digits, including spaces.
•For details on how to enter or delete characters:
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
6. Enter the unit name.
1. Make sure that Unit name registr. is selected, then press the OK button.
2. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the unit name.
343
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number
This section describes dialing and sending faxes directly by entering the fax/telephone numbers.
Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone.
Sending Fax after Speaking on Telephone
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
3. Load documents on the platen glass or in the ADF.
Important
• When sending a double-sided document, load the document on the platen glass. Double-sided
documents cannot be automatically scanned and sent from the ADF.
Note
• For details on the types, conditions of document, and how to load the document:
Loading Originals
4. Adjust the scan contrast and resolution as necessary.
Setting Items for Sending Faxes
5. Use the Numeric buttons to dial the recipient's fax/telephone number.
Use the following buttons to dial the recipient's fax/telephone number.
Numeric buttons:
Enters the number.
button:
Enters a space.
button:
Deletes the last character you entered.
346
button:
By pressing this button once, "#" is entered. By pressing this button one more time, "P" is entered.
6. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white
transmission.
The printer starts scanning the document.
Important
•Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax device supports color faxing.
•Do not open the document cover until scanning is completed.
7. Start sending.
•If you load the document in the ADF:
The printer scans the document automatically and starts sending the fax.
Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress,
Close the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the
OK button, the remaining documents are automatically ejected.
•If you load the document on the platen glass:
After scanning the document, the confirmation screen asking you if you load the next document is
displayed.
To send the scanned document, press the OK button to start sending it.
To send two or more pages, follow the message to load the next page, and press the Color or
Black button. After scanning all pages, press the OK button to start sending.
Note
•To cancel sending the fax, press the Stop button.
Note
• When your printer is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) system, refer to the operating
instructions of the system for details on dialing the recipient's fax/telephone number.
• In case the printer was not able to send a fax, such as when the recipient's line was busy, it has the
function to automatically redial the number after a specified interval. Automatic redialing is enabled by
default.
Automatic Redialing
• Unsent documents, such as those pending redial, are stored in the printer's memory. They are not
stored in the case of a sending error.
Document Stored in Printer's Memory
347
• Do not unplug the power cord until all documents are sent. If you unplug the power cord, all unsent
documents stored in the printer's memory are lost.
348
Resending Faxes (Redialing Busy Number)
There are two methods of redialing: Automatic redialing and Manual redialing.
• Automatic Redialing
If you send a document and the recipient's line is busy, the printer will redial the number after a specified
interval.
Automatic Redialing
• Manual Redialing
You can redial to the recipients dialed using the Numeric buttons.
Manual Redialing
Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone.
Sending Fax after Speaking on Telephone
Note
• Automatic redialing is enabled by default.
• For details on the basic sending operations:
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number
Automatic Redialing
You can enable or disable automatic redialing. If you enable automatic redialing, you can specify the
maximum number of redial attempts and the length of time the printer waits between redial attempts.
Enable and specify the automatic redialing setting on Auto redial in Adv. FAX settings under Fax
settings.
Adv. FAX settings
Important
•While automatic redialing, the unsent fax is stored in the printer's memory temporarily until the
sending fax is complete. If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord before automatic
redialing is complete, all faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted and not sent.
Note
•To cancel automatic redialing, wait until the printer starts redialing, then press the Stop button.
•To cancel automatic redialing, delete the unsent fax from the printer's memory while the printer is on-
standby for a redial operation. For details, see Deleting Document in Printer's Memory.
349
Manual Redialing
Follow the procedure below for manual redialing.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
3. Load documents on the platen glass or in the ADF.
4. Adjust the scan contrast and resolution as necessary.
Setting Items for Sending Faxes
5. Press the Menu button.
The FAX menu screen is displayed.
6. Select Redial, then press the OK button.
The Redial screen is displayed.
7. Select the recipient's number to redial, then press the OK button.
8. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white
transmission.
Important
•Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax device supports color faxing.
Note
• For manual redialing, the printer memorizes up to 10 recent recipients dialed by entering the fax/
telephone numbers. Note that the printer does not memorize any recipients dialed using the redial
function or selecting from the directory.
• To cancel manual redialing, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Close
the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK button, the
remaining documents are automatically ejected.
350
Setting Items for Sending Faxes
If you select FAX TX settings after pressing the Menu button on the Fax standby screen, you can specify
the settings of the scan contrast and the scan resolution.
Adjust the scan contrast and resolution following the procedure below.
1. Press the Menu button on the Fax standby screen.
The FAX menu screen is displayed.
2. Select FAX TX settings, then press the OK button.
3. Select Scan contrast, then press the OK button.
The Scan contrast screen is displayed.
4. Select the scan contrast, then press the OK button.
The button decreases the scan contrast, and the button increases the scan contrast.
By pressing the OK button, the LCD returns to the FAX TX settings screen.
5. Select Scan resolution, then press the OK button.
The Scan resolution screen is displayed.
6. Select the scan resolution.
The following settings are selectable on Scan resolution.
Standard
Suitable for text-only documents.
Fine
Suitable for fine-print documents.
Extra fine
Suitable for detailed illustration or fine-print quality documents.
If the recipient's fax device is not compatible with Extra fine (300 x 300 dpi), the fax will be sent in
the Standard or Fine resolution.
Photo
Suitable for photographs.
Note
•The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
351
• When sending a color fax, documents are always scanned in the same resolution (200 x 200 dpi).
The image quality (compression rate) is determined by which scan resolution is selected, except
that Extra fine and Photo provide the same image quality.
7. Press the OK button.
The LCD returns to the Fax standby screen.
352
Registering Recipients Using Operation Panel of Printer
Registering recipients in the printer's directory in advance allows you to dial fax/telephone numbers simply.
The following methods to register are available:
• Recipient registration
Registering the recipient's fax/telephone number and name allows you to send a fax by selecting a
registered recipient in the printer directory.
Registering Fax/Telephone Number of Recipients
• Group dial registration
You can combine two or more recipients registered in advance into a group. You can send the same
document to all the registered recipients in the group.
Registering Recipients in Group Dial
You can register up to 20 recipients in total of individual recipients and group dials.
Note
• To change the registered information of the recipient or the group dial, see Changing Registered
Information.
• To delete the registered information of the recipient or the group dial, see Deleting Registered
Information.
• To print a list of the recipient's fax/telephone numbers and names registered, see Printing List of
Registered Destinations.
• You can register, change, or delete the registered information of the recipient or the group dial using
Speed Dial Utility on the computer.
• For Windows:
Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility2 (Windows)
• For Mac OS:
Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility2 (Mac OS)
354
Registering Fax/Telephone Number of Recipients
Before you can use the printer's directory, you need to register the recipients' fax/telephone numbers. Follow
the procedure below to register the recipients' fax/telephone numbers.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
3. Press the Menu button.
The FAX menu screen is displayed.
4. Select Directory, then press the OK button.
5. Select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.
Note
• You can select Add directory entry from TEL no. registration in Fax settings after pressing the
Setup button.
6. Select Recipient, then press the OK button.
The screen to select an ID number is displayed.
7. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an unregistered ID number, then press
the OK button.
Note
• If you already registered the recipient, the fax/telephone number is displayed next to the ID
number. If you already registered the group dial, (Not available) is displayed.
8. Select a registration method, then press the OK button.
9. Register the recipients' fax/telephone number.
Register the recipients' fax/telephone number depending on the registration method selected.
•From call log (OUT)
When you select this registration method, the screen to select the fax/telephone number from the
outgoing call logs is displayed.
355
1. Select a fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.
The fax/telephone number selected from the outgoing call logs is displayed.
2. Check the fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.
The fax/telephone number is registered to the printer and the screen to enter the recipient's
name is displayed. Go to next step.
•From call log (IN)
When you select this registration method, the screen to select the fax/telephone number or the
name from the incoming call logs is displayed.
1. Select a fax/telephone number or a name, then press the OK button.
The fax/telephone number selected from the incoming call logs is displayed.
2. Check the fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.
The fax/telephone number is registered to the printer and the screen to enter the recipient's
name is displayed. Go to next step.
Note
• This registration method may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
•Direct entry
When you select this registration method, the screen to enter the fax/telephone number is
displayed.
1. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the fax/telephone number you want to register.
2. Press the OK button.
The fax/telephone number is registered to the printer and the screen to enter the recipient's
name is displayed. Go to next step.
Note
•You can enter the fax/telephone number up to 60 digits (40 digits for the US, Canada,
Korea and some regions of Latin America), including spaces.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
•Press the button twice to enter a pause.
•When Telephone line type in FAX user settings under Fax settings is set to Rotary
pulse, you can enter a tone ("T") by pressing the Tone button.
10. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the recipient's name.
356
If you select a name on From call log (IN) in step 9, the name may be already entered. If you do not
change the name, go to step 11.
Note
• You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
11. Press the OK button to finalize registration.
Note
•To register another recipient's number and name, select an unregistered ID number and operate
in the same procedure.
•To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.
•You can check the recipient's numbers and names you have registered by printing RECIPIENT
TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST.
Printing List of Registered Destinations
357
Registering Recipients in Group Dial
If you register two or more registered recipients to a group dial, you can send the same document
successively to all recipients registered to the group dial.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
3. Press the Menu button.
The FAX menu screen is displayed.
4. Select Directory, then press the OK button.
5. Select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.
Note
• You can select Add directory entry from TEL no. registration in Fax settings after pressing the
Setup button.
6. Select Group dial, then press the OK button.
The screen to select an ID number is displayed.
7. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an unregistered ID number, then press
the OK button.
Note
• If you already registered the recipient, (Not available) is displayed next to the ID number. If you
already registered the group dial, the registered group name is displayed.
The Group member screen is displayed.
8. Register the registered recipient as a member of the group dial.
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Choose a recipient to register as a member.
358
You can choose a recipient with the two methods. The method can be switched by pressing the
button.
• When Add to group is displayed on the LCD:
Use the button to select a recipient's ID number to register to the group dial.
•When Enter first letter is displayed on the LCD:
After you use the Numeric buttons to enter the first letter of the recipient's name you want to
search, the registered recipients are displayed in alphabetical order.
Use the button to select a recipient's ID number to register to the group dial.
3. Press the OK button.
The selected recipient is registered as a member of the group dial.
4. Press the Menu button to display the screen to select an ID number, then add another member.
Repeat this step to register the other recipient to the same group dial.
Note
• You can check the recipient's ID number and name registered to the group dial by using the
button.
9. Press the OK button after finishing registering the member you want to register to the group
dial.
The screen to enter the group name is displayed.
10. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the group name.
Note
•You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
359
11. Press the OK button to finalize registration.
Note
•To register another group, select an unregistered ID number and operate in the same procedure.
• To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.
•You can check the recipients you have registered to the group dial by printing GROUP DIAL
TELEPHONE NO. LIST.
Printing List of Registered Destinations
360
Changing Registered Information
To change information registered for recipient and group dial, follow the procedure below.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
3. Press the Menu button.
The FAX menu screen is displayed.
4. Select Directory, then press the OK button.
5. Select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.
Note
• You can select Add directory entry from TEL no. registration in Fax settings after pressing the
Setup button.
6. Change the registered information.
• To change the recipient's information:
1. Select Recipient, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select a recipient's ID number, then press the
OK button.
3. Select Edit, then press the OK button.
The screen to select a registration method is displayed as well as when you register the
recipient.
4. Select a registration method, then press the OK button.
5. Change the recipient's fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.
◦From call log (OUT) is selected as the registration method:
The screen to select the fax/telephone number from the outgoing call logs is displayed.
After you use the button to select a fax/telephone number and press the OK button,
the editing screen is displayed. Change the recipient's fax/telephone number, then press
the OK button.
◦From call log (IN) is selected as the registration method:
The screen to select the fax/telephone number or the name from the incoming call logs is
displayed. After you use the button to select a fax/telephone number or a name and
press the OK button, the editing screen is displayed. Change the recipient's fax/telephone
number, then press the OK button.
361
Note
• This registration method may not be available depending on the country or region of
purchase.
◦Direct entry is selected as the registration method:
the editing screen is displayed. Change the recipient's fax/telephone number, then press
the OK button.
After editing the recipient's fax/telephone number is complete, the screen to edit the recipient's
name is displayed.
Note
•You can enter the fax/telephone number up to 60 digits (40 digits for the US, Canada,
Korea and some regions of Latin America), including spaces.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
•Press the button twice to enter a pause.
•When Telephone line type in FAX user settings under Fax settings is set to Rotary
pulse, you can enter a tone ("T") by pressing the Tone button.
6. Change the recipient's name, then press the OK button.
Note
• You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
• To change a group dial:
1. Select Group dial, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an ID number of group dial to change,
then press the OK button.
3. Select Edit, then press the OK button.
4. Edit the member of the group dial.
To add a member, press the Menu button to display the screen to select an ID number and
then add another member.
To delete a member, select a member to delete and then press the Tone button.
5. Change the group name, then press the OK button.
Note
•You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
Note
•To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.
362
Deleting Registered Information
To delete information registered for recipient and group dial, follow the procedure below.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
3. Press the Menu button.
The FAX menu screen is displayed.
4. Select Directory, then press the OK button.
5. Select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.
Note
• You can select Add directory entry from TEL no. registration in Fax settings after pressing the
Setup button.
6. Delete the registered information.
• To delete the recipient's information:
1. Select Recipient, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an ID number of group dial to delete,
then press the OK button.
3. Select Delete, then press the OK button.
4. Select Yes, then press the OK button.
•To delete a group dial:
1. Select Group dial, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an ID number of group dial to delete,
then press the OK button.
3. Select Delete, then press the OK button.
4. Select Yes, then press the OK button.
Note
•To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.
363
Printing List of Registered Destinations
You can print a list of the fax/telephone numbers and can keep it near the printer to refer to when dialing.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Load paper.
3. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
4. Press the Menu button.
The FAX menu screen is displayed.
5. Select Print reports/lists, then press the OK button.
6. Select Directory list, then press the OK button.
7. Select an item to print, then press the OK button.
• If you selected Recipient:
The confirmation screen asking if you print the list in alphabetical order is displayed.
If you select Yes, RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST is printed in alphabetical order.
If you select No, RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST is printed in the order of the ID number.
• If you selected Group dial:
GROUP DIAL TELEPHONE NO. LIST is printed.
364
Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility2 (Windows)
About Speed Dial Utility2
Speed Dial Utility2 is a utility for forwarding the telephone directory registered on the printer to a computer
and registering/changing it on the computer. In addition, you can register the telephone directory edited on
the computer to the printer. You can also save them on the computer as a backup.
For safety reasons, it is recommended that you backup the registered data on the computer using Speed
Dial Utility2.
Starting Up Speed Dial Utility2
Speed Dial Utility2 Dialog box
Saving Registered Telephone Directory on Printer to Your Computer
Registering a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility2
Changing a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility2
Deleting a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility2
Changing Sender Information Using Speed Dial Utility2
Registering/Changing Rejected Number Using Speed Dial Utility2
Registering Telephone Directory Has been Saved on Your Computer to Printer
365
Starting Up Speed Dial Utility2
Important
• Before starting up Speed Dial Utility2, make sure that the printer is connected to the computer correctly.
• Do not plug in or unplug any cables while the printer is in operation, or when the computer is in sleep or
standby mode.
• If your printer is compatible with LAN connection, make sure that the printer is connected to the
computer with LAN connection to use Speed Dial Utility2 via LAN connection.
• The password entry screen may appear during startup or operation. If it appears, enter the
administrator password, and then click OK. If you do not know the administrator password, contact the
administrator of the printer.
Follow the procedure below to start up Speed Dial Utility2.
1. Make sure printer is turned on.
2. Start up Speed Dial Utility2.
• For Windows 10, click Start button and select All apps, Canon Utilities, and then Speed Dial
Utility2.
• For Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Speed Dial Utility2 on the Start screen to start Speed Dial
Utility2. If Speed Dial Utility2 is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, and
then search for "Speed Dial Utility2".
• For Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Start and select All programs, Canon Utilities, Speed
Dial Utility2, and then Speed Dial Utility2.
Speed Dial Utility2 starts up.
Note
• You can also start up Speed Dial Utility2 from Quick Utility Toolbox.
366
Speed Dial Utility2 Dialog box
The following items are on the Speed Dial Utility2 dialog box.
1. Printer Name:
Selects the printer for editing the telephone directory using Speed Dial Utility2.
Behind printer name, printer's MAC address is displayed.
Note
• For checking printer's MAC address, refer to "Checking Network Information" for your model from
Home of the Online Manual.
• For printer that supports both wireless LAN connection and wired LAN connection, MAC address
of wired LAN connection is displayed regardless of the connection method.
2. Display Printer Settings
Loads the telephone directory registered on the printer that selected for Printer Name: into Speed Dial
Utility2.
3. Setting Item List:
Selects a setting item for editing. Choose one item from TEL Number Registration, User Information
Setting, and Rejected Number Setting.
4. Registered information list
Displays the registered information selected for Setting Item List:.
367
Note
• By clicking on the item name, you can sort the display order.
5. Edit.../Select All/Delete
Edits the item that selected for Setting Item List:, or deletes the item, or selects all the items.
When multiple items on the registered information list are selected, you cannot use the Edit... button.
6. Load from PC...
Displays the telephone directory saved on the computer.
7. Instructions
Displays this guide.
8. Exit
Quits Speed Dial Utility2. Information registered or edited using Speed Dial Utility2 is neither saved on
the computer nor registered on the printer.
9. Save to PC...
Saves the telephone directory edited using Speed Dial Utility2 on the computer.
10. Register to Printer
Registers the telephone directory edited using Speed Dial Utility2 to the printer.
368
Saving Registered Telephone Directory on Printer to Your
Computer
Follow the procedure below to save the telephone directory (includes recipients' name, recipients' fax/
telephone number, group dial, user's name, user's fax/telephone number, and rejected numbers) that
registered on the printer to the computer.
1. Start up Speed Dial Utility2.
2. Select a printer from Printer Name: list box, and then click Display Printer Settings.
3. Click Save to PC....
4. Enter file name on displayed screen, and then click Save.
Note
•The data of the telephone directory (RSD file, *.rsd) can be imported to other printer.
Registering Telephone Directory Has been Saved on Your Computer to Printer
369
Registering a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility2
Follow the procedure below to register fax/telephone numbers.
Note
Before you register fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility2, make sure that no fax operations
are in progress.
1. Start up Speed Dial Utility2.
2. Select a printer from Printer Name: list box, and then click Display Printer Settings.
3. Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List:.
The list of registered fax/telephone numbers is displayed.
4. Select an unoccupied code from list, and then click Edit....
The Individual or Group Selection dialog box is displayed.
5. Click Register individual TEL number or Register group dial, and then click Next....
• If Register individual TEL number is selected:
1. Enter name.
2. Enter fax/telephone number.
• If Register group dial is selected:
370
1. Enter group name.
2. Select a code you want to add to group dial, and then click Add >>.
Note
• You can only add the numbers that have already been registered.
6. Click OK.
To continue registering fax/telephone numbers or a group dial, repeat steps 4 to 6.
• To save the registered information on the computer.
1. Click Save to PC....
2. Enter file name on displayed screen, and then click Save.
• To register the registered information to the printer:
1. Click Register to Printer.
2. When message appears, check it and click OK.
The information is registered to the printer.
371
Changing a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility2
Follow the procedure below to change fax/telephone numbers.
Note
• Before you change fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility2, make sure that no fax operations
are in progress.
1. Start up Speed Dial Utility2.
2. Select a printer from Printer Name: list box, and then click Display Printer Settings.
3. Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List:.
The list of registered fax/telephone numbers is displayed.
4. Select a code to change from list, and then click Edit....
• If an individual fax/telephone number is selected:
1. Enter a new name.
2. Enter a new fax/telephone number.
• If a group dial is selected:
1. Enter a new group name.
372
2. Add or delete a member to/from group dial.
To add a member:
Select a code to add to group dial, and then click Add >>.
To delete a member:
Select a code to delete from group dial, and then click << Delete.
5. Click OK.
To continue changing fax/telephone numbers or group dials, repeat steps 4 and 5.
•To save the edited information on the computer.
1. Click Save to PC....
2. Enter file name on displayed screen, and then click Save.
•To register the edited information to the printer:
1. Click Register to Printer.
2. When message appears, check it and click OK.
The information is registered to the printer.
373
Deleting a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility2
Follow the procedure below to delete fax/telephone numbers.
Note
• Before you delete fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility2, make sure that no fax operations
are in progress.
1. Start up Speed Dial Utility2.
2. Select a printer from Printer Name: list box, and then click Display Printer Settings.
3. Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List:.
The list of registered fax/telephone numbers is displayed.
4. Select a code to delete from list, and then click Delete.
Note
• To delete all fax/telephone numbers on the list, click Select All, and then Delete.
5. When confirmation screen appears, click OK.
The selected fax/telephone number is deleted.
To continue deleting fax/telephone numbers, repeat steps 4 and 5.
• To save the edited information on the computer.
1. Click Save to PC....
2. Enter file name on the displayed screen, and then click Save.
• To register the edited information to the printer:
1. Click Register to Printer.
2. When message appears, check it and click OK.
The information is registered to the printer.
374
Changing Sender Information Using Speed Dial Utility2
Follow the procedure below to change the user's name or fax/telephone number.
1. Start up Speed Dial Utility2.
2. Select a printer from Printer Name: list box, and then click Display Printer Settings.
3. Click User Information Setting from Setting Item List:.
The user's information is displayed.
4. Select an item to change, and then click Edit....
The User Information dialog box is displayed.
5. Enter new user's name on User Name and new fax/telephone number in TEL Number,
and then click OK.
• To save the edited information on the computer:
1. Click Save to PC....
2. Enter file name on displayed screen, and then click Save.
• To register the edited information to the printer:
1. Click Register to Printer.
2. When message appears, check it and click OK.
The information is registered to the printer.
375
Registering/Changing Rejected Number Using Speed Dial Utility2
Follow the procedure below to register, change, or delete rejected numbers.
1. Start up Speed Dial Utility2.
2. Select a printer from Printer Name: list box, and then click Display Printer Settings.
3. Click Rejected Number Setting from Setting Item List:.
The list of rejected numbers is displayed.
•To register a rejected number:
1. Select an unoccupied code from list, and then click Edit....
2. Enter fax/telephone number in Rejected Number dialog box, and then click OK.
•To change a rejected number:
1. Select a code to change from list, and then click Edit....
2. Enter fax/telephone number in Rejected Number dialog box, and then click OK.
•To delete a rejected number:
1. Select a code to delete from list, and then click Delete.
The selected fax/telephone number is deleted.
Note
• To delete all fax/telephone numbers on the list, click Select All, and then Delete.
376
Registering Telephone Directory Has been Saved on Your
Computer to Printer
You can load the data of the telephone directory (RSD file, *.rsd) and register it to your printer.
The data of the telephone directory (RSD file, *.rsd) that is exported from other printer can be loaded and
registered to your printer.
Note
• In Speed Dial Utility2, the data of the telephone directory (RSD file, *.rsd) that is exported using Speed
Dial Utility can be loaded.
1. Start up Speed Dial Utility2.
2. Select a printer from Printer Name: list box, and then click Display Printer Settings.
3. Click Load from PC....
4. Select a data of telephone directory (RSD file, *.rsd) to register to your printer.
5. Click Open on dialog box.
The selected telephone directory is displayed.
Note
• If you select the data of the telephone directory (RSD file, *.rsd) that is exported from other printer,
the confirmation message appears. Click OK.
6. Click Register to Printer.
The telephone directory that has been saved on the computer is registered to your printer.
377
Receiving Faxes
This section describes the preparation necessary for receiving a fax and how to receive a fax.
Preparing for Receiving a Fax
Prepare for receiving a fax according to the following procedure.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
3. Make sure of the receive mode setting.
Make sure of the receive mode setting displayed on the Fax standby screen.
Note
• For details on how to change the receive mode:
Setting Receive Mode
4. Load paper.
Load the sheets of plain paper.
5. Specify the paper settings as necessary.
Changing Paper Settings
This completes the preparation for receiving fax.
When a fax is received, it is printed on the loaded paper automatically.
Receiving a Fax
Depending on the selected receive mode, the receive operation varies.
Note
• For details on the receive mode:
Setting Receive Mode
• You can specify the advanced settings of each receive mode.
For details on the advanced settings of the receive mode:
Advanced Settings of Receive Mode
• If the printer was not able to print a received fax, the printer stores the unprinted fax in its memory
(Substitute Reception).
379
Substitute Reception in Printer's Memory
When TEL priority mode is selected:
•When the call is a fax:
The telephone will ring when a call incomes.
Pick up the handset. If you hear the fax tone, wait for at least 5 seconds after it stops, then hang up
the handset.
The printer will receive the fax.
Note
• If the printer will not switch to fax reception, press the FAX button, then the Color or Black
button to receive the fax.
• To receive a fax without picking up the handset, set Manual/auto switch of the advanced
setting to ON. RX start time allows you to specify the number of seconds until the printer
switches to fax reception.
• If you have subscribed to Duplex Ringing service in Hong Kong, the telephone will ring a
specified number of times when there is an incoming call with a fax distinctive ring pattern.
Then, the printer will switch to fax reception automatically without the handset being picked up.
The number of times to ring the telephone until switching to fax reception can be changed.
• Set the printer to enable you to initiate fax reception from a connected telephone (remote
reception).
Remote Reception
•When the answering machine is connected to the printer:
• If the answering machine is set to the answering mode, set User-friendly RX of the
advanced setting to ON. If the call is a fax, the printer will receive the fax automatically.
• If the answering mode is turned off on the answering machine, pick up the handset. If you
hear the fax tone, wait for at least 5 seconds after it stops, then hang up the handset.
380
• If Manual/auto switch of the advanced setting is set to ON, set RX start time to longer
than the time before the answering machine starts playing the answering message. After
making this setting, we recommend that you call the answering machine using a mobile
phone, etc. to confirm that messages are recorded successfully in the answering machine.
• Set your answering machine to answering mode and adjust it as follows:
- The entire message should be no longer than 15 seconds.
- In the message, tell your callers how to send a fax.
•When the call is a voice call:
The telephone will ring when a call incomes.
Pick up the handset, and talk on the telephone.
Note
• If the printer unexpectedly switches to fax reception during telephone calls, set User-friendly
RX of the advanced setting to OFF.
• If Manual/auto switch of the advanced setting is set to ON, you must answer an incoming call
by picking up the handset within the time specified in RX start time. Otherwise the printer will
switch to fax reception.
When Fax only mode is selected:
•When the call is a fax:
The printer will receive the fax automatically.
Note
• If a telephone is connected to the printer, the telephone will ring when a call incomes.
• You can change the number of times to ring the telephone with Incoming ring of the advanced
setting.
381
When DRPD or Network switch is selected:
•When the call is a fax:
The telephone will ring when a call incomes.
The printer will receive the fax automatically when the fax ring pattern is detected.
Note
• You can change the number of times to ring the telephone.
Advanced Settings of Receive Mode
•When the call is a voice call:
The telephone will ring when a call incomes.
When the printer does not detect the fax ring pattern, the telephone will continue ringing.
Pick up the handset, and talk on the telephone.
Note
• To use this feature, you need to subscribe to a compatible service provided by your telephone
company.
•For DRPD
You need to select the appropriate ring pattern on the printer.
Setting the DRPD Ring Pattern (US and Canada only)
•For Network switch
The name of this service varies depending on the country or region of purchase. This setting
may not be also available depending on the country or region of purchase.
382
Changing Paper Settings
This printer prints received faxes to paper loaded in the printer beforehand. You can use the operation panel
to change the paper settings for printing faxes. Make sure that the settings are appropriate for the loaded
paper.
Important
• If the size of loaded paper is different from that specified in the paper size setting, Check page size
and Press [OK] are displayed on the LCD. In this case, load the same size of paper as that specified in
the paper size setting, then press the OK button.
You can also press the Stop button to close the message and print the stored documents in the
printer's memory later.
Printing Document in Printer's Memory
• If no paper is loaded, or paper has run out while printing is in progress, the error message for no paper
is displayed on the LCD. In this case, load paper and press the OK button.
You can also press the Stop button to close the message and print the stored documents in the
printer's memory later.
Printing Document in Printer's Memory
Note
• If the sender sends a document that is larger than Letter-size or Legal-size, such as 11 x 17 inches, the
sender's printer may send the fax automatically reduced in size or divided, or send only a part of the
original.
1. Make sure that printer is turned on.
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
3. Press the Menu button.
The FAX menu screen is displayed.
4. Select FAX paper settings, then press the OK button.
5. Select a setting item, then press the OK button.
6. Specify the settings.
Use the button to adjust each setting item, then press the OK button. The next setting item is
displayed.
The LCD returns to the Fax standby screen when all the settings are complete or when pressing the FAX
button.
383
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
•Page size
Select the page size from A4, Letter, LTR, or Legal.
Note
•Some of page sizes are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.
•Media type
The paper type is set to Plain paper.
384
Substitute Reception in Printer's Memory
The printer prints the received fax automatically by default. And furthermore, the printer stores the received
fax in its memory. When the faxes are stored in the printer's memory, the FAX Memory lamp is lit or flashes.
In the following conditions, the received fax is not printed automatically, only is stored in the printer's
memory. (Substitute Reception) Then Received in memory is displayed at the Fax standby screen.
•When Do not print is selected for Received documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings
•An error has occurred on the printer:
If you select Print for Received documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings, a received fax
will be printed automatically. However, if any of the following errors occurs, the received fax will not be
printed. It will instead be stored in the printer's memory.
When the error is resolved, the fax stored in the printer's memory is printed automatically.
◦ Paper has run out:
Load paper, then press the OK button.
◦ A different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings is loaded:
Load the same size of paper as that specified by Page size, then press the OK button.
•You pressed the Stop button to cancel printing of a fax:
Press the FAX button to resume printing of the fax.
Important
• When the printer's memory is full, the faxes stored latest overwrite those stored earliest. However, the
unprinted faxes are not overwritten.
Information on Received Faxes
• If the printer's memory is full with the unprinted faxes, the printer cannot receive the faxes. Check the
FAX Memory lamp regularly, print the faxes, and delete them from the printer's memory.
Document Stored in Printer's Memory
• If you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted. The next time you
turn the printer on, press the OK button after a confirmation screen is displayed. The list of the faxes
deleted from the printer's memory (MEMORY CLEAR REPORT) will be printed.
Information on Received Faxes
By default, received faxes will be printed immediately after they are received.
In addition, faxes will be stored in the printer's memory automatically when they are received.
However, the printer's memory has an upper limit on the number of faxes or subjects it can contain. When
the amount of stored fax reaches the upper limit of the printer's memory, faxes stored latest will overwrite
those stored earliest.
As long as paper is loaded, the printer will perform printing even when the ink remaining is insufficient.
Therefore, in case ink remaining is low, printed faxes may be unclear due to blurring of ink. In such case if
the amount of stored faxes has reached its upper limit of the printer's memory, faxes stored in the printer's
385
memory will be deleted in order from the earliest. As a result, you may not be able to see faxes either
using printed material or the printer's memory.
Therefore, if you use the fax capabilities, make sure sufficient ink remains in the ink tank in advance. In
addition, we recommend you refill the ink tank early so that ink does not become insufficient while fax
printing is in progress. Visually inspect the remaining ink in the printer's ink tank.
Moreover, we recommend you check printed pages immediately after faxes are received. If a fax remains
in the printer's memory, you can reprint it after refilling the ink tank.
If [Do not print] is selected for [Received documents] on [Auto print settings] under [FAX settings] on the
operation panel of the printer, received faxes will not be printed immediately. Instead, faxes are stored in
the printer's memory automatically and you can select and print those stored from the printer's memory. In
this setting, the printer does not receive faxes if the printer's memory reaches its upper limit. Thus, stored
faxes are not overwritten automatically.
386
Sending Faxes from Computer (Windows)
Sending a FAX (Fax Driver) Basic
Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Cannot Send Faxes from Computer
How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver
General Notes (Fax Driver)
387
Sending a FAX (Fax Driver)
You can send faxes using the fax driver from applications that support document printing.
Note
• Only black and white transmission is supported.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Open the document you want to fax with an application (such as Notepad), and then click
the Print command. (The command is Print... on the File menu.)
3. In Select Printer or Name in the Print dialog box, select Canon XXX series FAX (where
"XXX" is the model name).
4. Click Print or OK.
* Print dialog box in Notepad
Note
•Click Preferences or Properties in the Print dialog box to open the print settings dialog box of
the fax driver in which you can set the paper size and print orientation. For details on how to open
the print settings dialog box of the fax driver, see "How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax
Driver."
5. Click Display Address Book... in Set Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box.
388
6. Select a recipient from Recipient Name in the Select Recipient from Address Book
dialog box, then click Set as Recipient.
The selected recipient is reflected in Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box.
Important
•You cannot specify a recipient if there is no recipient registered in the address book. Register the
recipient in the address book and reopen the address book.
For details on how to register recipients in the address book, see "Creating an Address Book (Fax
Driver)."
•If the recipient's fax/telephone number is entered incorrectly or the registered fax/telephone
number is incorrect, the fax may be sent to an unexpected recipient. When sending an important
fax, it is recommended that you send it after confirming the entered information and recipient's
status.
Note
•You can also specify Recipient by entering the Recipient Name and Fax Number in Direct
Entry in the Send FAX dialog box and then clicking Set as Recipient.
389
• For details on valid characters, see "General Notes (Fax Driver)."
• You can send faxes even if only the Fax Number is entered.
• You can register the recipient you entered to the address book by clicking Add to Address
Book.... For details on how to register recipients in the address book, see "Creating an
Address Book (Fax Driver)."
•Add the outside line access number before the fax number as needed.
(Example: When the outside line access number is "0" and the fax number is "XXX-XXXX", enter
"0XXX-XXXX".)
7. Click Send Now.
When a confirmation message is displayed, click OK.
Important
• If you cannot send a fax due to line failure or other problem, see "Cannot Send Faxes from
Computer."
Canceling Transmission
If you click Send Now in the Send FAX dialog box, the printer icon is displayed in the taskbar. Double-
click this icon to display the list of fax jobs awaiting transmission or being sent.
Right-clicking a job and selecting Cancel stops transmission.
390
Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver)
By using the address book, you can send a fax by simply specifying a recipient from it.
You can register the recipient's name, fax number and other information in the address book.
Registering a recipient (WAB contact) in the address book
You can register an individual recipient (Contact) in the address book.
1. Open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver.
2. Click Address Book... in the displayed dialog box.
Note
•Once an individual recipient (Contact) is registered in the address book folder (Windows
Contacts) as an address book file (.contact file), it can be used in multiple applications.
However, you cannot change the address book you use, as only one address book can be
created per user.
Follow the steps below to open Windows Contacts.
•Windows 10:
Search for "Contacts" from Search box.
•Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
Select the Search charm, then search for "Contacts".
•Windows 7/Windows Vista:
Select XXXX (user name) from the Start menu, then double-click Contacts.
3. In the Address Book dialog box, click New....
391
4. Select Contact in the New Entry dialog box, then click OK.
Note
• For faxing, you can only specify the Contact (one recipient). You cannot specify a Distribution
List.
5. On Name and E-mail tab of Properties dialog box, enter First and Last.
The recipient's name will be printed at the top of the fax received by the recipient.
392
6. Enter the fax number on the Home or Work tab, then click OK.
An individual recipient (Contact) is registered in the address book.
Note
• You can also register a recipient by clicking the Add to Address Book... button on the Send
FAX dialog box after entering the recipient.
•Add the outside line access number before the fax number as needed.
(Example: When the outside line access number is "0" and the fax number is "XXX-XXXX",
enter "0XXX-XXXX".)
•If you upgrade from Windows XP to Windows Vista, the address book you created in Windows
XP may not be reflected in Windows Vista. In this case, open the address book in the following
procedure and reflect the information to a new address book.
1. Select Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Folder Options.
393
2. Click the View tab of the Folder Options dialog box, select Show hidden files and
folders in Advanced settings, then click OK.
3. From the Start menu, select XXXX (user name), then double-click AppData > Roaming >
Canon > MP5 to open the folder.
4. Double-click the ".wab" file.
The address book will be reflected in Windows Vista automatically.
Related Topic
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver)
394
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)
You can change the recipients' names, fax numbers and other information, or delete recipients registered in
the address book.
Editing Recipients in an address book
1. Open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver.
2. Click Address Book... in the displayed dialog box.
3. Select the recipient you want to edit from the Address Book dialog box, then click
Properties....
4. Change information as needed on the Properties dialog box, then click OK.
395
4. When a confirmation message is displayed, click Yes.
397
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver)
You can search for recipients registered in the address book by name.
1. Open the document you want to fax with an application (such as Notepad), and then click
the Print command. (The command is Print... on the File menu.)
2. In Select Printer or Name in the Print dialog box, select Canon XXX series FAX (where
"XXX" is the model name).
3. Click Print or OK.
* Print dialog box in Notepad
4. Click Display Address Book... in Set Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box.
398
5. Enter the name of the recipient you want to search for in Search by Recipient in the
Select Recipient from Address Book dialog box.
If the entered name is found, the recipient will be displayed in the contact list with its name selected.
While the name is selected, click Set as Recipient to enter it as the recipient.
Important
• You cannot search by criteria other than name.
399
Cannot Send Faxes from Computer
Check 1 Is the power turned on?
You cannot send faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on.
If you disconnected the power cord without turning off the power (one of the buttons on the operation panel is lit),
reconnecting it turns on the power.
If you disconnected the power cord after pressing the ON button to turn off the power (no buttons on the
operation panel are lit), reconnect it, then press the ON button to turn on the power.
If the power was turned off due to power failure, etc., the power is automatically turned on when the power failure
is resolved.
Important
•Confirm that all lamps on the operation panel are off before unplugging the power cord, then unplug the
power cord.
If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are
deleted.
Note
•If the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord,
the list of the faxes deleted from the machine's memory will be printed after turning the machine on.
Check 2 Is a document being sent from memory or a fax being received into memory?
When the message for the transmission/reception is displayed on the machine's LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
monitor, a fax is being sent from/received into machine's memory. Wait until the transmission/reception is
complete.
Check 3 Is the telephone line type set correctly?
Check the telephone line type setting and change it as necessary.
Check 4 Is Dial tone detect set to ON?
Resend the fax after a while.
If you still cannot send the fax, select OFF for Dial tone detect in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings.
Check 5 Is the recipient's fax number correct?
Check the recipient's fax number, then send the document again.
Sending a FAX (Fax Driver)
400
Note
•For details on how to change the recipients registered in the address book, see "Edit or Remove a
Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)."
Check 6 Does an error occur during transmission?
Check if a message is displayed in the computer screen.
If displayed, check the message, then resolve the error.
Check 7 Does a printer error occur?
Check if a message is displayed on the LCD monitor.
If a support code is displayed, see "Support Code List" for your model from Home of the Online Manual.
If no support code is displayed, see "A Message Is Displayed" for your model from Home of the Online Manual.
If you are in a hurry, press the Stop button to close the message, then send the fax.
Check 8 Is the telephone line connected correctly?
Reconnect the telephone line cable to the telephone line jack.
If the telephone line is connected correctly, then there is a problem with your telephone line. Contact your
telephone company and the manufacturer of your terminal adapter or telephone adapter.
401
How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver
The following explains how to display the print settings dialog box or the Properties dialog box of the fax
driver from your application or from the fax/printer icon.
Opening the Print Settings Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from an Application
1. Click the Print command in the application.
In general, you can open the Print dialog box by selecting Print from the File menu.
2. Select "your model name," then click Preferences (or Properties).
The print settings dialog box of the fax driver appears.
Opening the Print Settings Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from the Fax/Printer
Icon
•Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7:
1. Select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and select
Printing Preferences, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the model
name.)
•Windows Vista:
1. Select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and
select Printing Preferences....
Opening the Properties Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from the Fax/Printer
Icon
•Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7:
1. Select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and select
Printer Properties, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the model name.)
•Windows Vista:
1. Select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
402
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and
select Properties.
403
General Notes (Fax Driver)
This fax driver is subject to the following restrictions.
Keep the following points in mind when using the fax driver.
• The fax driver may not work correctly when sending a Microsoft Excel 2002 document as a fax with the
Allow A4/Letter Paper Resizing option checked in Microsoft Excel 2002. Follow the instructions below
to solve the problem:
1. Click Options... from the Tools menu.
2. Uncheck the Allow A4/Letter Paper Resizing option on the International tab.
• When using a network compatible printer, you cannot send faxes from multiple computers at the same
time. If you try to send a fax from a computer while a fax is being sent from another computer, a
message appears and your fax cannot be sent.
Make sure that a fax is not being sent from another computer.
• If you assign the fax driver to the Bluetooth port, you cannot send a fax from the computer.
• You can use the following characters for Fax Number:
Character Explanation
0 - 9 * # For use in telephone and fax numbers.
, p To place a pause between numbers.
P To place a pause at the end of a sequence of numbers.
T Numbers after the T will be sent as a tone signal.
+ - ( ), space To make the number easier to read. You cannot insert a space at the front of a number.
*You cannot use ".", "R", "M", or "E".
• You can enter the following number of characters in Recipient Name and Fax Number.
Recipient Name: Up to 16 characters
Fax Number: Up to 60 characters
* The number of characters you can enter differs in some regions.
• The fax driver does not work correctly if you uncheck the Enable printer pooling option on the Ports
tab of the Canon XXX series FAX Properties dialog box (where "XXX" is the model name). Check that
the option is checked.
For details on how to open the Canon XXX series FAX Properties dialog box, see "Opening the Properties
Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from the Fax/Printer Icon."
404
Network
Cannot Find Printer on Network
Cannot Find Printer while Using Wireless LAN
Network Key Unknown
For other questions about network, click here.
Print
Printing Does Not Start
Paper Is Blank/Printing Is Blurry/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Appear
Print Results Are Unsatisfactory
Paper Jams
Installation
Cannot Install MP Drivers
Fax
Cannot Send a Fax
Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax
Setting Up the Fax
Error
An Error Occurs
Message Appears
Frequently Asked Questions
Examples of Problems
Printer Does Not Move
Power Does Not Come On
Power Shuts Off By Itself
LCD Is Off
LCD Shows Wrong Language
USB Connection Problems
Cannot Communicate with Printer via USB
Printing Does Not Start
Copying/Printing Stops
Cannot Print Using AirPrint
Printing Is Slow
No Ink Comes Out
Paper Jams
405
Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error
Print Results Are Unsatisfactory
Scanning Problems (Windows)
Scanning Problems (Mac OS)
Scan Results Are Unsatisfactory (Windows)
Scan Results Are Unsatisfactory (Mac OS)
Cannot Print/Scan from Smartphone/Tablet
Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax
Quality of Received Fax is Poor
Cannot Dial
Telephone Disconnects During a Call
Cannot Set Correctly (Network)
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Setup (Windows)
Cannot Find Printer while Using Wireless LAN
Printer Suddenly Cannot Be Used
Network Key Unknown
Administrator Password Set for Printer Unknown
Printer Cannot Be Used After Replacing Wireless Router or Changing Its Settings
Message Appears on Computer During Setup
Checking Network Information
Restoring to Factory Defaults
Cannot Set Correctly (Installation)
Cannot Install MP Drivers
Easy-WebPrint EX Does Not Start or Easy-WebPrint EX Menu Does Not Appear (Windows)
Updating MP Drivers in Network Environment (Windows)
Error or Message Appears
An Error Occurs
Message Appears
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on Fax Standby Screen
List of Support Code for Error
IJ Scan Utility Error Messages (Windows)
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Error Messages
IJ Scan Utility Error Messages (Mac OS)
Scanner Driver (ICA Driver) Error Messages (Mac OS)
Operation Problems
Network Communication Problems
Printing Problems
Problems while Printing/Scanning from Smartphone/Tablet
Scanning Problems (Windows)
406
Network Settings and Common Problems
Here are frequently asked questions on network. Select a connection method you are using, or you want to
use.
Wireless LAN
Wireless Direct
Wireless LAN
Cannot Find Printer
Cannot Find Printer while Using Wireless LAN
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen
Cannot Proceed beyond Printer Connection Screen/Connect Cable Screen
Cannot Find Printer after Searching it on Printer Detection Screen During Setup
Searching Printer by IP Address or Host Name During Setup
Error Occurs During Wireless LAN Setup
Another Printer Found with Same Name
Changing Wireless LAN Connection Method
Cannot Print or Connect
Printer Suddenly Cannot Be Used
Printer Cannot Be Used After Replacing Wireless Router or Changing Its Settings
Cannot Access to Internet on Wireless LAN from Communication Device
Connecting Printer and Wireless Router Using Easy wireless connect
Cannot Connect Smartphone/Tablet to Wireless Router
Error Occurs During Wireless LAN Setup
Connecting to Another Computer via LAN/Changing from USB to LAN Connection
LAN Setting Tips/Changing LAN Settings
Network Key Unknown
Administrator Password Set for Printer Unknown
Checking Network Information
Restoring to Factory Defaults
Checking Wireless Router SSID/Key
Checking Wireless Router SSID for Smartphone/Tablet
Privacy Separator/SSID Separator/Network Separation function
Default Network Settings
Connecting to Another Computer via LAN/Changing from USB to LAN Connection
Printing Network Settings
Changing Wireless LAN Connection Method
Printing/Scanning from Smartphone/Tablet
Connecting Printer and Wireless Router Using Easy wireless connect
Cannot Connect Smartphone/Tablet to Wireless Router
408
Checking Wireless Router SSID for Smartphone/Tablet
Setting Up Using Smartphone/Tablet
Cannot Print/Scan from Smartphone/Tablet
Downloading Canon PRINT Inkjet/SELPHY
Problems while Using Printer
Message Appears on Computer During Setup
Printing Is Slow
Packets Are Sent Constantly (Windows)
Wireless Direct
Cannot Print or Connect
Printer Suddenly Cannot Be Used
Cannot Access to Internet on Wireless LAN from Communication Device
LAN Setting Tips/Changing LAN Settings
Network Key Unknown
Administrator Password Set for Printer Unknown
Checking Network Information
Restoring to Factory Defaults
Printing Network Settings
Default Network Settings
Changing Wireless LAN Connection Method
Printing/Scanning from Smartphone/Tablet
Cannot Print/Scan from Smartphone/Tablet
Downloading Canon PRINT Inkjet/SELPHY
Problems while Using Printer
Message Appears on Computer During Setup
Printing Is Slow
409
Connecting the Printer to a Network
Available Connection Methods
The following connection methods are available on the printer.
• Wireless Connection
Connect the printer and computer/smartphone/tablet using a wireless router.
If you have a wireless router, we recommend you use one for wireless connection.
• Wireless Direct
Connect the printer and computer/smartphone/tablet without using a wireless router.
For more on connection method, see Available Connection Methods.
Note
• You can connect the printer and computer using a USB cable (USB connection). Prepare a
USB cable. For details, see Connecting to Another Computer via LAN/Changing from USB to
LAN Connection.
Network Connection Settings/Setup
Perform connection setup for the printer and computer/smartphone/tablet.
For more on setup procedure, click here.
Changing Network Settings
See below for changing connection settings for the printer and computer/smartphone/tablet.
• To change network connection method:
Changing Wireless LAN Connection Method
Changing the Connection Mode
• To add computer/smartphone/tablet to the printer:
Connecting to Another Computer via LAN/Changing from USB to LAN Connection
• To use wireless direct temporarily:
Using Printer with Wireless Direct
Application Software for Network (Windows)
For Windows, you can use IJ Network Device Setup Utility to perform network settings. It allows a network/
printer administrator to manage printers on network.
Network Settings (IJ Network Device Setup Utility) (Windows)
410
Restrictions
When connecting another device while a device (such as a smartphone) is already connected to the printer,
connect it using the same connection method as the connected device.
If you connect using a different connection method, the connection to the device in use will be disabled.
Connect via wireless router
• Make sure your device and the wireless router are connected. For details on checking these settings,
see the manual supplied with the wireless router or contact its manufacturer.
As for a device already connected to the printer without using a wireless router, reconnect it via a
wireless router.
• Configuration, router functions, setup procedures and security settings of network devices vary
depending on the system environment. For details, see the manual for your network device or contact
its manufacturer.
• This printer does not support IEEE802.11ac, IEEE802.11a, or IEEE802.11n (5 GHz). Check if your
device supports IEEE802.11n (2.4 GHz), IEEE802.11g or IEEE802.11b.
• If your device is set to the "IEEE802.11n only" mode, WEP or TKIP cannot be used as a security
protocol. Change the security protocol for your device to something other than WEP and TKIP or
change the setting to something other than "IEEE802.11n only."
The connection between your device and the wireless router will be temporarily disabled while the
setting is changed. Do not proceed to the next screen of this guide until setup is complete.
• For office use, consult your network administrator.
• Note that if you connect to a network with no security protection, your personal information could be
disclosed to a third party.
Wireless Direct
Important
• If a device is connected to the Internet via a wireless router, and you then connect it to a printer in
Wireless Direct mode, the existing connection between the device and wireless router will be
disabled. In that case, the connection of the device may switch to a mobile data connection
automatically depending on your device. When you connect to the Internet using a mobile data
connection, charges may apply depending on your contract.
• When you connect a device and the printer using Wireless Direct, the connection information will
be saved to Wi-Fi settings. The device may be connected to the printer automatically even after
disconnecting it or connecting it to another wireless router.
• To prevent automatic connection to the printer in Wireless Direct mode, change the connection
mode after using the printer, or set not to connect automatically in the Wi-Fi settings of the
device.
For details on checking or changing wireless router settings, see the router manual or contact its
manufacturer.
• If you connect a device and the printer using Wireless Direct, Internet connection may become
unavailable depending on your environment. In that case, web services for the printer cannot be used.
412
• In Wireless Direct mode, you can connect up to five devices at the same time. If you try to connect a
sixth device while five devices are already connected, an error will appear.
If an error appears, disconnect a device that does not use the printer, then configure settings again.
• Devices connected to the printer using Wireless Direct cannot communicate with each other.
• Firmware updates for the printer are not available while using Wireless Direct.
• When a device has been connected to the printer without using a wireless router and you want to set
it up again using the same connection method, disconnect it first. Disable the connection between the
device and printer in the Wi-Fi setting screen.
413
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During
Setup (Windows)
If the printer cannot be found and the Check Printer Settings screen appears after searching the printer by
Automatic search on the Search for Printers screen, click Redetect and search for the printer again by
the IP address on the Search for Printers screen.
If the printer has not been found after searching it by the IP address, check network settings.
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Power Status
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking PC Network Connection
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Printer's Wireless LAN Settings
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Wireless LAN Environment
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Printer's IP Address
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Security Software Settings
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Wireless Router Settings
416
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During
Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-Checking Power Status
Are printer and network device (router, etc.) turned on?
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Confirming that the Power Is On
Make sure network device (router, etc.) is turned on.
If printer or network device is off:
Turn on printer or network device.
It may take a while for the printer and network device to become ready for use once they are turned on.
Wait a while after turning on the printer or network device, and then click Redetect on the Check Printer
Settings screen to redetect the printer.
If the printer is found, follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up network communication.
If printer and network device are on:
If the network devices are on, turn them off and on again.
If above does not solve the problem:
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking PC Network Connection
417
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During
Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-Checking PC Network Connection
Can you view any web pages on your computer?
Make sure the computer and network device (router, etc.) are configured and the computer is connected
to the network.
If you cannot view any web pages:
Click Cancel on the Check Printer Settings screen to cancel to set up the network communication.
After that, configure the computer and network device.
For the procedures, refer to the instruction manuals supplied with the computer and network device, or
contact their manufacturers.
If you can view web pages after configuring the computer and network device, try to set up the network
communication from the beginning.
If above does not solve the problem:
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Wireless LAN Environment
418
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During
Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-Checking Printer's Wireless LAN
Settings
Is printer set to allow wireless communication?
Make sure the or icon is displayed on the LCD.
If icon is not displayed:
The printer is not set to allow wireless communication. Click Wireless LAN Setup Information on the
Check Printer Settings screen to check the status and turn on wireless communication on the printer.
If icon is displayed:
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Wireless LAN Environment
419
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During
Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-Checking Wireless LAN
Environment
Is printer connected to wireless router?
Use the icon on the LCD to make sure the printer is connected to the wireless router.
If icon is displayed:
• Checking wireless router location
After checking the wireless router setting, make sure the printer is not placed far away from the
wireless router.
The printer can be up to 50 m (164 ft) from the wireless router indoors. Make sure the printer is close
enough to the wireless router to be used.
Place the wireless router and printer where there are no obstacles between them. Wireless
communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Wireless communication can be
impeded by building materials containing metal or concrete. If the printer cannot communicate with
the computer over a wireless LAN due to a wall, place the printer and the computer in the same room.
In addition, if a device like a microwave oven that emits radio waves of the same frequency bandwidth
as a wireless router is nearby, it may cause interference. Place the wireless router as far away from
interference sources as possible.
Note
• Though an antenna is attached to most wireless routers, note that some of them have it inside.
• Checking wireless router settings
The printer and wireless router should be connected using 2.4 GHz bandwidth. Make sure the
wireless router for the printer's destination is configured to use 2.4 GHz bandwidth.
Important
• Depending on the wireless router, note that different SSID is assigned for a bandwidth (2.4 GHz
or 5 GHz) or its usage (for PC or game machine) using alphanumeric characters at the end of
SSID.
Check the SSID of the wireless router for the printer by printing out the network settings information.
Printing Network Settings
420
For more on the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the wireless router or
contact its manufacturer.
After taking measures above, click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen to redetect the
printer.
If the printer is found, follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up network communication.
If the printer cannot be detected, the printer is not connected to the wireless router. Connect the printer to
the wireless router.
After connecting the printer to the wireless router, set up the network communication from the beginning.
If icon is displayed:
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Printer's IP Address
421
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During
Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-Checking Printer's IP Address
Is printer's IP address specified correctly?
If printer's IP address is not specified correctly, the printer may not be found. Make sure whether printer's
IP address is not used for another device.
To check the printer's IP address, print out the network settings information.
Printing Network Settings
If the IP address is not specified correctly:
See If an error screen appears: and specify the IP address.
If the IP address is specified correctly:
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Security Software Settings
422
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During
Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-Checking Security Software
Settings
Disable block in firewall function temporarily.
The firewall of your security software or operation system for computer may limit communication between
the printer and your computer. Check the firewall setting of your security software or operation system or
the message shown on your computer and disable block temporarily.
If firewall interferes with setup:
•If message appears:
If a message appears warning that Canon software is attempting to access the network, set the
security software to allow access.
After allowing the software to access, click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen to
redetect the printer.
If the printer is found, follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up network
communication.
•If no message appears:
Cancel the setup, and then set the security software to allow Canon software to access the network.
The file Setup.exe or Setup64.exe in the win > Driver > DrvSetup folder on the Setup CD-ROM
After setting the security software, redo the network communication setup from the beginning.
After setup is completed, enable firewall.
Note
• For more on firewall settings of your operating system or security software, see instruction manual or
contact its manufacturer.
If above does not solve the problem:
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-
Checking Wireless Router Settings
423
Cannot Find Printer on Check Printer Settings Screen During
Wireless LAN Setup (Windows)-Checking Wireless Router Settings
Check wireless router settings.
Check wireless router network connection settings, such as IP address filtering, MAC address filtering,
encryption key, and DHCP function.
Make sure the same radio channel is assigned to the wireless router and the printer.
To check the settings of the wireless router, see the instruction manual supplied with the wireless router or
contact the manufacturer.
After checking the wireless router settings, click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen to
redetect the printer.
If the printer is found, follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up network communication.
424
Cannot Proceed beyond Printer Connection Screen/Connect Cable
Screen
If you cannot proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen or the Connect Cable screen, check the
following.
Check1 Make sure USB cable is securely plugged in to printer and computer.
Connect the printer and the computer using a USB cable as the illustration below. The USB port is located at the
back of the printer.
Check the items below only if you cannot proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen.
Check2 Follow procedure below to connect printer and computer again.
Important
•For Mac OS, make sure the lock icon is on the lower left of the Printers & Scanners screen (Print & Scan
screen in Mac OS X v10.8).
If the icon (locked) is displayed, click the icon to unlock. (The administrator name and the password
are necessary to unlock.)
1. Turn off printer.
2. Unplug USB cable from printer and computer and connect it again.
3. Turn on printer.
Check3 If you cannot resolve problem, follow procedure below to reinstall MP Drivers.
•For Windows:
1. Click Cancel.
◦ If the Installation Failure screen appears:
1. Click Start Over.
2. Click Exit on Start Setup screen and finish setup.
425
◦ If the Connection failed. screen appears:
1. Click Next.
2. Click Next on displayed screen.
3. Click Back to Top on Select Printer screen.
4. Click Exit on Start Setup screen and finish setup.
3. Turn off printer.
4. Restart computer.
5. Make sure you have no application software running.
6. Redo setup according to instructions on Canon website.
Note
•You can use the Setup CD-ROM to redo setup.
• For Mac OS:
1. Click Next.
◦If the Installation Failure screen appears, click Exit on displayed screen and finish setup.
◦If the Connection failed. screen appears:
1. Click Next.
2. Click Next on displayed screen.
3. Click Back to Top on Select Printer screen.
4. Click Exit on Start Setup screen and finish setup.
3. Turn off printer.
4. Restart computer.
5. Make sure you have no application software running.
6. Redo setup according to instructions on Canon website.
426
Cannot Find Printer while Using Wireless LAN
Note
• This section describes the troubleshooting when using the computer.
For the troubleshooting when using the smartphone or the tablet:
Cannot Print/Scan from Smartphone/Tablet
Check1 Make sure the printer is turned on.
Check2 Is icon displayed on the LCD?
If the icon is not displayed, select Active on WLAN activ./inactiv. in Wireless LAN under LAN settings.
Check3 Make sure printer setup is complete.
If it is not, perform setup.
•For Windows:
Use the Setup CD-ROM or follow the instructions on the Canon website.
•For Mac OS:
Follow the instructions on the Canon website.
Check4 If you can use IJ Network Device Setup Utility, look for printer again. (Windows)
IJ Network Device Setup Utility Screen
Check5 Make sure printer and wireless router network settings match.
Make sure the network settings of the printer (e.g. wireless router name, SSID, network key, etc.) are identical
with those of the wireless router.
To check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with it or contact its
manufacturer.
To check the current network settings of the printer, print out the network setting information.
Printing Network Settings
Check6 Make sure the printer is not placed too far away from the wireless router.
Place the wireless router and printer where there are no obstacles between them. Wireless communication
between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Wireless communication can be impeded by building
materials containing metal or concrete. If the printer cannot communicate with the computer over a wireless LAN
due to a wall, place the printer and the computer in the same room.
427
In addition, if a device like a microwave oven that emits radio waves of the same frequency bandwidth as a
wireless router is nearby, it may cause interference. Place the wireless router as far away from interference
sources as possible.
Note
• Though an antenna is attached to most wireless routers, note that some of them have it inside.
Check7 Make sure wireless signal is strong. Monitor signal status and move printer and
wireless router as necessary.
To check the signal strength:
Checking Wireless Network Status
Check8 Make sure the computer is connected to the wireless router.
For more on how to check the computer settings or connection status, see your computer instruction manual or
contact its manufacturer.
Note
•If you use the smartphone/tablet, make sure that its Wi-Fi setting is enabled.
Check9 Make sure Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports sheet of the
properties dialog box of the printer driver. (Windows)
Check10 Make sure security software's firewall is off.
If your security software's firewall is on, a message may appear warning you that Canon software is attempting
to access the network. If this warning message appears, set security software to always allow access.
If you are using any programs that switch between network environments, check their settings. Some programs
use a firewall by default.
Check11 If printer is connected to an AirPort Base Station via LAN, use alphanumeric
characters for network identifier (SSID). (Mac OS)
If the problem is not resolved, redo setup.
• For Windows:
Use the Setup CD-ROM or follow the instructions on the Canon website.
• For Mac OS:
Follow the instructions on the Canon website.
428
Printer Suddenly Cannot Be Used
Cannot Communicate with Printer Following Network Settings Change
Cannot Communicate with Printer via Wireless LAN
Cannot Communicate with Printer Using Wireless Direct
Cannot Print, Scan, or Fax from a Computer Connected to the Network
Cannot Communicate with Printer Following Network Settings Change
It may take a while for the computer to obtain an IP address, or you may need to restart your computer.
Make sure the computer has obtained a valid IP address, and try again to find the printer.
Cannot Communicate with Printer via Wireless LAN
Check1 Check the power status of printer, network devices (e.g. wireless router), and
smartphone/tablet.
Turn on the printer or devices.
If the power is already turned on, turn it off and on again.
It may be necessary to resolve wireless router problems (e.g. update interval of a key, problems of DHCP
update interval, energy saving mode, etc.) or to update the wireless router firmware.
For details, contact the manufacturer of your wireless router.
Check2 Can you view any web pages on your computer?
Make sure your computer is connected to the wireless router properly.
For more on checking computer settings or connection status, see the instruction manual supplied with the
wireless router or contact the manufacturer.
Check3 Is the printer connected to the wireless router?
Check the connection status between the printer and wireless router by the icon on the LCD. If the is
not displayed, wireless LAN is disabled, enable wireless LAN.
Check4 Make sure the printer and wireless router network settings match.
Make sure the network settings of the printer (e.g. wireless router name, SSID, network key, etc.) are identical
with those of the wireless router.
To check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with it or contact its
manufacturer.
430
To check the current network settings of the printer, print out the network setting information.
Printing Network Settings
If the printer network settings do not match with those of the wireless router, change the network settings of
the printer to match with those of the wireless router.
Network Settings (IJ Network Device Setup Utility) (Windows)
Check5 Make sure the printer is not placed too far away from the wireless router.
Place the wireless router and printer where there are no obstacles between them. Wireless communication
between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Wireless communication can be impeded by building
materials containing metal or concrete. If the printer cannot communicate with the computer over a wireless
LAN due to a wall, place the printer and the computer in the same room.
In addition, if a device like a microwave oven that emits radio waves of the same frequency bandwidth as a
wireless router is nearby, it may cause interference. Place the wireless router as far away from interference
sources as possible.
Note
•Though an antenna is attached to most wireless routers, note that some of them have it inside.
Check6 Make sure wireless signal is strong. Monitor signal status and move printer
and wireless router as necessary.
Use the operation panel of the printer to check the current signal status.
LCD and Operation Panel
Check7 Make sure you are using a valid channel.
Usable wireless channels may be limited depending on wireless network device used by your computer. See
the instruction manual provided with your computer or wireless network device to check usable wireless
channels.
Check8 Make sure channel set on wireless router is a usable channel as confirmed in
Check 7.
If it is not, change the channel set on the wireless router.
Check9 Make sure security software's firewall is off.
If your security software's firewall is on, a message may appear warning you that Canon software is attempting
to access the network. If this warning message appears, set security software to always allow access.
If you are using any programs that switch between network environments, check their settings. Some
programs use a firewall by default.
Check10 If printer is connected to an AirPort Base Station via LAN, use alphanumeric
characters for network identifier (SSID). (Mac OS)
If the problem is not resolved, redo setup.
431
• For Windows:
Use the Setup CD-ROM or follow the instructions on the Canon website.
• For Mac OS:
Follow the instructions on the Canon website.
•Positioning:
Make sure there are no obstacles between the wireless router and the printer.
Cannot Communicate with Printer Using Wireless Direct
Check1 Check the power status of printer and other devices (smartphone or tablet).
Turn on the printer or devices.
If the power is already turned on, turn it off and on again.
Check2 Check the printer setting.
Select LAN settings > Wireless Direct > Wireless Direct set. > Switch WL Direct in this order and select
Yes.
Check3 Check the settings of your device (smartphone/tablet).
Make sure wireless LAN is enabled on your device.
For details, refer to your device's instruction manual.
Check4 Make sure printer is selected as connection for device (e.g. smartphone or
tablet).
Select the identifier for wireless direct (SSID) specified for the printer as the connection destination for devices.
Check the destination on your device.
For details, refer to your device's instruction manual or visit the manufacturer's website.
To check the identifier for wireless direct (SSID) specified for the printer, print out the network setting
information of the printer.
Printing Network Settings
Check5 Have you entered the proper password specified for the wireless direct?
To check the password specified for the printer, print out the network setting information of the printer.
Printing Network Settings
Check6 Make sure the printer is not placed too far away from the device.
Place the device and printer where there are no obstacles between them. Wireless communication between
different rooms or floors is generally poor. Wireless communication can be impeded by building materials
432
containing metal or concrete. If the printer cannot communicate with the computer over a wireless LAN due to
a wall, place the printer and the computer in the same room.
In addition, if a device like a microwave oven that emits radio waves of the same frequency bandwidth as a
wireless router is nearby, it may cause interference. Place the wireless router as far away from interference
sources as possible.
Place devices a suitable distance from the printer.
Check7 Make sure 5 devices are already connected.
Wireless Direct does not allow more than 5 devices to be connected.
Cannot Print, Scan, or Fax from a Computer Connected to the
Network
Check1 Make sure the computer is connected to the wireless router.
For more on how to check the computer settings or connection status, see your computer instruction manual
or contact its manufacturer.
Check2 If MP Drivers are not installed, install them.
•For Windows:
Install the MP Drivers using the Setup CD-ROM or install them from the Canon website.
•For Mac OS:
Install the MP Drivers from the Canon website.
Check3 Make sure wireless router does not restrict which computers can access it.
For more on connecting to and setting up your wireless router, see the wireless router instruction manual or
contact its manufacturer.
Note
• To check the MAC address or IP address of your computer, see Checking Computer IP Address or MAC
Address.
433
Network Key Unknown
WPA/WPA2 or WEP Key Set for Wireless Router Unknown, Cannot Connect
Setting an Encryption Key
WPA/WPA2 or WEP Key Set for Wireless Router Unknown, Cannot
Connect
For more on setting up a wireless router, see the instruction manual provided with the wireless router or
contact its manufacturer. Make sure your computer can communicate with the wireless router.
Note
• For Windows, set up the printer to match the wireless router settings using IJ Network Device Setup
Utility.
Setting an Encryption Key
For more on setting up a wireless router, see the instruction manual provided with the wireless router or
contact its manufacturer. Make sure your computer can communicate with the wireless router.
Note
• For Windows, set up the printer to match the wireless router settings using IJ Network Device Setup
Utility.
Selecting WPA, WPA2, or WPA/WPA2 is recommended for security reason. If your wireless router is
compatible with WPA/WPA2, you can also use WPA2 or WPA.
•Using WPA/WPA2
The authentication method, passphrase, and dynamic encryption type must be the same for the
wireless router, the printer, and your computer.
Enter the passphrase configured on the wireless router (a sequence of between 8 and 63
alphanumeric characters, or a 64-character hexadecimal number).
Either TKIP (basic encryption) or AES (secure encryption) is selected automatically as the dynamic
encryption method.
For details, see If WPA/WPA2 Details Screen Appears.
Note
• This printer supports WPA/WPA2-PSK (WPA/WPA2-Personal) and WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Personal).
434
•Using WEP
The key length, key format, key to use (one of 1 to 4), and authentication method must be the same
for the wireless router, the printer, and your computer.
To communicate with a wireless router that uses automatically generated WEP keys, you must set the
printer to use the key generated by the wireless router, entering it in hexadecimal format.
◦ For Windows:
When the WEP Details screen appears after you click Search... on the Network Settings
(Wireless LAN) screen in IJ Network Device Setup Utility, follow the on-screen instructions to set
the WEP key length, format, and the number.
For details, see If WEP Details Screen Appears.
Note
• If the printer is connected to an AirPort Base Station via LAN:
If the printer is connected to an AirPort Base Station via a LAN, check the settings in Wireless
Security of AirPort Utility.
• Select 64 bit if WEP 40 bit is selected for key length in AirPort Base Station.
• Select 1 for Key ID. Otherwise, computer will not be able to communicate with printer via the
wireless router.
435
Printer Cannot Be Used After Replacing Wireless Router or
Changing Its Settings
When you replace a wireless router, redo the network setup for the printer.
• For Windows:
Use the Setup CD-ROM or follow the instructions on the Canon website.
• For Mac OS:
Follow the instructions on the Canon website.
If this does not solve the problem, see below.
Cannot Communicate with Printer After Enabling MAC/IP Address Filtering or Encryption Key on
Wireless Router
With Encryption On, Cannot Communicate with Printer After Changing Encryption Type at Wireless
Router
Cannot Communicate with Printer After Enabling MAC/IP Address
Filtering or Encryption Key on Wireless Router
Check1 Check wireless router setting.
To check the wireless router setting, see the instruction manual provided with the wireless router or contact its
manufacturer. Make sure the computer and the wireless router can communicate with each other under this
setting.
Check2 If filtering MAC addresses or IP addresses at wireless router, check that MAC
addresses or IP addresses for computer, network device, and printer are registered.
Check3 If using WPA/WPA2 or WEP key, make sure encryption key for computer,
network device, and printer matches key set for wireless router.
In WEP setting, the WEP key, key length, key format, the key to use, and authentication method must be
consistent among the wireless router, printer, and computer.
For details, see Setting an Encryption Key.
436
With Encryption On, Cannot Communicate with Printer After
Changing Encryption Type at Wireless Router
If you change the encryption type for the printer and it subsequently cannot communicate with the
computer, make sure the encryption type for the computer and the wireless router matches the type set
for the printer.
Cannot Communicate with Printer After Enabling MAC/IP Address Filtering or Encryption Key on
Wireless Router
437
Checking Network Information
Checking Printer IP Address or MAC Address
Checking Computer IP Address or MAC Address
Checking Communication Between the Computer, the Printer, and the Wireless Router
Checking Network Setting Information
Checking Printer IP Address or MAC Address
To check the printer's IP Address or MAC address, print out the network settings information or use the
operation panel to display it.
• Display on the LCD.
LAN settings
• Print the network settings.
Printing Network Settings
For Windows, you can check the network setting information on the computer screen.
IJ Network Device Setup Utility Screen
You can display the printer's MAC address on the LCD.
System information
Checking Computer IP Address or MAC Address
To check the IP Address or MAC address of your computer, follow the instructions below.
• For Windows:
1. Select Command Prompt as shown below.
In Windows 10, right-click Start button and select Command Prompt.
In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Command Prompt from the Start screen. If Command
Prompt is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm and search for
"Command Prompt".
In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command
Prompt.
2. Enter "ipconfig/all" and press Enter.
The IP address and MAC address of your computer appear. If your computer is not connected to
a network, the IP address does not appear.
• For Mac OS:
439
1. Select System Preferences from Apple menu, and then click Network.
2. Make sure network interface used by computer is selected, and then click Advanced.
Make sure Wi-Fi is selected as network interface.
3. Check the IP address or MAC address.
Click TCP/IP to check the IP address.
Click Hardware to check the MAC address.
Checking Communication Between the Computer, the Printer, and the
Wireless Router
Perform a ping test to check if communication is taking place.
• For Windows:
1. Select Command Prompt as shown below.
In Windows 10, right-click Start button and select Command Prompt.
In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Command Prompt from the Start screen. If Command
Prompt is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm and search for
"Command Prompt".
In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command
Prompt.
2. Type the ping command and press Enter.
The ping command is as follows: ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IP address of the target device.
If communication is taking place, a message like the one shown below appears.
Reply from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255
If Request timed out appears, communication is not taking place.
• For Mac OS:
1. Start Network Utility as shown below.
In Mac OS X v10.11, Mac OS X v10.10 or Mac OS X v10.9, select Computer from Go menu of
Finder, double-click Macintosh HD > System > Library > CoreServices > Applications >
Network Utility.
In Mac OS X v10.8, open Utilities folder in Applications folder, then double-click Network
Utility.
2. Click Ping.
3. Make sure Send only XX pings (XX are numbers) is selected.
4. Enter IP address of target printer or target wireless router in Enter the network address to ping.
5. Click Ping.
440
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IP address of the target device.
A message such as the following appears.
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=3.394 ms
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=1.786 ms
64 bytes from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=1.739 ms
--- XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX ping statistics ---
3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss
If packet loss is 100%, communication is not taking place. Otherwise, computer is communicating
with target device.
Checking Network Setting Information
To check the printer's network settings information, print out the network settings information or use the
operation panel to display it.
• Display on the LCD.
LAN settings
• Print the network settings.
Printing Network Settings
441
Restoring to Factory Defaults
Important
• For Windows:
Initialization erases all network settings on the printer, making printing or scanning operation from a
computer over a network impossible. To use the printer over a network again after restoring it to the
factory defaults, use the Setup CD-ROM or follow the instructions on the Canon website to redo setup.
• For Mac OS:
Initialization erases all network settings on the printer, making printing or scanning operation from a
computer over a network impossible. To use the printer over a network again after restoring it to the
factory defaults, follow the instructions on the Canon website to redo setup.
Initialize the network setting using the printer's operation panel.
Reset setting
442
Printing Does Not Start
Check1 Make sure printer is securely plugged in and press ON button to turn it on.
The POWER lamp flashes while the printer is initializing. Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains
lit.
Note
•If you are printing large data such as photos or other graphics, printing may take longer to start. The
POWER lamp flashes while the computer is processing data and sending it to the printer. Wait until printing
starts.
Check2 Make sure printer is properly connected to computer.
If you are using a USB cable, make sure it is securely connected to both the printer and the computer. When the
USB cable is securely plugged in, check the following:
•If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the printer directly to the
computer, and retry the printing. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device. Contact
the vendor of the relay device.
•There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and retry the printing.
If you use the printer over a LAN, make sure the printer is correctly set up for network use.
Note
•For Windows: If you can use IJ Network Device Setup Utility, check the network connection status.
Check3 Make sure paper settings match information set for rear tray.
If the paper settings do not match the information set for the rear tray, an error message appears on the LCD.
Follow the instructions on the LCD to solve the problem.
Note
• You can select whether the message which prevents misprinting is displayed.
• To change the message view setting when printing or copying using the printer's operation panel:
Device user settings
• To change the message view setting when printing using the printer driver:
Changing the Printer Operation Mode (Windows)
Changing the Printer Operation Mode (Mac OS)
Check4 If printing from a computer, delete unnecessary print jobs.
•For Windows:
444
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
• For Mac OS:
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Check5 Is your printer's printer driver is selected when printing?
The printer will not print properly if you are using a printer driver for a different printer.
•For Windows:
Make sure "Canon XXX series" (where "XXX" is your printer's name) is selected in the Print dialog box.
Note
•To make the printer the one selected by default, select Set as Default Printer.
• For Mac OS:
Make sure your printer's name is selected in Printer in the Print dialog.
Note
•To make the printer the one selected by default, select the printer for Default printer.
Check6 Is print data extremely large? (Windows)
Click Print Options on Page Setup sheet of the printer driver. Then set Prevention of Print Data Loss to On in
the dialog that appears.
* This may reduce print quality.
Check7 If printing from your computer, restart computer.
445
No Ink Comes Out
Check1 Check the remaining ink level.
Checking Ink Status
Check2 Are the print head nozzles clogged?
Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
For details on printing the nozzle check pattern, print head cleaning, and print head deep cleaning, see If Printing
Is Faint or Uneven.
•If nozzle check pattern is not printed correctly:
After performing the print head cleaning, print the nozzle check pattern and examine the pattern.
•If problem is not resolved after performing print head cleaning twice:
Perform print head deep cleaning.
•If problem is not resolved after performing print head deep cleaning:
Perform system cleaning.
System cleaning consumes a great amount of ink.
Frequent system cleaning can rapidly consume ink, so perform system cleaning only when necessary.
Important
•Performing system cleaning when the remaining ink level is not enough may damage the printer.
Before performing system cleaning, check the remaining ink level of all colors. If the remaining ink level
is below the single dot (a), refill the ink tank of corresponding color.
◦ From computer:
■ For Windows:
Cleaning the Print Heads
■ For Mac OS:
Cleaning the Print Heads
◦ From operation panel:
Performing System Cleaning
446
If the problem is not resolved yet, the print head may be damaged. Contact your nearest Canon service
center to request a repair.
Important
•Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
447
Ink Runs Out Fast
After you refill the ink tanks, the printer takes in ink from the ink tanks and ink flows into the printer.
Ink may seem to run out fast due to this procedure.
448
Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error
Check1 Make sure paper is loaded.
Loading Paper
Check2 When loading paper, consider the following.
•When loading two or more sheets of paper, align the edges of the sheets before loading the paper.
•When loading two or more sheets of paper, make sure the paper stack does not exceed the paper load
limit.
However, paper may not feed correctly at the maximum capacity, depending on the type of paper or
environmental conditions (very high or low temperature and humidity). In such cases, reduce the amount of
paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit.
•Always load the paper in portrait orientation, regardless of the printing orientation.
•When you load the paper on the rear tray, place the print side facing UP and align the right and left paper
guides with the paper stack.
Loading Paper
Check3 Is paper too thick or curled?
Unsupported Media Types
Check4 When loading postcards or envelopes, consider the following:
•If a postcard is curled, it may not feed properly even though the paper stack does not exceed the paper load
limit.
Load Japanese postcards with their postcode column downward on the rear tray.
•When printing on envelopes, see Loading Envelopes, and prepare the envelopes before printing.
Once you have prepared the envelopes, load them in portrait orientation. If the envelopes are placed in
landscape orientation, they will not feed properly.
Check5 Make sure media type and paper size settings match with loaded paper.
Check6 Make sure that there are not any foreign objects in the rear tray.
449
If the paper tears in the rear tray, see List of Support Code for Error (Paper Jams) to remove it.
If there are any foreign objects in the rear tray, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug it from the power supply,
then remove the foreign object.
Note
•If the feed slot cover is opened, close it slowly.
Check7 Clean paper feed roller.
Cleaning Paper Feed Rollers
Note
•Cleaning the paper feed roller abrades it, so do this only when necessary.
If the measures above do not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a
repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
450
Print Results Are Unsatisfactory
If the print results are unsatisfactory due to white streaks, misaligned lines, or uneven colors, check the
paper and print quality settings first.
Check1 Do page size and media type settings match size and type of loaded paper?
If these settings do not match, it is not possible to obtain the proper result.
If you are printing a photograph or an illustration, an incorrect paper type setting may reduce the quality of the
printout color.
Also, if you print with an incorrect paper type setting, the printed surface may be scratched.
In borderless printing, uneven coloring may occur depending on the combination of the paper type setting and
the loaded paper.
The method for checking the paper and print quality settings differs depending on what you are using your printer
for.
Copying Check the settings using the operation panel.
Setting Items for Copying
Printing from your computer Check the settings using the printer driver.
• For Windows:
Basic Printing Setup
• For Mac OS:
Basic Printing Setup
Check2 Make sure appropriate print quality is selected (see table above).
Select a print quality suited to the paper and to what you are printing. If you notice blurs or uneven colors,
increase the print quality setting and retry the printing.
Check3 If problem is not resolved, check other causes.
See also the sections below:
Paper Is Blank/Printing Is Blurry/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Appear
Colors Are Unclear
Lines Are Misaligned
Paper Is Smudged / Printed Surface Is Scratched
Vertical Line Next to Image
Cannot Complete Printing
Lines Incomplete or Missing (Windows)
Images Incomplete or Missing (Windows)
Ink Blots / Paper Curl
451
Back of Paper Is Smudged
Uneven or Streaked Colors
452
Paper Is Blank/Printing Is Blurry/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks
Appear
Printing Is Blurry
Colors Are Wrong
453
White Streaks Appear
Check1 Check paper and print quality settings.
Print Results Are Unsatisfactory
Check2 Are the print head nozzles clogged?
Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
For details on printing the nozzle check pattern, print head cleaning, and print head deep cleaning, see If Printing
Is Faint or Uneven.
•If nozzle check pattern is not printed correctly:
After performing the print head cleaning, print the nozzle check pattern and examine the pattern.
•If problem is not resolved after performing print head cleaning twice:
Perform print head deep cleaning.
•If problem is not resolved after performing print head deep cleaning:
Perform system cleaning.
System cleaning consumes a great amount of ink.
Frequent system cleaning can rapidly consume ink, so perform system cleaning only when necessary.
Important
• Performing system cleaning when the remaining ink level is not enough may damage the printer.
Before performing system cleaning, check the remaining ink level of all colors. If the remaining ink level
is below the single dot (a), refill the ink tank of corresponding color.
◦ From computer:
454
■ For Windows:
Cleaning the Print Heads
■ For Mac OS:
Cleaning the Print Heads
◦ From operation panel:
Performing System Cleaning
If the problem is not resolved yet, the print head may be damaged. Contact your nearest Canon service
center to request a repair.
Important
•Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
•When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
Check3 When an ink tank runs out of ink, refill the ink tank.
If the remaining ink level is below the lower limit line (A), refill the ink tank with the corresponding color of ink.
After refilling the ink tank, perform system cleaning.
Important
•Performing system cleaning when the remaining ink level is not enough may damage the printer.
Before performing system cleaning, check the remaining ink level of all colors. If the remaining ink level is
below the single dot (a), refill the ink tank of corresponding color.
• From computer:
◦ For Windows:
Cleaning the Print Heads
◦ For Mac OS:
Cleaning the Print Heads
• From operation panel:
Performing System Cleaning
455
Check4 When using paper with one printable surface, make sure paper is loaded with
printable side facing up.
Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality.
Load paper with the printable side facing up.
Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side.
•When copying, see also the sections below:
Check5 Is platen glass or glass of ADF dirty?
Clean the platen glass or the glass of ADF.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Cleaning the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
Note
• If the glass of ADF is dirty, black streaks appear on the paper as shown below.
Check6 Make sure original is loaded correctly on platen glass or in ADF.
Loading Originals
Check7 Is original document is loaded with proper side facing up/down?
When loading the original on the platen glass, the side to be copied should be face down. When loading the
original in the ADF, the side to be copied should be face up.
Check8 Did you copy a printout done by this printer?
If you use a printout done by this printer as the original, print quality may be reduced depending on the condition
of the original.
Print from the printer directly, or reprint from the computer if you can reprint from it.
456
Colors Are Unclear
Check1 Is nozzle check pattern printed properly?
Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
For details on printing the nozzle check pattern, print head cleaning, and print head deep cleaning, see If Printing
Is Faint or Uneven.
•If nozzle check pattern is not printed correctly:
After performing the print head cleaning, print the nozzle check pattern and examine the pattern.
•If problem is not resolved after performing print head cleaning twice:
Perform print head deep cleaning.
•If problem is not resolved after performing print head deep cleaning:
Perform system cleaning.
System cleaning consumes a great amount of ink.
Frequent system cleaning can rapidly consume ink, so perform system cleaning only when necessary.
Important
•Performing system cleaning when the remaining ink level is not enough may damage the printer.
Before performing system cleaning, check the remaining ink level of all colors. If the remaining ink level
is below the single dot (a), refill the ink tank of corresponding color.
◦From computer:
■For Windows:
Cleaning the Print Heads
■ For Mac OS:
Cleaning the Print Heads
◦From operation panel:
Performing System Cleaning
If the problem is not resolved yet, the print head may be damaged. Contact your nearest Canon service
center to request a repair.
457
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
Check2 When an ink tank runs out of ink, refill the ink tank.
If the remaining ink level is below the lower limit line (A), refill the ink tank with the corresponding color of ink.
After refilling the ink tank, perform system cleaning.
Important
•Performing system cleaning when the remaining ink level is not enough may damage the printer.
Before performing system cleaning, check the remaining ink level of all colors. If the remaining ink level is
below the single dot (a), refill the ink tank of corresponding color.
•From computer:
◦For Windows:
Cleaning the Print Heads
◦For Mac OS:
Cleaning the Print Heads
•From operation panel:
Performing System Cleaning
Note
• Printed colors may not match screen colors due to basic differences in the methods used to produce
colors. Color control settings and environmental differences can also affect how colors appear on the
screen. Therefore, colors of printing results may be different from those on the screen.
458
Lines Are Misaligned
Check1 Check paper and print quality settings.
Print Results Are Unsatisfactory
Check2 Perform print head alignment.
If printed lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position.
Aligning the Print Head
Note
•If the problem is not resolved after performing the print head alignment, perform print head alignment
manually from your computer.
•For Windows:
Adjusting Print Head Position
• For Mac OS:
Adjusting Print Head Position
Check3 Increase print quality and try printing again.
Increasing the print quality using the operation panel or the printer driver may improve the print result.
459
Paper Is Smudged / Printed Surface Is Scratched
Paper Is Smudged
Smudged Edges Smudged Surface
Printed Surface Is Scratched
Check1 Check paper and print quality settings.
Print Results Are Unsatisfactory
Check2 Check paper type.
Make sure you are using the right paper for what you are printing.
Supported Media Types
Check3 Correct curl before loading paper.
When using Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss, even if the sheet is curled, load one sheet at a time as it is. Rolling
this paper in the opposite direction to flatten it may crack the paper surface and reduce the print quality.
We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and storing it flat.
• Plain Paper
Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side.
• Other Paper
If the paper corners curl more than 0.1 inch / 3 mm (A) in height, the paper may smudge or may not feed
properly. Follow the instructions below to correct the paper curl.
460
1. Roll up paper in opposite direction to paper curl as shown below.
2. Check that paper is now flat.
We recommend printing curl-corrected paper one sheet at a time.
Note
• Depending on paper type, the paper may smudge or may not feed properly even if it is not curled inward.
Follow the instructions below to curl the paper outward up to 0.1 inch / 3 mm (B) in height before printing.
This may improve the print result.
(C) Print side
We recommend feeding paper that has been curled outward one sheet at a time.
Check4 Set printer to prevent paper abrasion.
Adjusting the setting to prevent paper abrasion will widen the clearance between the print head and the paper. If
you notice abrasion even with the media type set correctly to match the paper, set the printer to prevent paper
abrasion using the operation panel or the computer.
This may reduce the print speed.
* Once you have finished printing, undo this setting. Otherwise, it will apply to subsequent print jobs.
• From operation panel
Press the Setup button and select Device settings > Print settings in this order, and then set Prevent
abrasion to ON.
Changing Settings from Operation Panel
• From computer
◦ For Windows:
Open the printer driver setup window, select Custom Settings in Maintenance sheet, select Prevent
paper abrasion check box, and then click OK.
To open the printer driver setup window, see Opening Printer Driver's Setup Screen.
461
◦ For Mac OS:
In the Canon IJ Printer Utility2, select Custom Settings in the pop-up menu, select Prevent paper
abrasion check box, and then click Apply.
To open the Canon IJ Printer Utility2, see Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility2.
Check5 If intensity is set high, reduce intensity setting and try printing again.
If you are printing with a high intensity setting on plain paper, the paper may absorb too much ink and become
wavy, causing paper abrasion.
•Printing from your computer
Check the intensity setting in the printer driver.
◦For Windows:
Adjusting Intensity
◦For Mac OS:
Adjusting Intensity
•Copying
Setting Items for Copying
Check6 Do not print outside recommended printing area.
If you print outside the recommended printing area of your paper, ink may stain the lower edge of the paper.
Resize the document using application software.
Print Area
Check7 Is platen glass or glass of ADF dirty?
Clean the platen glass or the glass of ADF.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Cleaning the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
Note
•If the glass of ADF is dirty, black streaks appear on the paper as shown below.
Check8 Is paper feed roller dirty?
Clean the paper feed roller.
Cleaning Paper Feed Rollers
462
Note
•Cleaning the paper feed roller abrades it, so do this only when necessary.
Check9 Is inside of printer dirty?
During duplex printing, ink may stain the inside of the printer, smudging the printout.
Perform the bottom plate cleaning to clean the inside of the printer.
Cleaning Inside the Printer (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Note
• To prevent staining inside the printer, be sure to set the correct paper size.
Check10 Set longer ink drying time.
This allows the printed surface to dry, preventing smudges and scratches.
•For Windows:
1. Make sure printer is turned on.
2. Open printer driver setup window.
Opening Printer Driver's Setup Screen
3. Click Maintenance tab and Custom Settings.
4. Drag Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set wait time and click OK.
5. Check message and click OK.
•For Mac OS:
1. Make sure printer is turned on.
2. Open Canon IJ Printer Utility2.
Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility2
3. Select Custom Settings in pop-up menu.
4. Drag Ink Drying Wait Time: slide bar to set wait time and click Apply.
5. Check message and click OK.
463
Vertical Line Next to Image
Check Is loaded paper size correct?
If the loaded paper is larger than the size you specified, a vertical line may appear in the margin.
Set the paper size to match the loaded paper.
Print Results Are Unsatisfactory
Note
•The direction of the vertical line pattern may vary depending on the image data or the print setting.
•This printer performs automatic cleaning when necessary to keep printouts clean. A small amount of ink is
ejected for cleaning.
Although the ink is normally ejected onto the ink absorber at the outer edge of the paper, it may get onto
the paper if the loaded paper is larger than the set size.
464
Scanner Does Not Work
Check 1 Make sure that your scanner or printer is turned on.
Check 2 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Check 3 If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and
connect it to a USB port on the computer.
Check 4 With network connection, check the connection status and reconnect as
needed.
Check 5 Restart the computer.
467
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Check 1 Make sure MP Drivers is installed.
If not installed, install MP Drivers from the Setup CD-ROM or our website.
Check 2 Select your scanner or printer on the application's menu.
Important
•If your scanner or printer name is displayed multiple times, select the one that does not include WIA.
Note
•The operation may differ depending on the application.
•Use the WIA driver when scanning from a WIA-compliant application.
Scanning with WIA Driver
Check 3 Make sure that the application supports TWAIN.
You cannot start ScanGear (scanner driver) from applications not supporting TWAIN.
Check 4 Scan and save images with IJ Scan Utility and open the files in your
application.
468
Cannot Send a Fax
Check1 Is power turned on?
• You cannot send faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on.
•If you unplugged the power cord without turning off the power (the POWER lamp is lit), reconnecting it turns
on the power automatically.
• If you unplugged the power cord after pressing the ON button to turn off the power (the POWER lamp is
off), reconnect it, and then press the ON button to turn on the power.
• If the power was turned off due to power failure, etc., the power is automatically turned on when the power
failure is resolved.
Important
•Confirm that the POWER lamp is off before unplugging the power cord, and then unplug the power cord.
If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
For details on how to unplug the power cord, see Unplugging the Printer.
Note
•If the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord, the
list of the faxes deleted from the printer's memory (MEMORY CLEAR REPORT) will be printed after turning
the printer on.
Summary of Reports and Lists
Check2 Is document being sent from memory or the fax being received into memory?
When the message for the transmission/reception is displayed on the Fax standby screen, a fax is being sent
from/received into printer's memory. Wait until the transmission/reception is complete.
Check3 Is telephone line type set correctly?
Check the telephone line type setting and change it as necessary.
Setting Telephone Line Type
Check4 Is Hook setting set to Disable?
When you send a fax manually, dial the number with Enable selected for Hook setting in Security control
under Fax settings, or dial the number using the telephone connected to the printer.
Fax settings
Check5 Is Dial tone detect set to ON?
Resend the fax after a while.
471
If you still cannot send the fax, select OFF for Dial tone detect in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.
Fax settings
Check6 Is fax number registered correctly in printer's directory?
Check the recipient's fax/telephone number, correct the fax/telephone number registered in the printer's directory,
and then send the document again.
Changing Registered Information
Note
•You can check the registered information in the printer's directory by printing RECIPIENT TELEPHONE
NUMBER LIST.
Summary of Reports and Lists
Check7 Does an error occur during transmission?
•Ensure that a message is displayed on the Fax standby screen. When a message is displayed on the Fax
standby screen, check the cause.
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on Fax Standby Screen
•Print ACTIVITY REPORT and check for an error.
Summary of Reports and Lists
Check8 Is document loaded properly?
Remove the document, and then reload it on the platen glass or in the ADF.
Loading Originals
Check9 Does a printer error occur?
Ensure that an error message is displayed on the LCD. When an error message is displayed on the LCD, check
the cause.
When the error message and support code are displayed, refer to List of Support Code for Error.
When only the error message is displayed, refer to Message Appears.
If you are in a hurry, press the Stop button to close the message, and then send the fax.
Check10 Is telephone line connected correctly?
Reconnect the telephone line cable to the telephone line jack.
Connecting Telephone Line
If the telephone line is connected correctly, there is a problem with your telephone line. Contact your telephone
company and the manufacturer of your terminal adapter or telephone adapter.
472
Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax
Check Check telephone line condition or connection.
If the telephone line or connection is poor, reducing the transmission start speed may correct the error.
Reduce the transmission start speed on TX start speed in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under
Fax settings.
Fax settings
473
Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax
Check1 Is power turned on?
• You cannot receive faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on.
•If you unplugged the power cord without turning off the power (the POWER lamp is lit), reconnecting it turns
on the power automatically.
• If you unplugged the power cord after pressing the ON button to turn off the power (the POWER lamp is
off), reconnect it, and then press the ON button to turn on the power.
• If the power was turned off due to power failure, etc., the power is automatically turned on when the power
failure is resolved.
Important
•Confirm that the POWER lamp is off before unplugging the power cord, and then unplug the power cord.
If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
For details on how to unplug the power cord, see Unplugging the Printer.
Note
•If the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord, the
list of the faxes deleted from the printer's memory (MEMORY CLEAR REPORT) will be printed after turning
the printer on.
Summary of Reports and Lists
Check2 Does an error occur during reception?
•Ensure that a message is displayed on the Fax standby screen. When a message is displayed on the Fax
standby screen, check the cause.
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on Fax Standby Screen
•Print ACTIVITY REPORT and check for an error.
Summary of Reports and Lists
Check3 Is telephone line cable connected to external device jack?
Reconnect it to the telephone line jack.
Connecting Telephone Line
Check4 Is a different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper
settings loaded?
475
If a different size of paper from that specified by Page size is loaded for printing faxes, the received faxes will not
be printed and will be stored in the printer's memory (Memory Reception). Load the same size of paper as that
specified by Page size, then press the OK button on the printer.
Check5 Is paper loaded?
If paper is not loaded, received faxes will be stored in the printer's memory without being printed (Memory
Reception). Load paper, and then press the OK button.
Check6 Is printer set to appropriate receive mode?
Check the receive mode setting and change it to a mode suited to your connection if necessary.
Setting Receive Mode
Check7 Is FAX RX reject set to ON?
Select OFF for FAX RX reject in Security control under Fax settings.
For details, refer to Rejecting Fax Reception.
Check8 Are there setting items set Reject in Caller rejection?
If you select Reject for any setting items in Caller rejection in Security control under Fax settings, the printer
rejects calls for setting item selected Reject.
For details, refer to Using Caller ID Service to Reject Calls.
Check9 Is the printer's memory full?
If unprinted received faxes stored in the printer's memory, print them and then delete from the printer's memory.
Then contact the sender and have the sender resend the faxes.
Document Stored in Printer's Memory
476
Quality of Received Fax is Poor
Check1 Check scan settings of sender's fax device.
Ask the sender to adjust the scan settings of the fax device.
Check2 Is ECM RX set to OFF?
Select ON for ECM RX in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.
If ECM RX is enabled, the sender's fax device resends the fax after correcting errors automatically.
Fax settings
Check3 Is sender's original document or scanning area of sender's fax device dirty?
The image quality of the fax is mainly determined by the sender's fax device. Contact the sender and ask the
sender to check whether the scanning area of the fax device is dirty.
Check4 Is ECM transmission/reception enabled although the line/connection is poor, or
is the sender's fax device compatible with ECM?
•Select ON for ECM RX in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.
Fax settings
•Contact the sender and ask the sender to check whether the fax device is set to enable ECM transmission.
If the sender's or recipient's fax device is not compatible with ECM, the fax will be sent/received without
automatic error correction.
•Reduce the reception start speed on RX start speed in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under
Fax settings.
Fax settings
Check5 Did you confirm paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Are Unsatisfactory
477
Cannot Dial
Check1 Is telephone line cable connected correctly?
Check that the telephone line cable is connected correctly.
Connecting Telephone Line
Check2 Is telephone line type of printer or external device set correctly?
Check the telephone line type setting and change it as necessary.
Setting Telephone Line Type
479
Telephone Disconnects During a Call
Check Is telephone line cable or telephone (or a peripheral device such as an external
telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem) connected correctly?
Check that the telephone line cable and the telephone (or a peripheral device such as an external telephone, an
answering machine, or a computer modem) are connected correctly.
Connecting Telephone Line
480
Power Does Not Come On
Check1 Press ON button.
Check2 Make sure power plug is securely connected to printer, and then turn it back on.
Check3 Unplug printer, leave it for at least 3 minutes, and then plug it back in and turn it
on again.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
482
Power Shuts Off By Itself
Check If printer is set to turn off automatically after a certain time, disable this setting.
If you have set the printer to turn off automatically after a specified time, the power will shut off by itself once that
time has elapsed.
•If you are using a Windows and if you do not want the printer to turn off automatically:
Open the printer driver setup window and in Auto Power in Maintenance sheet, select Disable for Auto
Power Off.
•If you are using a Mac OS and if you do not want the printer to turn off automatically:
Open Canon IJ Printer Utility2, select Power Settings in the pop-up menu, and then select Disable for
Auto Power Off on Auto Power.
Note
•You can also enable the printer to turn on/off automatically from the operation panel.
ECO settings
•If you are using a Windows, you can also enable the printer to turn on/off automatically from ScanGear
(scanner driver).
Scanner Tab
483
USB Connection Problems
Printing or Scanning Is Slow/Hi-Speed USB Connection Does Not
Work/"This device can perform faster" Message Appears (Windows)
If your system environment does not support Hi-Speed USB, the printer operates at the slower speed of
USB 1.1. In this case, the printer works properly but printing or scanning speed may slow down due to the
communication speed.
Check Check following to make sure your system environment supports Hi-Speed
USB connection.
• Does the USB port on your computer support Hi-Speed USB connection?
• Does the USB cable or the USB hub support Hi-Speed USB connection?
Be sure to use a certified Hi-Speed USB cable. We recommend that the USB cable be no longer than 10
feet / 3 meters or so.
•Does the operating system of your computer support Hi-Speed USB connection?
Install the latest update for your computer.
•Is the Hi-Speed USB driver working properly?
If necessary, obtain and install the latest version of the Hi-Speed USB driver for your computer.
Important
•For more information, contact the manufacturer of your computer, USB cable, or USB hub.
484
Cannot Communicate with Printer via USB
Check1 Make sure printer is turned on.
Check2 Connect USB cable properly.
As the illustration below, the USB port is at the back of the printer.
Check3 Make sure Enable bidirectional support is selected in Ports sheet of
properties dialog box of printer driver. (Windows)
Opening Printer Driver's Setup Screen
485
Cannot Install MP Drivers
For Windows:
For Mac OS:
For Windows:
•If installation does not start when you insert Setup CD-ROM:
Follow the instructions below to start the installation.
1. Make the following settings.
◦ In Windows 10, click Start button > File Explorer, and then click This PC from list on left.
◦ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Explorer icon in Taskbar on Desktop, and then select
This PC (Computer for Windows 8) from list on left.
◦ In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Start, and then click Computer.
2. Double-click the CD-ROM icon in the window that appears.
If the contents of the CD-ROM appear, double-click MSETUP4.EXE.
If you cannot install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM, install them from the Canon
website.
Note
• If the CD-ROM icon does not appear, try the following:
• Remove the CD-ROM from your computer and reinsert it.
• Restart your computer.
If the icon still does not appear, try a different disc and see if it appears. If it does, there is a
problem with the Setup CD-ROM. Contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
487
•If you cannot get past the Printer Connection screen:
Cannot Proceed beyond Printer Connection Screen/Connect Cable Screen
•Other cases:
Reinstall the MP Drivers.
If the MP Drivers were not installed correctly, uninstall the MP Drivers, restart your computer, and then
reinstall the MP Drivers.
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from the Canon website.
Note
• If the installer was stopped due to a Windows error, Windows operation may be unstable, and
you may not be able to install the drivers. Restart your computer and then reinstall the drivers.
For Mac OS:
Download the driver from the support page of Canon website and reinstall it.
488
Updating MP Drivers in Network Environment (Windows)
Download the latest MP Drivers.
The latest MP Drivers for your model are available for download on the Canon website.
Uninstall the existing MP Drivers and follow the installation instructions to install the latest MP Drivers that
you downloaded. In the connection method selection screen, select Use the printer with wireless LAN
connection. The printer is detected automatically in the network.
Make sure the printer was found, and install the MP Drivers following the on-screen instructions.
Note
• The network settings on the printer are not affected, so the printer can be used on the network without
redoing settings.
489
An Error Occurs
If an error occurs in printing, for example if the paper runs out or jams, a troubleshooting message appears
automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the message.
When an error occurs, a message is displayed on the computer screen or the LCD. Depending on the error,
a Support Code (error number) is displayed on the computer screen or the LCD.
When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the computer
screen:
• For Windows:
• For Mac OS:
* The screen differs depending on the OS you are using.
When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the LCD:
491
Message Appears
This section describes some of the errors and messages that may appear.
Note
• A support code (error number) is displayed on the computer or on the LCD for some errors. For details
on errors that have support code, see List of Support Code for Error.
If a message appears on the LCD, see below.
Message Appears on LCD
If a message appears on the computer, see below.
Error Regarding Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed (Windows)
Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error (Windows)
Other Error Messages (Windows)
Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed (Windows)
Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears (Mac OS)
Message Appears on LCD
Check the message and take an appropriate action.
•Check page size Press [OK]
The size of the loaded paper is different from that specified in the paper size setting.
Load the same size of paper as that specified in the paper size setting and press the OK button.
•Data error Press [OK]
A power failure has occurred or the power cord has been unplugged when the faxes are stored in the
printer's memory.
Important
• If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the printer's memory
are deleted.
• For details on how to unplug the power cord, see Unplugging the Printer.
Press the OK button.
After pressing the OK button, the list of the faxes deleted from the printer's memory (MEMORY
CLEAR REPORT) will be printed.
For details, refer to Summary of Reports and Lists.
•Cannot connect to the server; try again
You cannot connect to the server due to some communication error.
Press the OK button to dismiss the error and try again after a while.
493
Error Regarding Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed
(Windows)
The printer may have been unplugged while it was on.
Check the error message that appears on the computer and click OK.
The printer starts printing.
See Unplugging the Printer for unplugging the power cord.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error (Windows)
Check1 If POWER lamp is off, make sure printer is plugged in and turn it on.
The POWER lamp flashes while the printer is initializing. Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and
remains lit.
Check2 Make sure printer is properly connected to computer.
If you are using a USB cable, make sure it is securely connected to both the printer and the computer. When
the USB cable is securely plugged in, check the following:
•If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the printer directly to the
computer, and retry the printing. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device.
Contact the vendor of the relay device.
•There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and retry the printing.
If you use the printer over a LAN, make sure the printer is connected to the network with a LAN cable or is
correctly set up for network use.
Check3 Make sure MP Drivers are installed correctly.
Uninstall the MP Drivers following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers and
reinstall them from the Setup CD-ROM or the Canon website.
Check4 When printer is connected to your computer with a USB cable, check device
status from your computer.
Follow the procedure below to check the device status.
1. Open the Device Manager on your computer as shown below.
If the User Account Control screen appears, follow the on-screen instructions.
494
• In Windows 10, right-click Start button and select Device Manager.
• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from Settings charm on Desktop > Hardware
and Sound > Device Manager.
• In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, and Device Manager.
2. Double-click Universal Serial Bus controllers and USB Printing Support.
If the USB Printing Support Properties screen does not appear, make sure the printer is correctly
connected to the computer.
Check2 Make sure printer is properly connected to computer.
3. Click General tab and check for a device problem.
If a device error is shown, see Windows Help to resolve it.
Other Error Messages (Windows)
Check If an error message appears outside printer status monitor, check the
following:
•"Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space"
Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk.
•"Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory"
Close other applications to increase the available memory.
If you still cannot print, restart your computer and retry the printing.
•"Printer driver could not be found"
Uninstall the MP Drivers following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers and
reinstall them from the Setup CD-ROM or the Canon website.
•"Could not print Application name - File name"
Try printing again once the current job is complete.
Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is
Displayed (Windows)
If the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is installed, a screen appears asking for
permission to send the printer and application usage information every month for about ten years.
Read the information on the screen and follow the instructions below.
495
•If you agree to participate in survey program:
Click Agree and follow the on-screen instructions. The printer usage information is sent via the
Internet. Once you have completed the procedure, the information is subsequently sent automatically
and the confirmation screen does not reappear.
Note
• When the information is being sent, a warning such as an Internet security message may appear.
Make sure the program name is "IJPLMUI.exe" and allow it.
• If you clear Send automatically from the next time check box, the information will not be sent
automatically from next time and a confirmation screen will appear at the time of the next survey.
To send the information automatically, see Changing confirmation screen setting:.
•If you do not agree to participate in survey program:
Click Do not agree. The confirmation screen closes and the survey is skipped. The confirmation
screen will reappear one month later.
•To uninstall Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program:
To uninstall the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program, click Uninstall and follow the
on-screen instructions.
•Changing confirmation screen setting:
1. Make the following settings.
◦ In Windows 10, right-click Start button and select Programs and Features.
◦ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from Settings charm on Desktop >
Programs > Programs and Features.
◦ In Windows 7, or Windows Vista, select Start menu > Control Panel > Programs >
Programs and Features.
496
Note
• A confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling or starting up
software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
If you are logged in on an account with administrator privileges, follow the on-screen
instructions.
2. Select Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.
3. Select Change.
If you select Yes after you have followed the on-screen instructions, the confirmation screen will
appear at the time of the next survey.
If you select No, the information will be sent automatically.
Note
• If you select Uninstall, the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is
uninstalled. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears
(Mac OS)
If the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is installed, the printer and application
software usage information is sent every month for about ten years. The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax
Extended Survey Program icon appears in the Dock when it is time to send the printer usage
information.
Click the icon, read the information that appears, and then follow the instructions below.
497
•If you agree to participate in survey program:
Click Agree and follow the on-screen instructions. The printer usage information is sent via the
Internet. Once you have completed the procedure, the information is subsequently sent automatically
and the confirmation screen does not reappear.
Note
• If you clear Send automatically from the next time check box, the information will not be sent
automatically the next time and the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program icon
will appear in the dock at the time of the next survey.
•If you do not agree to participate in survey program:
Click Do not agree. The confirmation screen closes and the survey is skipped. The confirmation
screen will reappear one month later.
•To stop sending information:
Click Turn off. This stops the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program, and information
is not sent. To resume the survey, see Changing setting:.
•To uninstall Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program:
1. Stop Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.
Changing setting:
498
2. Select Applications from Go menu of Finder, double-click Canon Utilities folder and Inkjet
Extended Survey Program folder.
3. Move Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.app file to Trash.
4. Restart computer.
Empty Trash and restart your computer.
•Changing setting:
To display the confirmation screen every time the printer usage information is sent or to resume
surveying, follow the procedure below.
1. Select Applications from Go menu of Finder, double-click Canon Utilities folder and Inkjet
Extended Survey Program folder.
2. Double-click Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program icon.
◦Do not display the confirmation screen when information is sent:
If the check box is selected, the information will be sent automatically.
If the check box is not selected, Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program
icon will appear in the Dock at the time of the next survey. Click the icon and follow the on-
screen instructions.
◦Turn off/Turn on button:
Click the Turn off button to stop the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.
Click the Turn on button to restart the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.
499
List of Support Code for Error
Support code appears on the LCD and on your computer screen when errors occur.
A "support code" is an error number, and appears along with an error message.
When an error occurs, check the support code displayed on the LCD and on the computer screen and take
the appropriate action in response.
Support Code Appears on LCD and on Computer Screen
•1000 to 1ZZZ
1000 1200 1300 1403 1470 1471
1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1640
1700 1701 1890
•2000 to 2ZZZ
2114 2123 2700 2801 2802 2803
2900 2901
•3000 to 3ZZZ
3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407
3410 3411 3412 3413 3438 3439
3440 3441 3442 3443 3444 3445
3446 3447
•4000 to 4ZZZ
4103
•5000 to 5ZZZ
5011 5012 5040 5050 5100 5200
5400 5700 5B00 5B01
•6000 to 6ZZZ
6000 6500 6800 6801 6900 6901
6902 6910 6911 6930 6931 6932
6933 6936 6937 6938 6939 693A
500
List of Support Code for Error (Paper Jams)
If paper jams, remove it following the appropriate procedure as shown below.
• If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot or the rear tray:
1300
• If you cannot see the jammed paper at the paper output slot or the rear tray:
Paper Is Jammed inside Printer
• If the document is jammed in the ADF:
2801
• Cases other than above:
Other Cases
502
1300
Cause
Paper is jammed in paper output slot or in rear tray.
What to Do
Remove the jammed paper following the instructions below.
Important
• The printer cannot be turned off while it is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received fax or the
unsent fax is stored in the printer's memory.
Turn off the printer after making sure it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do not
unplug when turning off the printer.
If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
1. Slowly pull out paper, either from paper output slot or from rear tray, whichever is easier.
Hold the paper with both hands, and pull it out slowly so as not to tear it.
Note
•If you cannot pull out the paper, turn the printer back on without pulling forcibly. The paper may
be ejected automatically.
•If paper becomes jammed during printing and you need to turn off the printer to remove it, press
the Stop button to stop the printing before you turn off the printer.
•If the paper tears and you cannot remove the jammed paper from the paper output slot or the
rear tray, remove the paper from inside the printer.
Paper Is Jammed inside Printer
2. Reload paper and press OK button.
The printer resumes printing. Reprint the page you were printing if it was not printed properly due to
the paper jam.
503
If you turned off the printer in step 1, the print data that was sent to the printer is erased. Redo the
printing.
Note
• When reloading the paper, make sure you are using suitable paper and loading it correctly.
• We recommend using paper sizes other than A5 to print documents with photos or graphics. A5
paper may curl and jam as it leaves the printer.
If the measures above do not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a
repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
504
Paper Is Jammed inside Printer
If the jammed paper tears and you cannot remove the paper either from the paper output slot or from the
rear tray, or if the jammed paper remains inside the printer, remove the paper following the instructions
below.
Important
• The printer cannot be turned off while it is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received fax or the
unsent fax is stored in the printer's memory.
Turn off the printer after making sure it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do not unplug
when turning off the printer.
If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
Note
• If paper becomes jammed during printing and you need to turn off the printer to remove it, press the
Stop button to stop the printing before you turn off the printer.
1. Turn off printer and unplug it.
2. Open scanning unit / cover.
Important
•Do not touch clear film (A), white belt (B), or tubes (C).
If you soil or scratch these parts by touching them with paper or your hand, it could damage the
printer.
505
3. Check if jammed paper is under cartridge holder.
If the jammed paper is under the cartridge holder, move the cartridge holder to the far right or left,
whichever makes it easier to remove the paper.
When moving the cartridge holder, hold the top of the cartridge holder and slide it slowly to the far right
or left.
4. Hold jammed paper firmly in both hands.
If the paper is rolled up, pull out it.
506
5. Slowly pull out paper, so as not to tear it.
6. Make sure all jammed paper is removed.
If the paper tears when you pull out it, a bit of paper may remain in the printer. Check the following and
remove any remaining paper.
•Any paper left under the cartridge holder?
•Any small bits of paper left in the printer?
•Any paper left in the left and right empty spaces (D) in the printer?
507
7. Close scanning unit / cover gently.
All jobs in the print queue are canceled. Redo the printing.
Note
• When reloading the paper, make sure you are using suitable paper and loading it correctly. If a
paper jam message appears on your computer screen when you resume printing after removing
all the jammed paper, there may be some paper still inside the printer. Check the printer again for
any remaining bits of paper.
If the measures above do not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a
repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
508
1000
Cause
Possible causes include the following.
• There is no paper in the rear tray.
• Paper is not loaded in the rear tray properly.
What to Do
Take the corresponding actions below.
• Load paper in the rear tray.
• Align the paper guides with the both edges of the paper when you load paper in the rear tray.
• Set paper information for the paper in the rear tray.
After carrying out the above measures, press the printer's OK button.
Note
• After loading paper in the rear tray, the screen for setting rear tray paper information appears. Set
paper information for the paper in the rear tray.
• To cancel printing, press the printer's Stop button.
509
1200
Cause
Scanning unit/cover is open.
What to Do
Close the scanning unit / cover and wait for a while.
Do not close it while you are refilling an ink tank.
510
1640
Cause
The remaining ink level in one of the ink tanks may have reached the lower limit line shown on the ink
tank.
What to Do
To check the remaining ink level, visually inspect the remaining ink in the ink tank.
If the remaining ink level is below the lower limit line, refill the ink tank with the corresponding color of ink
by following the printer's instructions.
Refilling Ink Tanks
If printing is continued when the remaining ink level is below the lower limit line, the printer may consume
a certain amount of ink to return to printable status and may also become damaged.
511
1700
Cause
Ink absorber is almost full.
What to Do
Press the printer's OK button to continue printing. Contact your nearest Canon service center to request a
repair.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
Note
• In the case of warnings or errors caused by remaining ink levels, the printer cannot print or scan.
512
1890
Cause
Protective material or tape may still be attached to cartridge holder.
What to Do
Open the scanning unit / cover and make sure the protective material and tape have been removed from
the cartridge holder.
If the protective material or tape is still there, remove it and close the scanning unit / cover.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
513
2900
Cause
Scanning print head alignment sheet failed.
What to Do
Press the printer's OK button and follow the instructions below.
• Make sure the print head alignment sheet is set in the correct position and orientation on the platen
glass.
• Make sure the platen glass and the print head alignment sheet are not dirty.
• Make sure the loaded paper is correct.
For automatic print head alignment, load A4 or Letter-sized plain paper.
• Make sure the print head nozzle is not clogged.
Check the print head condition by printing the nozzle check pattern.
After carrying out the above actions, try manual print head alignment.
514
2901
Cause
Print head alignment pattern has been printed and printer is waiting to scan sheet.
What to Do
Scan the printed alignment pattern.
1. Load print head alignment sheet on platen glass.
Place the printed side down and align the mark in the upper left corner of the sheet with the
alignment mark .
2. Slowly close document cover and press printer's Black or Color button.
The printer starts scanning the print head alignment sheet, and automatically adjusts the print head
position.
515
4103
Cause
Cannot perform printing with current print settings.
What to Do
Press the printer's Stop button to cancel printing.
Then change the print settings and retry printing.
516
5011
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
What to Do
Turn off the printer and unplug it.
Plug in the printer again and turn it back on.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
517
5012
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
What to Do
Turn off the printer and unplug it.
Plug in the printer again and turn it back on.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
518
5100
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
What to Do
Cancel printing and turn off the printer.
Check the following:
• Make sure cartridge holder motion is not impeded by stabilizer, jammed paper, etc.
Remove any impediment.
• Make sure the cartridges are properly installed.
Open the scanning unit / cover, and then push the cartridge locking cover to make sure the cartridges
are installed properly.
Alternatively, push the joint buttons until they click into place.
Turn the printer back on.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• When clearing an impediment to cartridge holder motion, be careful not to touch clear film (A), white
belt (B), or tubes (C).
If you soil or scratch these parts by touching them with paper or your hand, it could damage the
printer.
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
519
5200
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
What to Do
Check the remaining ink level, and then refill the ink tank if necessary.
Turn off the printer and unplug it.
Wait about 10 minutes.
Plug in the printer again and turn it back on.
If the ink tank is refilled because it runs out of ink, perform system cleaning.
• From computer:
◦ For Windows:
Cleaning the Print Heads
◦ For Mac OS:
Cleaning the Print Heads
• From operation panel:
Performing System Cleaning
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
520
5B00
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
What to Do
Contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
Note
• In the case of warnings or errors caused by remaining ink levels, the printer cannot print or scan.
521
6000
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
What to Do
If the paper is jammed, remove it depending on the jammed location and cause.
List of Support Code for Error (Paper Jams)
Turn off the printer and unplug it.
Plug in the printer again and turn it back on.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest Canon service center to request a repair.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the printer's memory are deleted.
• Do not tilt the printer when moving it since the ink may leak out.
• When transporting the printer for repairing it, see Repairing Your Printer.
522